Table of Contents
- Contents
- Important Safety Instructions
- Basic Operations
- Printing a Document
- Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
- Network
- Security
- Using Remote UI
- Setting Menu List
- Troubleshooting (FAQ)
- Maintenance
- Appendix
- SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
- USRM2-6358-01_2017-11_en_Users_Guide.pdf
- USRM2-6341-02_2017-11_en_Users_Guide.pdf
- Contents
- Available Functions
- Launching and Closing SMS
- MEAP Application Settings
- System Settings
- List of Error Messages (MEAP)
- Errors Relating to the [Login] Page
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page
- Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page
- Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page
- Other Errors
- Using This Guide
- Disclaimer
- Trademarks
- SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
Canon LBP325x User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for LBP325x by Canon which is a product in the Laser Printers category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
LBP325x
User's Guide
USRMA-4266-00 2019-08 en Copyright CANON INC. 2019
Contents
Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Maintenance and Inspections .................................................................................................................................... 9
Consumables .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Main Functions ....................................................................................................................................................... 16
Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 17
Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 20
Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Multi-Purpose Tray .............................................................................................................................................. 23
Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 24
Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 25
Display ........................................................................................................................................................ 28
Using the Operation Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 30
Entering Text ...................................................................................................................................................... 33
Turning ON/OFF the Power ...................................................................................................................................... 35
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine ............................................................................................................... 37
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 39
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ....................................................................................................................... 41
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................... 46
Loading Envelopes or Postcards ........................................................................................................................... 49
Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................... 53
Specifying Paper Size and Type ............................................................................................................................. 57
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ......................................................................................... 58
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray .................................................................................. 60
Saving Energy ......................................................................................................................................................... 62
Entering Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 63
Setting Auto Shutdown Time ................................................................................................................................ 65
Printing a Document ................................................................................................................................ 69
Printing from a Computer ....................................................................................................................................... 70
Canceling Prints ................................................................................................................................................. 73
Various Printing Methods ........................................................................................................................................ 75
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print) ......................................................................................................... 77
Changing Default USB Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 86
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print) ............................................................................................ 88
Using the Encrypted Secured Print .................................................................................................................. 91
I
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print) .................................................................................. 92
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine .................................................................................................... 96
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box ...................................................................................................................... 99
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print) ....................................................................................................... 101
Print Settings for Direct Print ....................................................................................................................... 104
Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print) ................................................................................................................. 111
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................... 118
Connecting to a Mobile Device ............................................................................................................................... 119
Utilizing the Machine through Applications ........................................................................................................... 120
Using AirPrint ................................................................................................................................................... 121
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 125
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ........................................................................................................................... 127
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 128
Managing the Machine Remotely .......................................................................................................................... 132
Network ............................................................................................................................................................ 134
Connecting to a Network ...................................................................................................................................... 135
Connecting to a Wired LAN ................................................................................................................................ 137
Setting IP Addresses ......................................................................................................................................... 139
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................... 140
Setting IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................................................................ 144
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer .......................................................................................... 148
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ............................................................................................... 149
Enabling IPP/IPPS ....................................................................................................................................... 155
Conguring Printer Ports ................................................................................................................................... 161
Setting Up Print Server ...................................................................................................................................... 164
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ....................................................................................... 168
Conguring Ethernet Settings ............................................................................................................................ 169
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................. 171
Conguring DNS .............................................................................................................................................. 172
Conguring WINS ............................................................................................................................................. 178
Conguring SNTP ............................................................................................................................................. 181
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................................. 184
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software ......................................................................................... 190
Conguring SMB .............................................................................................................................................. 194
Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing ......................................................................................... 197
Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 200
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................ 201
Preventing Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................................................ 202
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................... 204
Setting the System Manager Password .......................................................................................................... 205
Setting the Department ID Management ....................................................................................................... 208
Setting a Remote UI PIN .............................................................................................................................. 215
II
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 216
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ...................................................................................................... 217
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules .................................................................................................. 223
Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 226
Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 229
Restricting the Printing Operations ..................................................................................................................... 230
Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 234
Restricting Operation Panel Functions ................................................................................................................. 237
Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 240
Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 241
Disabling the LAN Port ...................................................................................................................................... 242
Hiding the Print Job History ................................................................................................................................ 243
Implementing Robust Security Features ................................................................................................................ 245
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications ............................................................................................................ 246
Conguring IPSec Settings ................................................................................................................................. 251
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ............................................................................................................... 261
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ...................................................................................... 267
Generating Key Pairs ................................................................................................................................... 268
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................................... 277
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ..................................................................................................... 280
Using Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................ 283
Starting Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................... 284
Remote UI Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 287
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status ........................................................................................ 293
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents .......................................................................................................... 298
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ............................................................................................................. 301
Saving/Loading Registered Data ............................................................................................................................ 303
Saving Registered Data ..................................................................................................................................... 304
Loading Registered Data ................................................................................................................................... 306
Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 309
Setup Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 310
Control Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 311
Paper Source ................................................................................................................................................... 325
Network .......................................................................................................................................................... 326
Layout ............................................................................................................................................................. 347
Print Quality ..................................................................................................................................................... 351
Interface ......................................................................................................................................................... 355
User Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 358
Print Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 371
Settings Specic to Print Mode ........................................................................................................................... 373
UFR II ........................................................................................................................................................ 374
PCL ........................................................................................................................................................... 375
Imaging .................................................................................................................................................... 381
III
XPS ........................................................................................................................................................... 387
PDF ........................................................................................................................................................... 391
PS ............................................................................................................................................................. 395
MEAP Settings .................................................................................................................................................. 398
Check Counter ................................................................................................................................................. 400
Initialize Menu ................................................................................................................................................. 401
Utility Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 402
Job Menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 406
Reset Menu ........................................................................................................................................................... 408
Select Feeder Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 410
Troubleshooting (FAQ) .......................................................................................................................... 418
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 420
Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 422
Exterior ........................................................................................................................................................... 423
Fixing Unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 424
Replacing the Toner Cartridges .............................................................................................................................. 425
Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 431
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality ............................................................................................................... 433
Adjusting Print Density ...................................................................................................................................... 434
Adjusting Print Position ..................................................................................................................................... 436
Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 441
Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 450
Checking Consumables ......................................................................................................................................... 453
Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 455
Initializing Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 456
Initializing the Network Settings ......................................................................................................................... 457
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 459
Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 460
Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 461
Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 462
Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 463
So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 465
Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 467
Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 468
Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 470
Paper Feeder PF-C ............................................................................................................................................ 474
Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 475
Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 479
System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 483
Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 484
Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 485
IV
Options ................................................................................................................................................................ 487
Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 488
System Options ................................................................................................................................................ 489
Installing the ROM ...................................................................................................................................... 491
Installing an SD Card ................................................................................................................................... 495
Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 500
Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 501
Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 502
Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 505
Managing MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................................ 507
Using FTP Clients .................................................................................................................................................. 508
Preparing for Using the FTP Server ..................................................................................................................... 509
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print) ........................................................................................................................ 512
Specifying Settings via FTP Client ........................................................................................................................ 514
Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 521
Basic Windows Operations ................................................................................................................................. 522
Font Samples ................................................................................................................................................... 530
Notice ............................................................................................................................................................. 535
V
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................................................................................. 9
Consumables ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
Important Safety Instructions
1
Important Safety Instructions
51W4-000
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine
and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do
not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting
from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party
authorized by Canon.
Important Safety Instructions
2
Installation
51W4-001
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an
appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a re or electrical shock
●A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, sofas, rugs, or similar objects)
●A damp or dusty location
●A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
●A location subject to high temperatures
●A location exposed to open ames
●Near alcohol, paint thinners or other ammable substances
Other warnings
●Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers lled with liquid on the machine. If foreign
substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power
plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power
cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
●An unstable location
●A location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
●When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting
in injury.
●When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the oor or
walls. Doing so may result in injury.
Important Safety Instructions
3
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
●This machine generates a slight amount of ozone and other emissions during normal use. These emissions
are not harmful to health. However, they may be noticeable during extended use or long production runs in
poorly ventilated rooms. To maintain a comfortable working environment, it is recommended that the room
where the machine operates be appropriately ventilated. Also avoid locations where people would be
exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
●A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
●A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
●A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
●A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
●A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or
where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
●Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed
is heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location.
Using the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the
machine. Let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
In altitudes of above sea level 3,000 m or higher
●Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters
above sea level, or higher.
Important Safety Instructions
4
Power Supply
51W4-002
●Use only a power supply that meets the specied voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a re
or electrical shock.
●The machine must be connected to a socket-outlet with grounding connection by the provided power cord.
●Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other
devices.
●Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
●Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a re or
electrical shock.
●Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may
result in a re, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
●Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sucient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.
When connecting power
●Do not connect the power cord to an uninterruptible power source. Doing so may result in malfunction of or
damage to the machine at power failure.
●If you plug this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to
connect other devices.
●Do not connect the power cord to the auxiliary AC power outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
●Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
Important Safety Instructions
5
Handling
51W4-003
●Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes
an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or
excessive heat. Continued use may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are high-
voltage and high-temperature components inside the machine
which may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal
and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
●Do not use ammable sprays near this machine. If ammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside this machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then
unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface
cables, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not
touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
●This machine generates a low level magnetic ux and ultrasonic waves. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and
feel abnormalities, please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
●Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
●For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
●Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,
this may result in personal injury.
●The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact
with these areas to prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use
caution when handling it. Failure to do so may result in burns.
Important Safety Instructions
6
●Do not carry the machine with any of the paper drawer or optional
paper feeder installed. Otherwise, they may fall, resulting in injury.
Laser beam
●If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
When transporting the machine
To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
●Remove the toner cartridge.
●Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
●Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is
recommended that the machine be installed in a place other than the oce.
Other precautions
●Follow the caution instructions on labels and the like found on this machine.
●Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
●Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the
machine.
●Do not touch the contacts ( ) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
Important Safety Instructions
7
●To prevent a paper jam, do not turn OFF the power, open/close the covers, and load/unload the paper when
printing.
Important Safety Instructions
8
Maintenance and Inspections
51W4-004
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to
observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting.
●Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so
may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust
may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a re if it comes into contact with electricity.
●Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use
alcohol, benzine, paint thinner, or other ammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels. If
these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static
electricity or result in a re or electrical shock.
●Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,
cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components
may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
●When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
●When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges or the like, be careful not to get any toner on
your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
Important Safety Instructions
9
Consumables
51W4-005
●Do not dispose of used toner cartridges or the like in open ames. Also, do not store toner cartridges or
paper in a location exposed to open ames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in burns or re.
●If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a
soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have
safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
●The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic ux. If you are using a cardiac pacemaker and feel
abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician immediately.
●Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
●Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,
immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.
●Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold
water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
●Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,
consult a physician or poison control center immediately.
●Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge or the like. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
●When removing the sealing tape from the toner cartridge, pull it out completely but without using excessive
force. Doing otherwise may cause the toner to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
●Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.
●Do not touch the toner cartridge memory ( ) or the electrical contacts ( ). To avoid scratching the
surface of the drum inside the machine or exposing it to light, do not open the drum protective shutter ( ).
Important Safety Instructions
10
●Except when necessary, do not take out the toner cartridge from the packing material or from this machine.
●The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Do not move it close to products susceptible to magnetism
including oppy disks and disk drives. Doing so may result in data corruption.
Storing the toner cartridge
●Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 0 °C to 35 °C
Storage humidity range: 35 % to 85 % RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*
●Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used.
●When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage, place the removed toner cartridge in the
original packing material.
●When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not
return to its original condition even if it is shaken.
* Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a
difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridge. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of
toner cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations
●Locations exposed to open ames
●Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more
●Locations exposed to excessive salty air
●Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
●Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
●Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
●Locations with a large amount of dust
●Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit
toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any
malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see global.canon/ctc.
Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges and the like
●The repairing parts and toner cartridges and the like for the machine will be available for at least seven (7)
years after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Toner cartridge packing materials
●Save the packing materials for the toner cartridge. They are required when transporting this machine.
●The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
Important Safety Instructions
11
●After you pull out the sealing tape from the toner cartridge, dispose of it in accordance with the applicable
local regulations.
When disposing of a used toner cartridge or the like
●When discarding a toner cartridge or the like, place it in the original packing material to prevent toner from
scattering from inside, and dispose of it in accordance with the applicable local regulations.
Important Safety Instructions
12
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 14
Main Functions .................................................................................................................................................... 16
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 17
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 22
Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 23
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 24
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 25
Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 28
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 30
Entering Text .................................................................................................................................................. 33
Turning ON/OFF the Power ................................................................................................................................. 35
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 37
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................................................... 39
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................ 41
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ........................................................................................................ 46
Loading Envelopes or Postcards ..................................................................................................................... 49
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................... 53
Specifying Paper Size and Type ....................................................................................................................... 57
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer ............................................................................... 58
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ....................................................................... 60
Saving Energy ...................................................................................................................................................... 62
Entering Sleep Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 63
Setting Auto Shutdown Time .......................................................................................................................... 65
Basic Operations
13
Basic Operations
51W4-006
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
◼Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 17)
◼Using the Operation Panel
This section describes how to use the keys on the operation panel to perform various operations, such as adjusting
and checking the settings. Using the Operation Panel(P. 30)
◼Turning ON/OFF the Power
This section describes how to turn ON/OFF the power. Turning ON/OFF the Power(P. 35)
◼Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 39)
Basic Operations
14
Main Functions
51W4-08E
This manual covers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions
are available on the model you purchased.
: With function : Without function
Function LBP325x
Print
2-sided printing
Wired LAN connection
Wireless LAN connection
USB connection
Remote UI
Keys and Certicates
Linking with Mobile Devices Black and white LCD
Display
Department ID Management
Paper Feeder PF-C Optional
Barcode Printing Kit Optional
PCL International Font Set Optional
SD CARD Optional
●For the available driver types, see the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see
the Canon website (https://global.canon/).
LINKS
Viewing User's Guide(P. 505)
Basic Operations
16
Parts and Their Functions
51W4-007
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In
addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the
toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips on
how to use the machine properly.
Front Side(P. 18)
Back Side(P. 20)
Interior(P. 22)
Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 23)
Paper Drawer(P. 24)
Operation Panel(P. 25)
Basic Operations
17
Front Side
51W4-008
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation(P. 3)
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 431)
Multi-purpose tray
Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46)
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of numeric keys, a display, status indicators, etc. You can perform all the
operations and specify settings from the operation panel. Operation Panel(P. 25) Display(P. 28)
Power switch
Press the power switch to turn ON the power. When turning OFF the power, do not use this switch, but follow
the procedures shown in Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35) .
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper to prevent paper in the output tray from falling.
Basic Operations
18
Front cover
Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridges or removing jammed paper from inside the machine.
Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 425)
Interior(P. 22)
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper
Drawer(P. 41)
USB memory port (For USB memory)
You can connect a USB memory device to the machine and directly print the data from the USB memory
device. You can directly print the data in the USB memory device without using a computer. ( Printing
from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 77) ). Also, connect a USB memory device when exporting or
importing the settings of the machine ( Import/Export Set.(P. 368) ).
Right cover
Open the right cover to install the optional ROM. Installing the ROM(P. 491)
Basic Operations
19
Back Side
51W4-009
Back cover
Open the back cover when clearing paper jams. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the
online manual website.
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. For more
information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation(P. 3)
Power socket
Connect the power cord.
SD card slot cover
Open the SD card slot cover when installing the optional SD card. Installing an SD Card(P. 495)
USB port (for USB device connection)
Connect a USB device that is used with MEAP applications. Also, connect a USB memory device when
exporting or importing the settings of the machine ( Import/Export Set.(P. 368) ).
USB port (for computer connection)
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
ACT indicator
The ACT indicator blinks while data is being sent or received.
Basic Operations
20
Interior
51W4-00A
Transport guide (at the back)
If there is a paper jam inside the machine, raise the transport guide toward the front of the machine to
remove the jammed paper. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual
website.
Transport guide (at the front)
If there is a paper jam inside the machine, raise the transport guide toward the back of the machine to
remove the jammed paper. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual
website.
Duplex transport guide
If paper has jammed during 2-sided printing, lower the duplex transport guide to remove the jammed paper.
For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
Basic Operations
22
Multi-Purpose Tray
51W4-00C
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release lever that is marked with arrow in the illustration to release the lock and slide
the paper guides.
Paper tray
Pull out the paper tray when loading paper.
Tray extension
Open the tray extension when loading large paper.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46)
Basic Operations
23
Paper Drawer
51W4-00E
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine. Press the lock release levers that are marked with arrows in the illustrations to release the locks
and slide the paper guides.
Lock release lever (for extending the paper drawer)
When loading Legal size paper, the paper drawer needs to be extended. Press this lever to release the lock
and extend the length of the paper drawer.
Paper level indicator
Indicates the remaining amount of paper. The mark moves downward as the remaining amount of paper
decreases.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 41)
Basic Operations
24
Operation Panel
51W4-00F
Display
Displays the current printing or other operation status, error information, toner cartridge status, etc.
Display(P. 28)
Job Status/Cancel key
If you press this key when the [ ] indicator is lit or blinking, a document being printed and documents
waiting to be printed are listed. You can select the document from the list and cancel printing of the
document. From the Operation Panel(P. 74)
Back key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)
Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 33)
[*] key
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Basic Operations
25
Ready indicator
Lights up when the machine is ready for printing or otherwise blinks.
Message indicator
●Lights up when a problem occurs to disable printing. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)"
on the online manual website.
●Lights up if the machine enters sleep mode while being off line.
Job indicator
Lights up when the machine is receiving print data or any print data remains in the memory of the machine.
Blinks when print data is being processed.
Energy Saver key
Press to put the machine into sleep mode. This key lights up in green when the machine is in sleep mode.
Press the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
Application key
Each press of this key cycles through the functions in the order of: Print Screen MEAP1 MEAP2 ...
MEAP8 USB Direct Print Print Screen. Select the function you want to use. If you press this key without
logging on when department ID management is enabled, the authentication screen is displayed.
Select Feeder key
Press to select the paper source or specify the paper size. Select Feeder Menu(P. 410)
[ID] key
Displays the login screen for using the MEAP function. After you nish using the machine, press this key
again to log off.
Clear key
Press to delete the entered numbers and text.
Online key
Switches between online mode (printing jobs are accepted) and oine mode (no printing job is accepted).
This key lights up green when the machine is online and goes off when the machine is oine. Usually, keep
the machine online, but set it to oine when specifying settings of User Maintenance(P. 358) in the
setting menu.
●If you do not operate the key for a length of time when the machine is oine and the Main
Screen(P. 28) is displayed, the machine automatically becomes online. You can select <Auto Reset Time>
to change this time value ( Auto Reset Time(P. 313) ).
[#] key
Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".
Basic Operations
26
Utility key/[ ] key
●Displays the Utility menu. You can display the total number of printed pages and print internal system
information for checking. Utility Menu(P. 402)
●When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen. When entering text, press to move the
cursor to the left.
Job key/[ ] key
●Displays the Job menu. You can check the print logs. Job Menu(P. 406)
●When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to increase a value.
Settings key/[ ] key
●Displays the Setup menu. You can specify settings of the machine. Setup Menu(P. 310)
●When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen. When entering text, press to move the
cursor to the right.
Reset key/[ ] key
●Displays the Reset menu. You can cancel all processes, delete data in memory, and turn OFF the power.
Reset Menu(P. 408)
●When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When
changing setting values, press to decrease a value.
[OK] key
Press to apply settings or specied details.
LINKS
Using the Operation Panel(P. 30)
Basic Operations
27
Display
51W4-00H
The display shows the printing status and the screens for specifying settings. It also
shows error messages and toner cartridge status.
Main Screen
Status indication
Displays the current status or operation mode of the machine.
Paper size indication
Displays the currently selected paper size.
The following paper sizes are shown in an abbreviated form.
●Legal: LG
●Letter:LT
●Statement: ST
●Executive: EX
●Foolscap: FC
●Index Card: IC
●Indian Legal: ILG
●Postcard: PD
●Reply Postcard: P2
●4 on 1 Postcard: P4
●Envelope NAGAGATA 3: N3
●Envelope YOUGATANAGA 3: YN3
●Envelope No. 10 (COM10): CO
●Envelope Monarch: MO
●Envelope ISO-C5: EC5
●Envelope DL: DL
●Free Size: FR
●Custom Paper Size Landscape: 80
●Custom Paper Size Portrait: 80R
Toner cartridge status indication
Displays the status of toner cartridges.
Menu Screen
Press ( ), ( ), ( ), ( ), or ( ) to display the corresponding menu screen. The
screen displayed when ( ) is pressed is shown below as an example.
Setting Menu List(P. 309)
Basic Operations
28
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-
screen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example. For more information about the displayed messages, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online
manual website.
LINKS
Using the Operation Panel(P. 30)
Basic Operations
29
Using the Operation Panel
51W4-00J
Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.
Using /
Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If
the scroll bar is displayed, use / to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are
inverted when it is selected.
Changing a Setting Value
Use / to enter values.
●Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
Basic Operations
30
Using /
Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen
Press to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.
●You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing , and return to the previous screen by pressing
.
Moving the Cursor
Use / to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 33)
Using
Press to apply a setting.
Using ( )
To return to the main screen after exiting the setting menu, press ( ).
Using the Numeric Keys
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 33)
●Depending on the screen, you cannot use the numeric keys to enter values. In that case, enter with /
.
Basic Operations
31
Entering Text
51W4-00K
Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.
Switching the Type of Text
Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
Types of Text That Can Be Entered
Text that can be entered is listed below.
Key A a 12
(Not available) 1
ABC abc 2
DEF def 3
GHI ghi 4
JKL jkl 5
MNO mno 6
Basic Operations
33
PQRS pqrs 7
TUV tuv 8
WXYZ wxyz 9
(Not available) 0
(space) @./-_!?&$%#()[]{}<>*+=",;:'^`|\ (Not available)
●Press when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to display enterable symbols in the
screen. Use / / / to select the symbol you want to enter, and press .
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.
Moving the Cursor
Press or to move the cursor.
Entering a Space
Press , and press .
Example of Entering Text and Numbers
Example: "Canon 1"
1Press repeatedly until <A> is selected.
2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.
3Press repeatedly until <a> is selected.
4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.
5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.
7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
8Press , and press .
9Press repeatedly until <12> is selected.
10 Press .
11 Press .
Basic Operations
34
Turning ON/OFF the Power
51W4-00L
The power switch is used to turn ON the machine. However, when turning OFF the machine, be sure to shut down the
machine from the operation panel without using the power switch. This procedure is the same as that for turning
ON/OFF a computer.
Turning ON the Power(P. 35)
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35)
Turning ON the Power
Press the power switch of the machine. When the main screen appears on the display of the operation panel after self-
diagnosis is performed, the machine is ready for printing.
●A message may be displayed after the self-diagnosis. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on
the online manual website.
●If you specify the quick startup settings, you can reduce a waiting time after the power is turned on.
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 37)
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)
When turning OFF the machine, shut down the machine from the operation panel.
Performing a Shutdown without Using the Power Switch
●If you press the power switch to turn OFF the power, an unexpected error may occur. Follow the procedure
below to properly turn OFF the power.
●If you have enabled the quick start function, you can press the power switch to turn OFF the power.
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 37)
1Press ( ).
Basic Operations
35
2Use / to select <Shut Down>, and press .
3Select <Yes>, and press .
➠After the message below appears, the power is automatically turned OFF.
When <Could not execute.> appears
●There is remaining print data. Delete the data ( Reset Menu(P. 408) ), and retry the operation. To
cancel the operation, press ( ).
●It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until
the display turns off.
Do not turn ON the power immediately after turning OFF the power
●Wait for 10 seconds or more, and then turn ON the power.
Power consumption after power OFF
●The machine slightly consumes power even after the power is turned OFF. To completely eliminate power
consumption, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
LINKS
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 37)
Basic Operations
36
Performing a Quick Start of the Machine
51W4-00R
If you specify the quick startup settings, you can reduce the time from when the power switch is pressed until the
screens become operable. The way of turning OFF the power to perform a quick start of the machine is called "quick
turn-OFF."
Conguring Quick Startup Settings(P. 37)
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Quick Turn-OFF)(P. 38)
When you are using a network
●If any of the settings below is <On>, the quick start function is disabled.
- RARP, BOOTP, IPv6 Network(P. 134)
-IPSec Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 251)
When you are using the MEAP function
●Check whether the currently installed MEAP applications support the quick start function.
Conguring Quick Startup Settings
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Control Menu>, and press .
3Select <Main Pwr Quick Start>, and press .
4Select <Off> or <On>, and press .
<Off>
Disables the Quick Start function.
<On>
Enables the Quick Start function.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Basic Operations
37
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Quick Turn-OFF)
If you press the power switch to turn OFF the power when the quick start function is enabled, a quick start of the
machine is performed when the machine is turned ON next time (quick turn-OFF).
Do not unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet after performing a quick turn-
OFF
●Do not unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet after turning OFF the power by performing a quick
turn-OFF. Doing so may damage the internal components of the machine. Before you unplug the power plug
when relocating the machine, turn ON the power, and then perform a shutdown. Turning OFF the Power
(Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35)
●When the machine is performing a job or is in an error state or after you change any setting using the
operation panel or Remote UI, pressing the power switch does not trigger a quick turn-OFF, but triggers a
shutdown instead.
●If the power is turned OFF by a shutdown operation even when the quick start function is enabled, the
machine starts as usual when it is turned ON next time.
●If you perform the auto shutdown timer function when the quick start function is enabled, a quick turn-OFF
is performed. Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 65)
●If you turn ON the power immediately after performing a quick turn-OFF, it may take some time for the
machine to start up.
Basic Operations
38
Loading Paper
51W4-00S
You can load paper into the paper drawer and multi-purpose tray. Load the paper you usually use into the paper
drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the multi-purpose tray when you
temporarily use size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Available Paper(P. 470) for
available paper sizes and types.
About Paper
Precautions for Paper(P. 39)
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 40)
How to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 41)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46)
Loading Envelopes or Postcards(P. 49)
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 53)
Conguring the Settings for the Loaded Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 57)
Precautions for Paper
Do not use the following types of paper:
●A paper jam or printing error may occur.
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
- Damp paper
- Very thin paper
- Thin coarse paper
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Highly textured paper
- Glossy paper
Notes on use of paper
●Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper
that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in
poor print quality.
Basic Operations
39
Paper handling and storage
●It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused
should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a at surface.
●Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
●Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
●Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
●Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes
in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
●Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form on and around the paper output
area. There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from
xing toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine
When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.
◼How to Store the Printed Paper
●Store on a at surface.
●Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting
in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.
●Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
●To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
●When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have
undergone a change of color.
●Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.
◼Precautions When Applying Adhesive
●Always use insoluble adhesive.
●Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
●When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.
Basic Operations
40
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
51W4-00U
1660-02Y
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the
paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46)
Loading Standard Size Paper(P. 41)
Loading a Custom Size Paper(P. 43)
Paper Orientation
See the table below to load available paper in correct orientation.
Paper Orientation
A4, B5, A5 (portrait), A6, Legal, Letter,
Statement, Executive, Foolscap, 16K,
Indian Legal, Custom (portrait)
A5 (landscape), Custom (landscape)
●Follow the procedure below when loading paper into the optional paper feeder.
Loading Standard Size Paper
To load paper whose size is found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use the following procedure. For
paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings, see Loading a Custom Size Paper(P. 43) .
1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
2Adjust the positions of the paper guides to the paper size you want to use.
●Press the lock release lever ( ) to align the projection ( ) to the appropriate paper size marking.
Basic Operations
41
When loading Legal size paper
●Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.
3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the paper guide
on the rear side of the paper drawer.
●Insert the paper with the print side face down.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 53) .
4Set the paper drawer.
Basic Operations
42
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 58)
When changing the paper size or type
●When you have changed the paper size or paper type, always check the setting. If the loaded paper and
the congured paper settings do not match, printing is not performed properly.
●To print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not supporting
paper size and type settings, specify <Standard Paper Size> and <Default Paper Type>. Select Feeder
Menu(P. 410)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46) ), with the side to print face up
(previously printed side face down).
●When you want to print on the back side of the paper that is already printed, set <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> to
<2nd Side> in the setting menu of the operation panel. Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 415)
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
Loading a Custom Size Paper
To load custom size paper or other paper whose size is not found in the paper size markings on the paper drawer, use
the following procedure.
1Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
2Slide the paper guides apart.
●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
Basic Operations
43
When loading paper that is longer than A4
●Press the lock release lever, and extend the paper drawer.
3Load the paper so that the edge of the paper stack is aligned against the front side of
the paper drawer.
●Place the paper stack with the print side face down.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit line when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
●When loading paper with a logo, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 53) .
Basic Operations
44
4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5Insert the paper drawer into the machine.
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 58)
When changing the paper size or type
●When you have changed the paper size or paper type, always check the setting. If the loaded paper and
the congured paper settings do not match, printing is not performed properly.
●To print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not supporting
paper size and type settings, specify <Standard Paper Size> and <Default Paper Type>. Select Feeder
Menu(P. 410)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46) ), with the side to print face up
(previously printed side face down).
●When you want to print on the back side of the paper that is already printed, set <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> to
<2nd Side> in the setting menu of the operation panel. Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 415)
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 470)
Basic Operations
45
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
51W4-00W
1660-030
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray.
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 41)
Paper Orientation
See the table below to load available paper in correct orientation.
Paper Orientation
A4, B5, A5 (portrait), A6, Legal, Letter, Statement, Executive,
Foolscap, 16K, Index Card, Indian Legal, Custom (portrait),
Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 on 1 Postcard, Envelope
A5 (landscape), Custom (landscape)
1Open the cover.
●Hold the left and right side handles, and open the cover.
2Pull out the paper tray and the tray extension.
●Pull out the tray extension when loading large paper.
3Spread the paper guides apart.
●Press the lock release lever to slide the paper guides outward.
Basic Operations
46
4Insert the paper into the multi-purpose tray until the paper stops.
●Insert the paper with the print side face up.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading paper
●Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide ( ). Loading too much paper can
cause paper jams.
●When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes or Postcards(P. 49) or
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 53) .
5Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Press the lock release lever and slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the
edges of the paper.
Basic Operations
47
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 60)
When changing the paper size or type
●When you have changed the paper size or paper type, always check the setting. If the loaded paper and
the congured paper settings do not match, printing is not performed properly.
●To print from an OS not supporting printer drivers or from a mobile device or other device not supporting
paper size and type settings, specify <Standard Paper Size> and <Default Paper Type>. Select Feeder
Menu(P. 410)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face up (previously printed side face down).
●When you want to print on the back side of the paper that is already printed, set <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> to
<2nd Side> in the setting menu of the operation panel. Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 415)
●Load one sheet of paper each time you print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 470)
Basic Operations
48
Loading Envelopes or Postcards
51W4-00X
Before loading envelopes or postcards, make some preparations such as attening any curls on them. Also pay
attention to the orientation of envelopes or postcards and which side is face up. Note that neither envelopes nor
postcards can be loaded in the paper drawer.
Loading Envelopes(P. 49)
Loading Postcards(P. 51)
●This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes or postcards. For the general procedure for loading envelopes
or postcards in the multi-purpose, see Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46) .
Loading Envelopes
◼Before Loading Envelopes
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
1Close the ap of each envelope.
2Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly.
3Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.
Basic Operations
49
4Align the edges of the envelope on a at surface.
◼Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Load the envelopes in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the non-glued side (front
side) face down. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Envelopes YOUGATANAGA 3, ISO-C5, Monarch, No. 10 (COM10), or DL
Load the envelope so that the edge with the ap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
Envelope NAGAGATA 3
Insert the envelope with the ap toward you.
Basic Operations
50
Loading Postcards
●For postcards, automatic 2-sided printing is impossible. If you want to print on both sides of the postcard,
rst print on one side and then print on the other side.
●Before loading the postcards, atten any curls on them. With curls remaining, printouts may be skewed or
images may be printed distorted.
◼Loading Postcards in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Insert the postcard with the print side face up and with the short edge toward the machine if the type of postcard is
regular or 4-on-1 or the long edge toward the machine if the type of postcard is reply.
Postcard
Insert the postcard with the upper end toward the machine.
Reply Postcard
Unfold the postcard and insert it with the upper end toward the machine.
Basic Operations
51
4 on 1 Postcard
Insert the postcard with the upper end toward the machine.
Basic Operations
52
Loading Preprinted Paper
51W4-00Y
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 53)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 55)
●This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For the
general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray, see the following.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 41)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46)
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Basic Operations
53
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face down.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Basic Operations
54
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
When a document to print consists of an odd number of pages, set <Alternative Method> to <Off> in the setting menu
of the operation panel. Alternative Method(P. 350)
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face up.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
Basic Operations
55
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
When loading paper in the paper drawer
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face up.
When loading paper in the multi-purpose tray
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
The <Paper Feed Method> setting
●When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you
switch between 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>,
the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face up for paper drawer
or down for multi-purpose tray) can also be used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you
frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. Paper Feed Method(P. 366)
Basic Operations
56
Specifying Paper Size and Type
51W4-010
You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
●If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
Basic Operations
57
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer
51W4-011
Specify the paper size and type as necessary depending on the paper you load in the paper drawer.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select one of <Drawer 1 Paper Size> to <Drawer 4 Paper Size>, and
press .
●<Drawer 2 Paper Size> to <Drawer 4 Paper Size> are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
3Select the paper size, and press .
For A5 size/custom size paper
●A5 size or custom size paper can be loaded in either portrait or landscape orientation. See the table below
to select the setting according to the orientation of the paper.
Paper size Orientation Setting
A5 *1 < A5R>
< A5>
Custom size paper *2 < Custom Size R>
< Custom Size>
*1When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Standard Paper Sizes Vertically] check box
in the [Paper Source] tab before printing.
*2When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Custom Paper Vertically] check box in the
[Paper Source] tab before printing.
About <Free Size>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Free Size>, which saves you the trouble of
changing the paper size setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
Basic Operations
58
print even if there is mismatch between the paper size setting in the printer driver and the paper size
actually loaded in the machine.
●If you select <Free Size>, the print speed will be slower.
4Select one of <Drawer 1 Paper Type> to <Drawer 4 Paper Type>, and press .
●<Drawer 2 Paper Type> to <Drawer 4 Paper Type> are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
5Select the paper type, and press .
About <Mixed Types>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Mixed Types>, which saves you the
trouble of changing the paper type setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets
the machine print even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 41)
Available Paper(P. 470)
Basic Operations
59
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray
51W4-012
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <MP Tray Paper Size>, and press .
3Select the paper size, and press .
For A5 size/custom size paper
●A5 size or custom size paper can be loaded in either portrait or landscape orientation. See the table below
to select the setting according to the orientation of the paper.
Paper size Orientation Setting
A5 *1 < A5R>
< A5>
Custom size paper *2 < Custom Size R>
< Custom Size>
*1When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Standard Paper Sizes Vertically] check box
in the [Paper Source] tab before printing.
*2When using the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver, select the [Feed Custom Paper Vertically] check box in the
[Paper Source] tab before printing.
About <Free Size>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Free Size>, which saves you the trouble of
changing the paper size setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets the machine
print even if there is mismatch between the paper size setting in the printer driver and the paper size
actually loaded in the machine.
Basic Operations
60
●If you select <Free Size>, the print speed will be slower.
4Select <MP Tray Paper Type>, and press .
5Select the paper type, and press .
About <Mixed Types>
●If you frequently change sizes of paper to load, you can specify <Mixed Types>, which saves you the
trouble of changing the paper type setting each time you print. However, take note that this setting lets
the machine print even if there is mismatch between the paper type setting in the printer driver and the
paper type actually loaded in the machine.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 46)
Available Paper(P. 470)
Basic Operations
61
Saving Energy
51W4-013
You can save energy by making a setting so that the machine automatically enters the power saving state (sleep
mode) or automatically turns OFF if no operation is performed for a certain period of time or that the machine is
automatically turned OFF at a xed time on each day of the week.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 65)
Basic Operations
62
Entering Sleep Mode
51W4-014
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the
operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can
save power simply by pressing on the operation panel. You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to
automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for a specied length of time. You can specify settings
to change the interval at which the auto sleep function is performed or put the machine in sleep mode at a specied
time.
When in sleep mode
●When the machine is in sleep mode, lights in green.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
●The machine does not enter sleep mode when it is receiving data from or sending data to a computer, any
of the covers is opened, or no toner cartridge is installed.
Selecting the Sleep Mode Level
The degree of energy consumption reduction effect of sleep mode differs with the selected level of the mode
( Sleep Mode(P. 311) ). To effectively save the power, we recommend that you use the machine with the
factory default setting for sleep mode level. If you want to change the setting, follow the procedure below.
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep Mode> <High (Deep Sleep)> or <Mid
(Printer Sleep)>
Changing Auto Sleep Time
The machine automatically enters sleep mode if it remains idle for a specied length of time. We recommend
using the factory default settings ( Auto Sleep Time(P. 312) ) to save the most power. If you want to change
the amount of time that elapses before Auto Sleep is performed, follow the procedure below.
( ) <Control Menu> <Auto Sleep Time> Select the time
Basic Operations
63
●Immediately after the machine is turned ON, the length of time to elapse before the machine enters
sleep mode may be longer than specied in the menu.
Automatically Entering/Exiting Sleep Mode at Specied Time
You can set the machine to enter sleep mode at a specied time. You can also set the machine to exit sleep
mode at a specied time.
( ) <Control Menu> <Timer Settings> <Wake Up Timer> or <Sleep
Timer> <On> <Wake Up Time> or <Sleep Time> Set the time
<Wake Up Timer>
Select <On> to automatically exit sleep mode at a specied time.
<Wake Up Time>
Set the time to automatically exit sleep mode.
<Sleep Timer>
Select <On> to automatically enter sleep mode at a specied time.
<Sleep Time>
Set the time to automatically enter sleep mode.
When You Want to Prevent the Machine from Entering Sleep Mode if an Error Occurs
You can specify settings so that the machine will not enter sleep mode when an error occurs. Sleep Even if
Error(P. 312)
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep Even if Error> <Off>
Exiting Sleep Mode
Press .
Basic Operations
64
Setting Auto Shutdown Time
51W4-015
You can congure the machine to be automatically turned OFF when it is not operated for a long time. You can also
congure the machine to be turned OFF at a specied time. These functions allow you to avoid useless power
consumption that occurs due to failure to turn OFF the power. By factory default, this function is enabled.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Control Menu] [Edit].
4Congure auto shutdown timer settings.
Basic Operations
65
[Use Auto Shutdown Timer]
Select the check box to turn OFF the power when the time set in [Auto Shutdown Time] elapses.
[Auto Shutdown Time]
Specify after how many hours the machine should be turned OFF since it has entered sleep mode.
[Set Auto Shutdown Weekly Timer]
Select the check box to set the auto shutdown time for each day of the week.
[Sunday] to [Saturday]
Enter the time to turn OFF the power. If no time is specied, the auto shutdown time is not set for the day of
the week.
5Click [OK].
If shutdown does not seem to be nished
●It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the
display turns off.
Basic Operations
66
Situations that may be responsible for failure to turn OFF the power automatically at
the specied time
●You are making some operation on the machine.
●The machine is in the process of printing, cleaning, or some other operation.
●An error message is displayed.
If the power cannot be turned OFF automatically at the specied time, a retry will be performed up to 10 times
at intervals of 1 minute. If the power cannot be turned OFF even after ten retries, auto shutdown will be
impossible for that day.
Basic Operations
67
Printing a Document
Printing a Document ...................................................................................................................................... 69
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................... 70
Canceling Prints .............................................................................................................................................. 73
Various Printing Methods ................................................................................................................................... 75
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print) ................................................................................................. 77
Changing Default USB Print Settings ....................................................................................................... 86
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print) ................................................................................... 88
Using the Encrypted Secured Print .......................................................................................................... 91
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print) ....................................................................... 92
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine ............................................................................................ 96
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box ................................................................................................................ 99
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print) ............................................................................................... 101
Print Settings for Direct Print ................................................................................................................. 104
Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print) .......................................................................................................... 111
Printing a Document
68
Printing a Document
51W4-016
This section describes how to print documents made on your computer, print les saved in a USB memory device, and
print documents by entering a PIN from the operation panel.
◼Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver. Printing from a Computer(P. 70)
◼Using Useful Print Functions
You can use the print functions to print les stored in a USB memory device by connecting it directly to the machine
without using a computer and to set a requirement that a PIN must be entered before any printing can start.
Various Printing Methods(P. 75)
Printing a Document
69
Printing from a Computer
51W4-017
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your
documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as
installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the
online manual website.
About the Printer Driver Help(P. 70)
To Use Optional Accessories(P. 70)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 71)
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
To Use Optional Accessories
If the optional paper feeder is attached to the machine, perform the following operation on the printer driver.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522) ) Right-click the printer driver
icon for this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Paper Source]
Select the paper feeder in [Optional Drawer/Cassette] [OK] [OK]
Printing a Document
70
Basic Printing Operations
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
●Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before
proceeding to printing.
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2Select your printer, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
●Switch the tab according to the settings.
Printing a Document
71
Canceling Prints
51W4-019
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 73)
From the Operation Panel(P. 74)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
●Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522) ), right-click the printer driver icon for
this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for the machine).
2Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].
3Click [Yes].
➠Printing of the selected document is canceled.
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
●You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print
Documents(P. 293)
Canceling from an application
●On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
Printing a Document
73
From the Operation Panel
When the print data is sent to the machine from a computer, the [ ] indicator lights up (or blinks). You can cancel
printing from the operation panel while the indicator is lit or blinking.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select the document to cancel, and press .
3Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The <Canceling jobs> message is displayed and the selected print job is canceled.
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
LINKS
Printing from a Computer(P. 70)
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 293)
Printing a Document
74
Various Printing Methods
51W4-023
You can use a variety of useful print functions as well as performing the basic print operations with the printer driver.
◼Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)
You can print PDF les and image les stored in a USB memory device by connecting it directly to the machine. Using
this function, you can print without using a computer. Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 77)
◼Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)
By setting a PIN to data that is sent to the machine from a computer, the data is not printed until the correct PIN is
entered on the operation panel of the machine. This function is useful when printing condential documents.
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)(P. 88)
◼Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)
You can save print data sent from a computer onto an SD card. The stored data can be printed as many times as you
want. Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 92)
◼Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)
You can print les (PDF, JPEG, etc.) stored in your computer by sending them to the machine via a Web browser. No
specic application is needed. Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 101)
Printing a Document
75
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)
51W4-024
You can print les directly by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. Using this function, you can print
without using a computer.
Available USB Memory Devices
You can use FAT32 formatted USB memory devices.
●Do not use non-standard USB memory devices. You may not be able to print the les properly
depending on the USB memory device.
●Do not connect anything other than a USB memory device. USB memory devices cannot be connected
via a USB hub or an extension cable.
●Do not use USB memory devices with special functions such as built-in security functions.
1Connect a USB memory device to the USB port on the right side of the machine.
➠The following screen is automatically displayed.
●If the screen is not displayed, press ( ).
●Do not shock or shake the USB memory device or the machine while the device is connected to the
machine.
2Use / to select <Select File(s)>, and press .
Printing a Document
77
3Select the type of the le to print, and press .
4Select the le to print, and press .
●You can select multiple les.
●To clear a selection, select the le you have selected (marked with ), and press . To clear all selections,
select <Clear All>, and press .
●To display the contents of a folder, select a folder, and press or . To return to the folder in the upper
level, press or .
●Folders and les in lower levels or with longer names may not be displayed.
●When you move to another folder, the previous le selections will be cleared.
5Select <Apply>, and press .
When printing an XPS Document Using a Print Ticket
When a le to print is in XPS format, it can be printed according to the print ticket (print settings) attached to
the le.
1Select <Use Print Ticket>, and press .
2Select <Start Printing>, and press .
Printing starts. When the printing is nished, remove the USB memory device from the machine.
Disconnect the USB memory device.(P. 85)
Printing a Document
78
6Specify the print settings as necessary.
●Select the desired setting item, press , and specify the setting.
Icons* in the description
Settings for printing PDF les
Settings for printing XPS les
Settings for printing JPEG les
Settings for printing TIFF les
*Icons are omitted for the settings that are displayed regardless of the le format.
<No. of Copies>
Specify the number of copies. Use the numeric keys to enter a quantity, and press .
<Print Range>/<Print Range (TIFF)>
Specify the range (pages) to print. Use / to select <Designation Method> select the method to
designate the print range .
<All>
Prints all pages.
<Specify Pages>
Prints only the specied pages. To specify the pages, select <Page Range> enter <First Page> and
<Last Page> using the numeric keys select <Apply> .
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution for processing print data. Use / to select the resolution, and press .
Printing a Document
79
<600 dpi>
This print mode is suitable for printing at a high speed.
<1200 dpi>
Edges of characters and graphics can be clearly reproduced at high resolution. This print mode is suitable for
printing data that contains many small characters.
<2-Sided Printing>
Select whether to print on both sides of paper. Use / to select the setting, and press .
●<2-Sided Printing> may not be available with some sizes or types of paper. Available Paper(P. 470)
<Binding Location>
Specify whether to bind the long edge or short edge of the 2-sided printouts with a binding tool such as a
stapler. Use / to select the binding position, and press .
<Long Edge>
Binds the printouts on the long edge.
<Short Edge>
Binds the printouts on the short edge.
Printing a Document
80
<Select Paper>
Select the paper source in which the paper to print is already loaded. Use / to select the paper source,
and press .
●When you want to print a PDF le or XPS le, specify <Auto> to automatically select the optimum paper
source.
●A paper source with custom size paper loaded cannot be selected.
<Halftones>
You can select the method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
PDF les and XPS les
Halftones can be specied for each image data type in a single document. Use / to select the image data
type select the method to reproduce halftones .
JPEG les and TIFF les
Use / to select the method to reproduce halftones, and press .
Image data type
Select the image data type for which you want to change the settings. Select <Text> for characters,
<Graphics> for lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
Printing a Document
81
<High Resolution>
Implements higher denition printing than the <Resolution> setting, but is slightly inferior in stability of
texture. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing edges of data such as characters, thin lines, and CAD
data.
<Match Paper Size>
Automatically makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the printable area of the paper. The printouts
are enlarged or reduced with the original's aspect ratio kept. Use / to select the setting, and press .
●This setting is not available if <Auto> is set in <Select Paper>.
<Zoom>
Enable or disable enlarging/reducing images. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the image's aspect
ratio kept. Use / to select the setting, and press .
<Off>
When the image is within the printable area of the paper, it is printed with the size as is. When an image is
larger than the printable area, printouts are reduced.
<Auto>
Makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the printable area.
<Enlarge Print Area>
Specify whether or not to print the image by extending the printable area fully to the paper size. Use / to
select the setting, and press .
●If you select <On>, some portions of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper
may be partly tainted depending on the original.
Printing a Document
82
<N on 1>
Select whether to print multiple pages onto a single sheet by sequentially allocating them from the top left. For
example, to print four pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>. Use / to select the setting, and press
.
●This setting is not available if <Auto> is set in <Select Paper>.
<Finishing>
Specify the method to collate the printouts when printing multiple-page documents. Use / to select
whether or not to collate the printouts, and press .
<Off>
The printouts are not collated. The specied number of copies are printed for each page. For example, if you
are printing three copies of a four-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page
order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4.
<Collate>
The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are printing three
copies of a four-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3,
4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
<Image Orientation>
Specify the print orientation of an image. Use / to select the print orientation, and press .
Printing a Document
83
<Auto>
Automatically determines the print orientation based on the width and height of the image.
<Vertical>
Select when printing a vertically-long image.
<Horizontal>
Select when printing a horizontally-long image.
●If the specied setting of <Vertical> or <Horizontal> does not match the orientation of the image, the
reduced image is printed.
<Print Position>
Specify the position to print the image. Use / to select the print position, and press .
<Auto>
If the TIFF data contains the information that species the print position, the image is printed according to
the information, otherwise, it is printed at the center of paper. JPEG data is always printed at the center of
paper.
<Center>
Images are printed at the center of paper.
<Top Left>
Images are printed at the top left.
7Select <Start Printing>, and press .
➠Printing starts.
●To cancel printing, use the operation panel. Canceling Prints(P. 73)
Printing a Document
84
8Disconnect the USB memory device.
1Select <Remove USB Memory>, and press .
2Select <Yes>, and press .
Wait until the message shown below appears.
3Disconnect the USB memory device.
●If you select <Sort Files> on the screen in step 1, you can change the order of displaying les when you select
the le to print.
TIPS
If you always want to print with the same settings: Changing Default USB Print Settings(P. 86)
Printing a Document
85
Changing Default USB Print Settings
51W4-025
The settings that are initially displayed for specifying print settings are called the default settings. If you change these
default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to specify the same
settings every time you make prints.
( ) <USB Print Settings> <PDF/XPS Default Set.> or <JPEG/TIFF Def. Set.>
Select the setting item Change the default value of the selected item
PDF/XPS JPEG/TIFF
Setting items
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
◼Setting the Order of Displaying Files to Print
You can set the order in which les to print from a USB memory device are displayed for selection.
( ) <USB Print Settings> <File Sort Def. Set.> Select the standard of
the le display order
<Name (Ascending)>
Displays the les in ascending order by name.
<Name (Descending)>
Displays the les in descending order by name.
Printing a Document
86
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)
51W4-026
By setting a PIN to a document when printing from a computer, the document is held in an optional SD card installed
on the machine, and is not printed until the correct PIN is entered on the operation panel of the machine. This
function is called "Secured Print," and the document that is protected by a PIN is called a "secured document." Using
Secured Print keeps printouts of condential documents from being left unattended. Before you can use this function,
you need to install an optional SD card on the machine ( Installing an SD Card(P. 495) ).
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine(P. 88)
Printing Out Secured Documents(P. 89)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 90)
Sending a Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
Follow the procedure below. You can send a document protected by a PIN.
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2Select this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Select [Secure Print] in [Output Method].
➠The [Information] pop-up screen is displayed. Check the message, and click [Yes] or [No].
4Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
●Switch the tab according to the settings.
Printing a Document
88
5Click [Print] or [OK].
➠After the secured document is sent to the machine, it is held in the SD card waiting to be printed.
●You can also use the encrypted print function with enhanced security. Using the Encrypted Secured
Print(P. 91)
Printing Out Secured Documents
Prints secured documents sent to the machine. After a valid time period ( Changing the Valid Time Period for
Secured Documents(P. 90) ) has elapsed, the secured document will be deleted from the memory of the machine
and can no longer be printed.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Secured Print>, and press .
3Select the secured document to print, and press .
●If the SD card contains only one secured document, this screen is not displayed.
Printing a Document
89
If the user name is displayed
●If secured documents from two or more users are being held in the SD card, the user selection screen as
shown below is displayed prior to the screen shown above. Select your user name, and press .
4Enter the PIN, and press .
➠Printing starts.
●To cancel print jobs, use the operation panel. Canceling Prints(P. 73)
Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents
You can change the valid time period from the time secured document data is sent to the machine until the time it is
deleted within a certain period of time.
1Press ( ).
2Use / select <Control Menu>, and press .
3Select <Sec. Print Del. Time>, and press .
4Select how long the SD card holds secured documents, and press .
●The secured document is erased from the SD card when the time selected here elapses.
LINKS
Using the Encrypted Secured Print(P. 91)
Installing an SD Card(P. 495)
Printing a Document
90
Using the Encrypted Secured Print
51W4-027
Print data is encrypted before being sent to the machine, enhancing security more than the regular secured print
function.
◼Activating the Encrypted Print function
To use the encrypted print function, perform the following operation in advance.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522) ) Right-click the printer driver
icon for this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Device Settings] tab [Details]
[Other Settings] tab Enable [Encrypted Secure Print] [OK] [OK]
◼Sending an Encrypted Secured Document from a Computer to the Machine
See Help. You can view Help from the printer driver.
Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522) ) Right-click the printer driver
icon for this machine [Printer properties] or [Properties] [Encrypted-P] tab [Help]
◼Printing Out Encrypted Secured Documents
After you send an encrypted document to the machine, print it out. Encrypted documents will be deleted automatically
when the retention time has elapsed ( Changing the Valid Time Period for Secured Documents(P. 90) ), and can
no longer be printed. The retention time setting method is common to secured documents and encrypted documents.
( ) <Encrypted Print> Select the encrypted secured document to
print Enter the PIN using the numeric keys
If you are using alphanumeric characters or symbols in your PIN
●The Encrypted Secured Print function allows you to use alphabetic characters and symbols as well as
numbers when specifying a PIN in the printer driver. However, if you use an alphabetic character or
symbol in the PIN, you cannot print an encrypted secured document from the operation panel of the
machine. Use [Job Status] of the Remote UI to print an encrypted document. Checking Current
Status of Print Documents(P. 293)
Printing a Document
91
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job
Print)
51W4-028
The data printed from a computer can be saved on the SD card installed on the machine. Since the saved data can be
directly printed from the machine, you can eliminate the need to operate the computer every time you print. It is
convenient to save a document that will be printed many times such as a fax cover sheet. Installing an SD
Card(P. 495)
Storing a Document in the Machine(P. 92)
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine(P. 94)
●The data saved on the SD card will not be deleted even when the power is turned OFF, but it will be deleted
automatically when the set retention time has elapsed, and can no longer be printed. When you want to
change the data storage period or prevent the data from being automatically deleted, change the applicable
settings from the Remote UI ( Changing the Storage Period for Documents(P. 96) ). The saved data can
also be deleted manually ( Manually Deleting Documents(P. 97) ).
Storing a Document in the Machine
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2Select this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Select [Store] in [Output Method], and click [Yes].
Printing a Document
92
4Specify the settings for storing documents, and click [OK].
[Data Name]
Assign a name to print data to store in the SD card.
[Enter Name] Manually set a name. Specify a friendly name that can be easily identied on the
display of the machine.
[Use File Name] A name is automatically set based on the le name of print data to store and the
information of an application that you are using.
[Mail Boxes]
A place used to store print data in the SD card is called a box. Select the number of the box to store the
document. You can assign a name to the box to facilitate identication of the box. Setting a Name or
PIN to a Box(P. 99)
5Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
●Switch the tab according to the settings.
●The settings changed here are stored with the document. When the document is printed next time, it is
printed with the stored settings.
Printing a Document
93
6Click [Print] or [OK].
➠The document is sent to the machine and stored in the specied box.
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine
1Press ( ).
●When the machine is oine, it does not operate even if you press ( ). Set the machine to Online.
Online key(P. 26)
2Use / to select <Stored Job Print>, and press .
3Select the box number of the document to print, and press .
If the box is protected by a PIN
●When the PIN input screen is displayed, enter the PIN and press . If you are unsure of the PIN, contact
the administrator of the machine.
Printing a Document
94
4Select the document to print, and press .
➠Printing starts.
●To cancel printing, use the operation panel. Canceling Prints(P. 73)
●Documents saved on the SD card can also be printed from the [Box] page of the Remote UI ( [Box]
Page(P. 290) ). Open the box in which documents are saved, select the check box for a document to print,
and click [Print].
LINKS
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine(P. 96)
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box(P. 99)
Installing an SD Card(P. 495)
Printing a Document
95
Deleting a Document Stored in the Machine
51W4-029
By factory default, the data you save on an SD card will be automatically deleted when a certain length of time has
elapsed, and can no longer be printed. If you want to change how long the SD card holds documents or prevent the
documents from being automatically deleted, change the settings from the Remote UI. The saved documents can also
be deleted manually.
Changing the Storage Period for Documents(P. 96)
Manually Deleting Documents(P. 97)
Changing the Storage Period for Documents
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Control Menu] [Edit].
4Change the storage period.
●To prevent documents from being automatically deleted, select [Off].
Printing a Document
96
5Click [OK].
Manually Deleting Documents
1Start the Remote UI and log on. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
If you logged on in General User Mode
●By default, the machine is congured so that no users (general users) other than the administrator can
delete the documents. To allow end users to operate documents, you must change the settings.
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 298)
●You can delete only the document of which user name matches the one that was used to log on to the
Remote UI.
2Click [Box].
Printing a Document
97
3Click the number of the box where the document to delete is stored.
If the box is protected by a PIN
●When the screen shown below is displayed, enter the PIN and click [OK].
4Select the check box of the document to delete, and click [Delete].
➠The selected document is deleted.
●You can click the text link under [File Name] to check the details of the document.
●It may take some time until the free space of the SD card is increased because the stored data is erased in
the background.
Printing a Document
98
Setting a Name or PIN to a Box
51W4-02A
You can set a name for a box and a PIN to open the box. If you set a friendly name for the box, you can easily identify
the box when selecting the place to store documents by using the printer driver. If you set a PIN, the stored
documents can be accessed by only limited users, enhancing the security.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Box].
3Click the number of the box for which you want to specify the settings.
If the box is protected by a PIN
●When the screen shown below is displayed, enter the PIN and click [OK].
4[Settings].
Printing a Document
99
5Set a name and PIN.
[Box Name]
To set a name for the box, enter the necessary characters.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the [Set PIN] check box and enter a number for the PIN in the [PIN] text box. For
conrmation, enter the same number in the [Conrm] text box.
●You cannot use "0" as the rst digit of the PIN. A number with "0" removed from the rst digit will be set as
the PIN.
6Click [OK].
Printing a Document
100
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)
51W4-02C
You can print a le from a Web browser (Remote UI) without opening the le. In addition, you can also print a PDF le
on the Web by only specifying the URL.
1Start the Remote UI and log on. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Direct Print].
3Click the type of the le to print.
[PDF File]
Click to print a PDF le.
Printing a Document
101
[PS File]
Click to print a PS or EPS le.
[Image File]
Click to print a JPEG or TIFF le.
[XPS Files]
Click to print an XPS le.
4Click [Browse].
●When the dialog box for selecting the le appears, select the le to print and click [Open].
●When you print a PDF le, select [File Path].
When you print a PDF le on the Web
●Select [URL], and enter the URL of the PDF le. If the user authentication is performed, enter the user
name and password.
When the PDF le is password-protected
●Enter the password in [Document Password].
When you print a PDF le linked to a policy server
●Specify the [Policy Server User Name] and [Policy Server Password] settings.
5Specify the print settings as necessary. Print Settings for Direct Print(P. 104)
6Click [Start Printing].
➠The screen shown below is displayed and printing starts.
Printing a Document
102
Print Settings for Direct Print
51W4-02E
When you want to change the settings for Direct Print according to the document to print, specify the following
settings.
When you specify the print settings for XPS les
●Clear the [Prioritize Print Ticket] check box. If the check box is selected, some items are unavailable.
Icons* in the description
Settings for printing PDF les
Settings for printing PS/EPS les
Settings for printing JPEG les
Settings for printing TIFF les
Settings for printing XPS les
*Icons are omitted for the settings that are displayed regardless of the le format.
[Specify Print Range]
Printing a Document
104
[Print Range]
Specify the range (pages) to print.
[All] Select to print all pages.
[Specify Pages] Select to specify the print range. This setting is unavailable for JPEG les.
[Quality Settings]
[Resolution]
Specify the resolution of data to print.
[1200 dpi] Edges of characters and graphics can be clearly reproduced at high resolution. This
print mode is suitable for printing data that contains many small characters.
[600 dpi] This print mode is suitable for printing at a high speed.
[Halftones]
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image). For PDF les and XPS les, you can specify the halftones for each image data type:
[Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
[Resolution] Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print
mode is suitable for printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
[Gradation] Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing
gures and charts with gradation.
[High Resolution] Implements higher denition printing than the [Resolution] setting, but is slightly
inferior in stability of texture. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing edges of
data such as characters, thin lines, and CAD data.
Printing a Document
105
[Color Settings]
[Grayscale Conversion]
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data. For XPS les, you can specify
the conversion method for each image data type: [Text], [Graphics], and [Image].
[sRGB] Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth
gradation.
[NTSC] Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to
television pictures (NTSC).
[Uniform RGB] Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the
brightness only.
[Print Settings]
Printing a Document
106
[Copies]
Specify the number of copies.
[Paper Size]
Specify the size of the paper to print on.
●When you want to print a PDF le or XPS le, specify [Auto] to automatically select the optimum paper size.
If no optimum size is found, the paper size set in <Standard Paper Size> is selected ( Standard Paper
Size(P. 411) ).
[Paper Type]
Specify the type of the paper to print on.
[Manual Feed]
If you select the check box, a document is printed only on the paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray.
[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size]
If you select the check box, printouts are enlarged or reduced printouts according to the printable area of the
paper. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the original aspect ratio kept.
●If [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], this item is unavailable.
[Image Orientation]
Specify the print orientation of an image.
[Auto] Automatically determines the print orientation based on the width and height of the
image.
[Vertical] Select when printing a vertically-long image.
[Horizontal] Select when printing a horizontally-long image.
●If the specied setting of [Vertical] or [Horizontal] does not match the orientation of the image, the
reduced image is printed.
[Print Position]
Specify the position to print the image.
[Auto] If the TIFF data contains the information that species the print position, the image is
printed according to the information, otherwise, it is printed at the center of paper.
JPEG data is always printed at the center of paper.
[Center] Images are printed at the center of paper.
[Top Left] Images are printed at the top left.
Printing a Document
107
[Zoom]
Enable or disable enlarging/reducing images. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the image aspect
ratio kept.
[Off] When the image is within the printable area of the paper, it is printed with the size as
is. When an image is larger than the printable area, printouts are reduced.
[Auto] Makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the printable area of the paper.
[Enlarge Print Area]
If you select the check box, the image is printed by extending the printable area fully to the paper size.
However, a part of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper may be partly tainted
depending on the original.
[Print 2-Sided]
Select the check box to print on both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location]
Select whether to bind the long edge or short edge of the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler.
Printing orientation will be changed depending on the specied binding position. You can also specify the
binding margin ( Gutter(P. 349) ).
[Long Edge] Binds the printouts on the long edge.
[Short Edge] Binds the printouts on the short edge.
[Show Warnings]
You can specify how the machine should behave if an error occurs.
[Print] Error information is printed and no image is printed.
[Panel] No image is printed and an error message is displayed on the operation panel.
[Off] No image is printed and no error is displayed.
Printing a Document
108
[N on 1]
Specify whether or not to print multiple pages onto a single sheet by sequentially allocating them. For
example, to print four pages onto a single sheet, select [4 on 1].
●If [Paper Size] is set to [Auto], this item is unavailable.
[Page Order]
Select a page distribution layout.
[Finishing]
Specify the method to collate the printouts when printing multiple-page documents. This item is displayed
when the SD card is installed.
[Off] The printouts are not collated. The specied number of copies are printed for each
page. For example, if you are printing three copies of a four-page document, the
printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4.
[Collate] The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if
you are printing three copies of a four-page document, the printouts will be arranged
in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4.
[Comment Print]
Select whether to print comments.
[Auto] Prints comments in the PDF le.
[Off] Prints no comments.
[Store in Box]
You can store a document in the SD card installed on the machine without making printouts. Select the check
box to store the document in a box specied in [Box Number (00-99)]. You can print the documents in the
box from the operation panel as many times as you want. For how to print a document, see Printing a
Document Stored in the Machine(P. 94) . This item is displayed when the SD card is installed.
Printing a Document
109
Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)
51W4-02F
E-Mail Print allows you to print the message and attached image les of an e-mail received from the POP3 mail server
without using a computer. E-mails can be manually received as well as being automatically received at regular
intervals. When the SMTP protocol is used, e-mails directly sent to the machine via no mail server are printed.
Conguring E-Mail Print Settings(P. 111)
Manually Receiving E-Mails(P. 115)
●When you set <TIFF Spooler> in the Setup menu to <On>, the received data is temporarily stored in the
machine or SD card before printed. This reduces the occurrence of errors. TIFF Spooler(P. 383)
Conguring E-Mail Print Settings
This section describes how to specify the settings for receiving and printing e-mails on this machine. Use a computer
to specify the settings for receiving e-mails and the operation panel of the machine to specify the settings for printing
e-mails.
From a Computer
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [E-Mail Print Settings].
Printing a Document
111
4Click [Edit].
5Specify the settings for E-Mail Print.
When performing E-Mail Print from POP3 mail server
When the e-mail receiving starts, all e-mails stored in the mailbox of the mail server are printed. If you send e-
mails that you want to print to the machine in advance, you can automatically print the e-mails at regular time
intervals or print all stored e-mails in an arbitrary timing.
●We recommend using the mail address exclusively for E-Mail Print because all e-mails received into the
machine are deleted from the mail server.
Printing a Document
112
Conditions of use for POP3 protocol
●The POP3 mail server must support the UIDL command. For details, contact your network administrator or
server administrator.
[POP3 Server Name]
Enter the mail server name or IP address for receiving e-mails.
[POP3 User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name used to connect to the mail server.
[Set/Change Password]
To set the password for connecting to the mail server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric
characters for the password in the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the
[Conrm] text box.
[POP3 RX Interval]
Specify the interval for automatically connecting to the mail server in minutes. New e-mails in the mailbox of
the mail server are automatically received and printed at the specied time intervals. You can also specify this
setting by using <POP3 RX Interval> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( POP3 RX
Interval(P. 344) ).
Preventing E-mails from Being Automatically Received
●Set [POP3 RX Interval] to [0]. If you set [0], you must manually receive e-mails. Manually Receiving E-
Mails(P. 115)
[POP3 RX]
Select the check box to enable E-Mail Print from the POP3 mail server. You can also specify this setting by
using <POP3 RX> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( POP3 RX(P. 345) ).
[POP3 Server Port Number]
Specify the port number of the mail server that receives e-mails.
When performing E-Mail Print by using SMTP protocol
If e-mails are sent to the machine via SMTP, the machine prints the e-mails immediately after receiving them.
Enable this function when you want to forward fax documents from Canon multifunction printers to this
machine and print them on the machine ( To forward fax documents from Canon multifunction
printers(P. 115) ).
Printing a Document
113
[SMTP RX]
Select the check box to enable E-Mail Print by using the SMTP protocol. You can also specify this setting by
using <SMTP RX> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( SMTP RX(P. 345) ).
[SMTP Server Port Number]
Specify the port number of the SMTP server for receiving e-mails.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
From the Operation Panel
8Specify other settings for E-Mail Print as necessary.
Specify whether or not to print the e-mail message.
Print E-Mail Text(P. 384)
You can limit the number of pages to print the e-mail message.
Limit E-Mail Print(P. 384)
You can specify the settings for printing attached image les.
Image Orientation(P. 381)
Zoom(P. 382)
Printing a Document
114
Print Position(P. 382)
TIFF Spooler(P. 383)
Show Warnings(P. 383)
Enlarge Print Area(P. 385)
Halftones(P. 385)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 386)
Specify whether or not to display an E-Mail Print error.
Show Warnings(P. 315)
Manually Receiving E-Mails
If e-mail printing from the POP3 mail server is enabled, you can manually receive and print e-mails as well. When you
want to connect to the mail server before automatically receiving e-mails or the machine is congured to prevent e-
mails from being automatically received, follow the procedure below to manually receive the e-mails.
1Press ( ).
●When the machine is oine, it does not operate even if ( ) is pressed. Set the machine to Online.
Online key(P. 26)
2Use / to select <E-Mail Print Utility>, and press .
3Select <Received E-Mail>, and press .
4Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The machine is connected to the mail server. E-Mail Print is started for new e-mails in the mailbox of the
mail server if any.
To forward fax documents from Canon multifunction printers
Enable SMTP RX on this machine, and then specify the IP address of the machine as the Internet Fax (I Fax)
Address on the source multifunction printer. Forwarded fax documents are printed immediately when received.
●Attached les can only be printed if they are in TIFF format. Only one TIFF le can be printed for each fax
document.
Printing a Document
115
●When the toner cartridge is nearly empty, no fax documents can be received. The fax documents that could
not be received on this machine are printed on the source multifunction printer.
●When the optional SD card is installed on the machine, the maximum size of a printable TIFF le is limited to
100 MB.
LINKS
Checking History of Documents(P. 294)
E-Mail RX Log List(P. 443)
Printing a Document
116
Can Be Used Conveniently with a
Mobile Device
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................................ 118
Connecting to a Mobile Device ......................................................................................................................... 119
Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 120
Using AirPrint ............................................................................................................................................... 121
Printing with AirPrint ............................................................................................................................. 125
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ..................................................................................................................... 127
Using Google Cloud Print ............................................................................................................................. 128
Managing the Machine Remotely .................................................................................................................... 132
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
117
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
51W4-02H
Combining the machine with a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing with ease. You can also use a mobile device to operate the machine remotely, check
the printing status, and change machine's settings.
Connecting to a Mobile Device(P. 119)
Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 120)
Managing the Machine Remotely(P. 132)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
118
Connecting to a Mobile Device
51W4-02J
Connect a mobile device and the machine via a wireless LAN router. For how to set and operate your wireless LAN
router and mobile devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact your manufacturers.
●The machine does not come with a wireless LAN router. Have one ready as necessary.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
119
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
51W4-02K
Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various
applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the
application, and the situation.
◼Using Canon PRINT Business
This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When
printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating
systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://
global.canon/gomp/).
●You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
◼Printing with Canon Print Service
You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon/).
◼Printing by Mopria®
The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android
using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using
printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a
place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For
more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.
Conrming Mopria® Settings
Log on to the Remote UI in Management Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Settings/
Registration] [Network] [Mopria Settings] [Edit] Check that the [Use Mopria] check box is
selected [OK]
◼Printing with Google Cloud Print
You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device
without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 128)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
120
Using AirPrint
51W4-02L
You can print without using printer driver by sending print data from Apple devices.
AirPrint settings
Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 121)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 123)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 125)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 127)
Conguring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
●If you are using a mobile device, such as iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3Click [Network] [AirPrint Settings].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
121
4Click [Edit].
5Specify the required settings, and click [OK].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
122
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]/[Location]/[Latitude]/[Longitude]
Enter the name and the installation location information to help you identify this machine when operating
your Apple device. This information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer.
If you select the [Use AirPrint] check box
The following items are also set to <On> automatically.
●<mDNS Settings> in IPv4 and IPv6 Conguring DNS(P. 172)
●<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 240)
●<IPP Print> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 149)
If you change [Printer Name]
●If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name>
( Conguring DNS(P. 172) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the
Mac again.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable AirPrint from the setting menu of the operation panel.
( ) <Network> Check the message <AirPrint> <Off> or
<On>
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function
settings ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246) ).
1Click [System Preferences] in the Dock on the desktop [Printers & Scanners].
2Select your printer and click [Options & Supplies].
3Click [Show Printer Webpage].
4Log on to the Remote UI.
●To change AirPrint settings, log on in Management Mode.
➠The page dedicated for AirPrint is displayed.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
123
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
124
Printing with AirPrint
51W4-02R
You do not necessarily need to use a computer for printing e-mails, photos, Web pages, and other documents. AirPrint
enables you to print directly from Apple devices such as iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch.
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 125)
Printing from Mac(P. 126)
System Requirements
To print with AirPrint, you need one of the following Apple devices.
●iPad (all models)
●iPhone (3GS or later)
●iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
●Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*
*OS X 10.9 or later when you use USB connection.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
●The Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
●The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
When using USB connection
●Set <USB-Connected PC OS> to <Mac OS>. USB-Connected PC OS(P. 320)
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Apple
device.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals and Their Contents(P. 500)
2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.
3From the drop-down list, tap [Print].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
125
4Select this machine from [Printer] in [Printer Options].
●The printers connected to the network are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
●[Printer Options] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using
those applications.
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6Tap [Print].
➠Printing starts.
Checking the print status
●During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].
Printing from Mac
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Mac.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals and Their Contents(P. 500)
2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
4Select this machine in the print dialog box.
●The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6Click [Print].
➠Printing starts.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
126
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
51W4-02S
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
●Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
●Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
●Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
●Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
●Make sure that the machine is congured to enable printing from a computer even when no department ID and
password are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 213)
●Make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sucient toner cartridge remaining.
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 123)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
127
Using Google Cloud Print
51W4-02U
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or
computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional
printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.
Checking the Machine Settings(P. 128)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 128)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 129)
●When registering the machine or when using Google Cloud Print to print documents, you must be able to
connect the machine to the Internet. You are also responsible for paying all Internet connection fees.
●You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.
●Google Cloud Print does not support printing from IPv6 addresses.
●To use Google Cloud Print, a Google account is required. If you do not have one, access Google Web site to
create your account.
Checking the Machine Settings
Before setting up Google Cloud Print, check the following:
●Make sure that the machine is assigned an IPv4 address and connected to a computer over a network.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 137)
●Make sure that the date and time settings are correct. Date/Time Settings(P. 316)
●If the Department ID Management is enabled, make sure that the machine is congured to enable printing from a
computer even when no Department ID and PIN are entered. Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is
Unknown(P. 213)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings
Enable the Google Cloud Print function of the machine. You can also disable the Google Cloud Print function of the
machine.
1Press ( ).
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
128
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Google Cloud Print>, and press .
4Select <Use Cloud Print>, and press .
5Select <Off> or <On>, and press .
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print allows you to print from anywhere.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [Google Cloud Print Settings].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
129
4Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
If [Register] is unavailable
●You need to enable Google Cloud Print. Click [Edit], select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box, and
then click [OK].
To reregister the machine
●To reregister the machine if the owner of the machine has changed or for other reasons, unregister the
machine and register it again.
5Click the link of the URL displayed for [URL for Registration].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
130
6Follow the on-screen instructions to register the machine.
➠Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google
Chrome™.
●Access the Google Cloud Print Web site for information about the latest applications that support Google
Cloud Print.
Registering from a mobile device or Google Chrome
You can also register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
following conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Perform <Yes> to complete
the registration.
●To perform the registration, the main screen need to be displayed. Press ( ) to display the
main screen and then proceed to the registration.
●For the registration procedure, see the instruction manual for your mobile device or the Google Cloud Print
Web site.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
131
Managing the Machine Remotely
51W4-02W
You can use the Remote UI from a Web browser installed on your mobile device. This allows you to check the
machine's status and specify machine's settings from your mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be
displayed properly for some devices and environments.
Starting Remote UI with a Mobile Device
Enter the IP address of the machine into the Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the
machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 441) ). If you have any questions, ask your Network Administrator.
1Start the Web browser on your mobile device.
2Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address eld.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 283)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
132
Network
Network .............................................................................................................................................................. 134
Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................................................. 135
Connecting to a Wired LAN ........................................................................................................................... 137
Setting IP Addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 139
Setting IPv4 Address .............................................................................................................................. 140
Setting IPv6 Addresses .......................................................................................................................... 144
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer ................................................................................ 148
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ...................................................................................... 149
Enabling IPP/IPPS .................................................................................................................................. 155
Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................. 161
Setting Up Print Server ................................................................................................................................. 164
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................. 168
Conguring Ethernet Settings ...................................................................................................................... 169
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network ......................................................................................... 171
Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 172
Conguring WINS ......................................................................................................................................... 178
Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 181
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP .................................................................................... 184
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software ............................................................................... 190
Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 194
Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing ............................................................................... 197
Network
133
Network
51W4-02X
The machine has been designed for exibility of use across a variety of environments, and it includes advanced
technologies in addition to basic network features. Do not worry if you are not a network expert, because the machine
has also been designed for convenience and ease of use. Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time.
◼Connecting to a Computer/Viewing the Machine's Network Settings
Connecting to a Network(P. 135)
◼Conguring for Printing
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer(P. 148)
◼Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 168)
Network
134
Connecting to a Network
51W4-02Y
The machine can be connected to a network via wired LAN, requiring a unique network IP address. For specic IP
address settings, contact your Internet service provider or network administrator.
●If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
●The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
◼Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
●Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
●Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
●Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the
communication method (half-duplex/full-duplex) or the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T) ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 169) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
●To check the MAC address of the machine.
MAC Address(P. 344)
●To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Conguring IEEE 802.1X
Authentication(P. 261) .
Network
135
Connect to a wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 137)
Set the IP address.
●At the time of purchase, the Auto IP function is activated to automatically acquire an IP
address. However, this function may not be used depending on the network
environment. In that case, set an IP address manually or congure to automatically
acquire an IP address via the DHCP or other protocol.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 139)
Network
136
Connecting to a Wired LAN
51W4-030
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1Connect a LAN cable.
●Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
●Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2Check that the LNK indicator ( ) is lit.
●When the LNK indicator does not light up, some problem with the wired LAN connection may have
occurred. For more information, see "Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
3Set the IP address. Setting IP Addresses(P. 139)
●At the time of purchase, the Auto IP function is activated to automatically acquire an IP address. However,
this function may not be used depending on the network environment. In that case, set an IP address
manually or congure to automatically acquire an IP address via the DHCP or other protocol.
Network
137
Setting IP Addresses
51W4-031
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.
Network
139
Setting IPv4 Address
51W4-032
1660-00W
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly
inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 137) ).
Setting IPv4 Address
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Mode>.
4Congure IP address settings.
<Auto>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via a protocol such as DHCP.
<Manual>
Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1Select <Auto>, and press .
2Select <Protocol>, and press .
Network
140
3Select <Use DHCP>, <Use BOOTP>, or <Use RARP>, and press .
●You can use only one of the protocols DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP. If the selected protocol is set to <On>,
the other two protocols are automatically set to <Off>.
4Select <On>, and press .
5Press .
6Select <Auto IP>, and press .
7Select <On>, and press .
When using DHCP
If you turn OFF the power and ON again, an IP address differing from the current one will be assigned. This
may disable printing. To use DHCP, specify one of the following settings after consulting the network
administrator.
●Conguring the DNS Dynamic Update Function Conguring DNS(P. 172)
●Specifying Settings for the DHCP Server to Constantly Assign the Same IP Address
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
●Set all the protocols to <Off>. If you set <Use DHCP>, <Use BOOTP>, or <Use RARP> to <On> when the
DHCP/BOOTP/RARP servers are unavailable, the machine will waste time and communication resources in
searching the network for available services.
IP addresses that are given precedence
●IP addresses assigned via DHCP/BOOTP/RARP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1Select <Manual>, and press .
2Select <IP Address Settings>, and press .
Network
141
3Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
●Select the item to set, press , enter an address, and press .
How to enter addresses
●Use / to move to the target eld (a period-delimited input area), and use the numeric keys to
increase/decrease the value.
When you are unsure of the IP address to input
●The IP address can be determined from the router settings of the network. Determining the IP
Address to Assign to the Machine(P. 142)
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Checking whether the settings are correct
●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
If you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
●You need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 161)
Determining the IP Address to Assign to the Machine
When you want to use a xed IP address for the machine, you can determine the IP address as shown below.
◼To Determine the IP Address
An IP address consists of four numbers delimited by a period (.) (example: 192.168.1.45). Each number must be
in the range from 0 to 255. In general, set the rst three numbers to be the same as those for the router
because they are common in the network. Determine the last number (for example, 45 in 192.168.1.45) that is
different from that for other devices.
Network
142
◼Checking the Router Settings
When you want to use a xed IP address, check the settings of the DHCP that functions to automatically assign
an IP address in a network. To avoid duplication of the IP address, you need to set an IP address outside the
range of IP addresses assigned by DHCP. Since a router often functions as a DHCP server, check the router
settings.
●For how to display the setting screen of the router, see the instruction manual of your router.
1Display the setting screen of the router.
2Check the range of IP addresses assigned by DHCP.
●The range of IP addresses assigned by DHCP is set according to your router.
Example DHCP setting screen of the router:
3Determine the IP address of the machine.
●In the example screen shown in step 2, assign an IP address in the range of 192.168.11.66 to 192.168.11.254
to the machine because an IP address that the router assigns by DHCP is in the range of 192.168.11.2 to
192.168.11.65.
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 144)
Network Status Print(P. 441)
Conguring WINS(P. 178)
Network
143
Setting IPv6 Addresses
51W4-033
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congured via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Setting IPv4
Address(P. 140) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
The machine can use the following multiple IPv6 addresses:
Type Description
Link-local address An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex length and default
router address.
Stateless address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network
prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is
restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
144
4Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
5Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congure the required settings.
Network
145
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Use Stateless Address]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. You cannot enter an address that starts with "ff" (or multicast address), the address of
"0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with "0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or "0:0:0:0:0:0."
[Prex Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. You cannot enter an address that starts with "ff"
(or multicast address), the address of "0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with "0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or
"0:0:0:0:0:0."
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Network
146
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Checking whether the settings are correct
●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IPv6 addresses from the setting menu of the operation panel. IPv6
Settings(P. 329)
If you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
●You need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 161)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 140)
Network Status Print(P. 441)
Network
147
Conguring the Machine for Printing from a Computer
51W4-034
When using the machine as a network printer, you can congure the protocols and ports used for printing and create
a print server for the machine. Before conguring the machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup
procedures, including the printer driver installation. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on
the online manual website.
●Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine, and can be
selected according to the printing purpose or the network environment.
●Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer. Incorrect port settings are
often the cause when documents cannot be printed from a network computer.
Network
148
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
51W4-035
Congure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer. For the print protocols
supported by the machine, see Network Environment(P. 484) . This section describes the settings of LPD, RAW,
IPP/IPPS, and WSD.
To use FTP
●On how to congure settings, see the item below.
Using FTP Clients(P. 508)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure printing protocols.
Network
149
Conguring LPD settings
1Click [Edit] in [LPD Settings].
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use LPD Printing]
When using LPD for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Print LPD Banner Page]
Select the check box to include the information such as user names and le names on printouts. When
not printing the information, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set the time period after which the print job automatically ends when print data cannot be received due
to a communication error or some other problem.
3Click [OK].
Conguring RAW settings
1Click [Edit] in [RAW Settings].
Network
150
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use RAW Printing]
When using RAW for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Use Bidirectional Communication]
When using bidirectional communication to notify the computer of machine status and print completion,
select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[RX Timeout]
Set the time period after which the print job automatically ends when print data cannot be received due
to a communication error or some other problem.
3Click [OK].
Conguring IPP/IPPS settings
1Click [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings].
Network
151
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use IPP Printing]
When using IPP/IPPS for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Use TLS]
When using IPPS (IPP Print with TLS encrypted communication), select the check box. When not using,
clear the check box.
●When using IPPS, enable the TLS encrypted communication function. Using TLS for Encrypted
Communications(P. 246)
●If you select [RSA] for [Key Algorithm] when generating the key to use for network communication, set
a key length of [1024 bit] or longer. IPPS printing may not be able to be performed correctly if a key
length of [512 bit] is set, depending on the operating system you are using.
[Use IPP Authentication]
When using the user authentication function for IPP Print, select the check box and set the user name
and password. When not using, clear the check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name used in IPP authentication.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password
in the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the [Conrm] text box.
3Click [OK].
Conguring WSD settings
1Click [Edit] in [WSD Print Settings].
Network
152
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use WSD Printing]
When using WSD for printing, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the
network.
3Click [OK].
5Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Network
153
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable LPD print, RAW print, and IPP print from the setting menu of the operation
panel.
LPD Settings(P. 331)
RAW Settings(P. 331)
IPP Print(P. 332)
●WSD settings can also be accessed from the setting menu of the operation panel. WSD(P. 332)
Setup procedures on your computer
After the setting in the machine is completed, you may need to congure settings or install applications on your
computer as well. Congure settings in your computer as necessary.
●Conguring printer ports
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been
added via the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For
example, an incorrect port number or port type may have been specied in the computer. In this case, you
need to congure the printer port settings. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 161)
●Setting up WSD network devices on Windows Vista/7/8/10
Use the WSD port to install the printer driver. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers
on the online manual website.
●Enabling IPP/IPPS
Install the printer drivers by specifying the IPP port. Enabling IPP/IPPS(P. 155)
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 164)
Network
154
Enabling IPP/IPPS
51W4-036
To set the printing protocol to IPP or IPPS, install the printer driver by using the procedure shown below that suits the
operating system of your computer. The printer driver is included on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM that comes
with the machine. Insert the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer before starting the
procedure.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
●Congure the IPP print settings by using the Remote UI before staring the procedure.
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 149)
●Close the setup screen that is displayed when the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM is inserted.
1Open the Printer Folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522)
2Click [Add a printer].
3If you are using Windows 7/Server 2008, click [Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth
printer].
4Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
Network
155
5Select [Select a shared printer by name], enter a connection destination, and click
[Next].
●To use IPP, enter "http://<IP address of the machine>/ipp" for the connection destination.
Example: http://192.168.1.81/ipp
●To use IPPS, enter "https://<IP address of the machine>/ipp" for the connection destination.
Example: https://192.168.1.81/ipp
●When you are using a DNS server, enter "<host name of the machine>.<domain name>" instead of "IP
address of the machine" (example: https://my_printer.example.com/ipp).
6Click [Have Disk].
7Click [Browse].
Network
156
8Specify the folder where the printer drivers are contained, select the INF le, and
then click [Open].
●Specify the folder as shown below according to the operating system of your computer. If you are not sure
whether the operating system of your computer is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see Checking the Bit
Architecture(P. 525) .
32-bit operating systems
Select [UFR II]-your language-[32BIT]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
64-bit operating systems
Select [UFR II]-your language-[x64]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
If using the IPP authentication function
●When you are prompted to enter the password, enter the user name and password, and click [OK].
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 149)
9Proceed with the setting procedure by following the on-screen instructions.
➠The printer driver is installed. To use IPPS, install public keys of the machine in the computer.
◼Installing Public Keys of the Machine
Using IPPS additionally requires installing the public keys of the machine on the computer.
●The [Common Name] of key pairs must be set in advance to be the "IP address" or "<host name>.<domain
name>" used when connecting to the machine. Generating Key Pairs(P. 268)
1Start the Web browser.
Network
157
2Enter "https://<IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld, and press the
[ENTER] key.
●Example: https://192.168.1.81/
●When you are using a DNS server, enter "<host name of the machine>.<domain name>" instead of "IP
address of the machine" (example: https://my_printer.example.com/).
3Click [Continue to this website (not recommended).].
➠Login Page is displayed.
4Click [Tools] [Internet options].
5Select [Trusted Sites] in the [Security] tab, and click [Sites].
6Make sure that "https://<IP address of the machine> or <host name of the
machine>.<domain name>/" is displayed, and click [Add] [Close].
Network
158
7Clear the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] check box
when it is selected.
8Click [OK].
➠The screen returns to the Remote UI screen.
9Exit the Web browser.
10 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to start the Remote UI.
11 Click [Certicate error] [View certicates] in the right of the address eld.
Network
159
12 Click [Install Certicate].
13 Click [Next].
14 Select [Place all certicates in the following store] and click [Browse].
15 Select [Trusted Root Certication Authorities], and follow the on-screen instructions
to complete the certicate import wizard.
16 If you have cleared the [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet
Explorer)] check box in step 7, select the check box.
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 164)
Network
160
Conguring Printer Ports
51W4-08U
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the document data
cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the computer.
●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522)
2Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
3Click the [Ports] tab and congure the required settings.
Adding a port
If you have changed the IP address of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing
drivers, add a new port.
1Click [Add Port].
2Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3Click [Next].
4Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].
●The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
Network
161
●When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
*When you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].
5Click [Finish].
6Click [Close].
Changing the port type
If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side or the port number has been
changed, the corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This operation is not needed
for WSD ports.
1Click [Congure Port].
2Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].
●If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
●If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].
3Click [OK].
●To set the printing protocol to IPP or IPPS, you must specify the port for IPP before installing the printer
driver. Enabling IPP/IPPS(P. 155)
●Changing the printing protocol settings on the machine. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD
Functions(P. 149)
Network
162
Deleting ports
1Select the port you want to delete, and click [Delete Port].
●You cannot delete a port currently congured as the printer port. To delete this port, select a different
port and click [Apply] to congure it as the new printer port, and then delete the original port.
2Click [OK].
4Click [Close].
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 164)
Network
163
Setting Up Print Server
51W4-037
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also enables each
computer to install printer drivers over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing printer drivers on each
computer by using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, congure the
settings for sharing the printer.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
●You may be unable to install printer drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
●When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To carry out Department ID Management when using a print server
●Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be added during the printer driver installation. For more
information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522)
2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
3Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
Network
164
When [Change Sharing Options] is displayed
●Click [Change Sharing Options].
4Install additional drivers as necessary.
●This operation is required if you want to install printer drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
1Click [Additional Drivers].
2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
Network
165
●Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems [x64]
64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]
●If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 525) .
3Insert the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, and click [Browse].
4Specify the folder that contains additional drivers, select the INF le, and then click [Open].
●Select the folder as shown below according to the operating system of the print server.
If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system
Select [UFR II]-your language-[x64]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system
Select [UFR II]-your language-[32BIT]-[Driver] folder on the User Software CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
5Click [OK].
➠Installation of the additional drivers starts. Wait until the [Sharing] tab is displayed back.
When [User Account Control] is displayed
●Click [Yes].
5Click [OK].
◼Installing Printer Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the
Print Server(P. 523)
2Double-click the shared printer.
Network
166
Conguring the Machine for Your Network
Environment
51W4-038
The conguration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.
Network
168
Conguring Ethernet Settings
51W4-039
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set
the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be used
without changing the defaults ( Ethernet Driver(P. 342) ), but you can change these
settings to suit your network environment.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Ethernet Driver> <Auto Detect>.
4Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
Conguring Ethernet settings automatically
Select <On> and press . The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the
Ethernet type that can be used.
Conguring Ethernet settings manually
1Select <Off>, and press .
2Select the communication mode.
●Select <Communication Mode> Select <Half Duplex> or <Full Duplex>
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
Network
169
3Select the Ethernet type.
●Select <Ethernet Type> Select the Ethernet type
●When you select <1000 Base-T>, the setting for <Communication Mode> is changed to <Full Duplex>.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 171)
Network
170
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
51W4-03A
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Wait Time at Startup>, and press .
4Enter the wait time in seconds, and press .
●Use the numeric keys to enter the time.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 169)
Network
171
Conguring DNS
51W4-03C
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Congure the DNS, mDNS or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure DNS settings.
Network
172
Conguring IPv4 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].
2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. You can also set the IP address from the operation panel (
IPv4 Settings(P. 326) ).
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. You can also set the IP address from the
operation panel ( IPv4 Settings(P. 326) ).
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Network
173
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box. This check box can only be selected when the [Use IPv4] check box is
selected.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server. You can
also specify whether to obtain a host name from the operation panel ( IPv4 Settings(P. 326) ).
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server. You can also specify whether to perform DNS dynamic update from the operation panel (
IPv4 Settings(P. 326) ).
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 6 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 15 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
[Acquire WINS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 44 to obtain a WINS server address from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
Conguring IPv6 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
Network
174
2Congure IPv6 DNS settings.
●The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to congure the settings. Setting IPv6
Addresses(P. 144)
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. You cannot enter an address that starts with "ff" (or multicast
address), the address of "0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with "0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or
"0:0:0:0:0:0".
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Network
175
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. You cannot enter an address that starts with
"ff" (or multicast address), the address of "0000::0000" (all zeros), or an address that starts with
"0:0:0:0:0:ffff" or "0:0:0:0:0:0".
[Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address].
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS. This check box can only be
selected when the [Use IPv6] check box is selected.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as that set in IPv4. To set a different name, clear
the check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire DNS Server Address]
Select the check box to enable Option 23 to obtain a DNS server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire Domain Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 24 to obtain a domain name from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
5Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Network
176
Conguring WINS
51W4-03E
Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that associates a NetBIOS name (a computer or
printer name in an SMB network) with an IP address. To enable WINS, the WINS server must be specied.
●The function is not available in an IPv6 network.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [WINS Conguration].
Network
178
5Select the [WINS Resolution] check box, specify the required settings, and click [OK].
[WINS Resolution]
Select the check box to use WINS for name resolution. When not using WINS, clear the check box.
[WINS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of the WINS server.
●If the IP address of the WINS server is obtained from a DHCP server, the obtained IP address overrides the
IP address entered in the [WINS Server Address] text box.
[Scope ID]
When dividing the network into several groups with scope IDs (identiers for groups of devices in the
network), enter the scope ID for your computer. Leave the text box blank if there is no scope ID set for your
computer.
[SMB Server Name]
When registering the machine on the WINS server, specify the server name to be used in the SMB network.
●You cannot use spaces.
●A server name set in [Server Name] under [SMB Settings] is automatically used for [SMB Server Name], if
any. A change to the server name in [SMB Server Name] is also applied to [Server Name] under [SMB
Settings].
[SMB Workgroup Name ]
When registering the machine on the WINS server, specify the name of the workgroup to which the machine
belongs in the SMB network.
●You cannot use spaces.
Network
179
●A workgroup name set in [Workgroup Name] under [SMB Settings] is automatically used for [SMB
Workgroup Name], if any. A change to the workgroup name in [SMB Workgroup Name] is also applied to
[Workgroup Name] under [SMB Settings].
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable the WINS settings from the setting menu of the operation panel. WINS
Resolution(P. 330)
LINKS
Conguring SMB(P. 194)
Network
180
Conguring SNTP
51W4-03F
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using
the time server on the network. When you use SNTP, the system checks the time server
periodically, so that the system clock is always accurate.
●The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
181
4Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].
5Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter "<host
name>.<domain name>" (or FQDN) using alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Network
182
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
●You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration]
[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] and then clicking [Check NTP Server Connection] in [SNTP Settings] that
appears. If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this
operation does not adjust the system clock.
Selecting settings from the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable the SNTP settings from the setting menu of the operation panel.
SNTP(P. 335)
Network
183
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
51W4-03H
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Using TLS for Encrypted
Communications(P. 246) ).
●The machine does not support the trap notication feature of SNMP.
●SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Network
184
3Click [Network] [SNMP Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Specify SNMPv1 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
185
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name 1]/[Community Name 2]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for administrators using Canon software,
such as iW Management Console. Select [Off], [Read/Write], or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB
objects.
[Off] Does not use Dedicated Community.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects by using Dedicated
Community.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects by using Dedicated Community.
6Specify SNMPv3 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
186
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1] to [User Settings 5]. To disable user settings, clear the
corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes], [Authentication Yes/Encryption No], or [Authentication No/
Encryption No] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] or [Authentication Yes/Encryption No] for [Security Settings] for
the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication Yes/Encryption Yes] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that corresponds to
your environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password
in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
[Context Name 1] to [Context Name 5]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the context name.
Network
187
7Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
●With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Obtain Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
[Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode]
Select the check box to discard SNMP packets received during sleep mode. If you do not want to discard the
packets, clear the check box.
●If you select the check box, applications that use the SNMP protocol, such as Canon software imageWARE
Series, may be disabled to access the machine.
8Click [OK].
9Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Disabling SNMPv1
●If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Network
188
Using the operation panel
●SNMP settings can also be accessed from the setting menu of the operation panel. SNMP Settings(P. 339)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
●If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246)
Network
189
Conguring Settings for Device Management Software
51W4-03J
You can facilitate the collection and management of various information about networked devices by implementing
device management software, such as iW Management Console, into the network. Information such as device settings
and error logs is retrieved and distributed via the server computer. If the machine is connected to such a network, iW
Management Console searches the network for the machine by using protocols such as Service Location Protocol (SLP)
to gather information from the machine, including the power status. SLP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Specify SLP settings.
Specifying multicast device discovery
1Click [Edit] in [Multicast Discovery Settings].
Network
190
2Select the [Respond to Discovery] check box and specify the required settings.
[Respond to Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to respond to device management software multicast discovery
packets and enable monitoring by device management software. If you do not want to set the machine to
respond, clear the check box.
[Scope Name]
To include the machine into a specic scope, enter characters for the scope name.
3Click [OK].
Notifying a device management software of the power status of the machine
1Click [Edit] in [Sleep Mode Notication Settings].
2Select the [Notify] check box and specify the required settings.
Network
191
[Notify]
Select the check box to notify a device management software of the power status of the machine. When
[Notify] is selected, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep mode
and reduce the total power consumption.
[Port Number]
Change the port number for this function according to the network environment.
[Number of Routers to Traverse]
Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass.
[Notication Interval]
Specify how often the machine noties a device management software of its power status.
3Click [OK].
5Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable discovery response from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Discovery Response(P. 336)
●Power status notication settings can also be accessed from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Sleep Notif. Set.(P. 336)
Network
192
Conguring SMB
51W4-03K
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and printers, with more than one device
in a network and used to register the machine as a shared printer on the SMB network.
●SMB supports only NetBIOS over TCP/IP and does not support NetBEUI. Congure the IP address before
conguring the SMB settings. Setting IP Addresses(P. 139)
●SMB is enabled only when the optional SD card is installed in the machine.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [SMB Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Network
194
5Select the [Use SMB Server] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SMB Server]
If you select the check box, the computer is indicated as an SMB server on the SMB network.
[Server Name]
Specify the server name that is to be displayed on the SMB network. The name must be different from the
names of any other computers and printers on the network.
●You cannot use spaces.
●A server name set in [SMB Server Name] under [WINS Conguration] is automatically used for [Server
Name], if any. A change to the server name in [Server Name] is also applied to [SMB Server Name] under
[WINS Conguration].
[Workgroup Name]
Enter the name of the workgroup to which the machine belongs. If there is no workgroup in your network
environment, create a workgroup on Windows and enter the name of the workgroup.
●You cannot use spaces.
●A workgroup name set in [SMB Workgroup Name] under [WINS Conguration] is automatically used for
[Workgroup Name], if any. A change to the server name in [Workgroup Name] is also applied to [SMB
Workgroup Name] under [WINS Conguration].
[Comments]
Enter comments on the machine as necessary.
Network
195
[Use LM Announce]
Select the check box to notify the LAN Manager of existence of the machine. If you do not need to notify,
clear the check box, reducing a network load.
[Use SMB Printing]
When using SMB printing with the machine, select the check box.
[Printer Name]
Specify the name of the machine.
●You cannot use spaces.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
»Continue to Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing(P. 197) .
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable the SMB server from the setting menu of the operation panel. SMB(P. 338)
●You can also enable or disable SMB print from the setting menu of the operation panel. SMB(P. 338)
LINKS
Conguring WINS(P. 178)
Network
196
Conguring Settings on the Computer for Printing
51W4-03L
Congure the connection settings and install the printer driver on the computer so that printing can be performed
with the machine from the computer via SMB network.
Connecting to the SMB Network(P. 197)
Installing the Printer Driver(P. 198)
Connecting to the SMB Network
1Display [Local Area Connection Properties].
2Select the [Client for Microsoft Networks] check box.
3Select the [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] or [Internet Protocol] check box
and click [Properties].
4Click the [General] tab [Advanced].
Network
197
5Click the [WINS] tab, select [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP], and then click [OK].
6Click [OK] until all dialog boxes are closed.
●Restart the computer if you are prompted to do so.
Installing the Printer Driver
For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual
website.
When a port selection screen appears during installation
●Follow the procedure below.
1Click [Add Port].
2Select [Network] and click [OK].
3From the list, select "Workgroup Name," "Server Name," and "Printer Name" that were
specied in the SMB protocol settings in this order. Conguring SMB(P. 194)
Network
198
Security
Security ................................................................................................................................................................ 200
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ....................................................................................... 201
Preventing Unauthorized Access .................................................................................................................. 202
Setting Access Privileges .............................................................................................................................. 204
Setting the System Manager Password .................................................................................................. 205
Setting the Department ID Management .............................................................................................. 208
Setting a Remote UI PIN ........................................................................................................................ 215
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 216
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ............................................................................................. 217
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules ......................................................................................... 223
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 226
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 229
Restricting the Printing Operations .............................................................................................................. 230
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 234
Restricting Operation Panel Functions ......................................................................................................... 237
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 240
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 241
Disabling the LAN Port ................................................................................................................................. 242
Hiding the Print Job History .......................................................................................................................... 243
Implementing Robust Security Features ......................................................................................................... 245
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications .................................................................................................... 246
Conguring IPSec Settings ........................................................................................................................... 251
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ....................................................................................................... 261
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................... 267
Generating Key Pairs ............................................................................................................................. 268
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ................................................................................. 277
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ............................................................................................. 280
Security
199
Security
51W4-03R
Condential information is handled by information devices everywhere, including computers and printers, and any of
these devices may become a target for malicious third parties at anytime. Attackers may directly gain unauthorized
access to your devices, or indirectly take advantage of negligence or improper use. Either way, you may incur
unanticipated losses when your condential information is leaked. To counter these risks, the machine is equipped
with a variety of security functions. Set the necessary conguration depending on your network environment.
You can congure the best security system by building an environment that inhibits access to printers on your
in-house network via the Internet and using such environment together with the machine's security features.
Preventing Unauthorized Access(P. 202)
◼Establishing the Basics of Information Security
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access(P. 201)
◼Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 229) Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)
(P. 88)
◼Implementing Robust Security Features
Implementing Robust Security Features(P. 245)
Security
200
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access
51W4-03S
Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine. You can implement multiple security
measures, such as managing user access privileges and using rewalls.
Security
201
Preventing Unauthorized Access
51W4-03U
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 202)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 203)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 203)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Printer(P. 203)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the external network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
●From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
●From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
●From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to conrm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address(P. 140) .
●If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents
Security
202
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Rules(P. 217) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Implementing Robust Security Features(P. 245) , and
on the procedures to specify, see Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Printer
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printer/multifunction machine
enables you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
●Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 215) .
●Setting the password for the System Manager
For more information, see Setting the System Manager Password(P. 205) .
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see Security(P. 200) and take necessary security measures for preventing
unauthorized access to suit your environment.
Security
203
Setting Access Privileges
51W4-03W
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine.
Access privileges are set separately for the System Manager password, an account called "Department ID," and the
Remote UI. When privileges are set, the user must enter an ID and PIN to print or change settings.
The System Manager password is intended exclusively for administrators while the Department ID is for genera users.
Both are specied by System Managers. And by setting a Remote UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI.
System Manager Password
Specifying the settings for the machine from the Remote UI requires the System Manager password. The
password is set to "7654321" by default, and can be changed to allow only specic administrators to change the
settings.
Setting the System Manager Password(P. 205)
Department ID (Department ID Management)
Department ID is an account for managing printing jobs. You can register multiple Department IDs to specify
access privileges for a user (or group of users). If a user tries to print a document when Department IDs are
enabled, the screen for entering a Department ID is displayed, and the user must enter his/her own
Department ID. Information for each Department ID can be viewed, such as how many pages have been
printed.
Setting the Department ID Management(P. 208)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 215)
Security
204
Setting the System Manager Password
51W4-03X
Changing the settings congured in the machine from the Remote UI requires administrative privileges. Follow the
procedure shown below to change the System Manager password. The System Manager password settings
information is critical to the security of the machine, so make sure that only Administrators know the System Manager
password.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
205
5Enter the current password in [Current System Manager Password].
●The default password is "7654321".
6Enter a new password.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the [Conrm] text box.
●If you click [OK] with the check box selected and the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes left blank, the
currently set password is deleted.
Security
206
7Enter the System Manager name and contact information as necessary, and click
[OK].
[System Manager]
Enter the name of an administrator.
[Contact Information]
Enter the contact information of the administrator.
[E-Mail Address]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the e-mail address of the administrator.
[System Manager Comment]
Enter comments of the administrator.
●Be sure to remember the password that you have set. If you have forgotten the password, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 204)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 296)
Security
207
Setting the Department ID Management
51W4-03Y
You can control access to the machine by using multiple IDs for multiple users or groups. If a user tries to operate the
machine when Department ID Management is enabled, a logon screen is displayed, and the user must enter their own
Department ID and PIN to use the machine. Department ID Management provides recorded details of the past use of
the machine for each Department ID. To congure Department ID Management, register department IDs as necessary
and then enable Department ID Management function. Additional settings are required if you want to enable
Department ID Management for printing from a computer.
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN(P. 208)
Enabling the Department ID Management(P. 209)
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing from the Computer(P. 212)
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown(P. 213)
To manage the print status of each department
Checking the Number of Pages Printed for Each Department(P. 450)
Registering/Editing Department ID and PIN
Register a Department ID and set a PIN for it. Register all the department IDs to be managed.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management] and register or edit Department IDs.
Security
208
Registering a Department ID
1Click [Register New Department].
2Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number to be registered.
[Set PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text
boxes.
Editing the settings of the registered Department ID
1Click the corresponding text link under [Department ID] to edit.
2Change the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Deleting a Department ID
●Click [Delete] on the right of the Department ID you want to delete click [OK].
Enabling the Department ID Management
After you register as many Department IDs as necessary, enable Department ID Management.
Security
209
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management] [Settings].
4Select the [Enable Department ID Management] check box and click [OK].
[Enable Department ID Management]
Select the check box to enable Department ID Management. If you do not want to use Department ID
Management, clear the check box.
Security
210
●For information on the [Accept Print Jobs With Unknown IDs] check box, see Blocking Jobs When
Department ID Is Unknown(P. 213) .
If Department ID Management is enabled
●When users try to print a le in the USB memory device or a document stored
on the SD card from the operation panel, the authentication screen is
displayed. Enter the Department ID and PIN, select <Log In>, and press .
●To log on to the Remote UI in General User Mode, you must enter the Department ID and PIN. Starting
Remote UI(P. 284)
◼When the XPS Printer Driver Is Used
If you want to use Department ID Management when the XPS printer driver is used, set key pairs for TLS
encrypted communication ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246) ). After completing the
settings of key pairs, congure the settings shown below.
Log on to the Remote UI in Management Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Settings/
Registration] [Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [Department ID Management PIN
Conrmation Settings] Select the [Use Department ID Management PIN Conrmation] check
box [OK]
[Use Department ID Management PIN Conrmation]
If you select the check box, Department ID Management will be enabled for printing with the XPS printer
driver. If you do not want to use Department ID Management, clear the check box.
●If any key pair is not set in the machine, you cannot enable [Use Department ID Management PIN
Conrmation]. Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 267)
Security
211
Setting the Department ID Management for Printing from the Computer
If you want to enable Department ID Management for printing from a computer, you need to specify settings by using
the printer driver you already installed on the computer. Specify the Department ID and PIN as necessary.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522)
2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
3Click the [Device Settings] tab and specify the required settings.
1Select [Department ID Management] in [User Management], and then click [Settings] located below.
2Specify the settings as necessary and click [OK].
Security
212
[Allow PIN Setting]
Select the check box to enable the PIN setting.
[Department ID]
Enter the Department ID number.
[PIN]
Enter the PIN corresponding to the Department ID as necessary.
[Verify]
Click to verify that the correct ID and PIN are entered. This function is not available if the machine and
the computer are connected via a USB or WSD (Web Services on Devices) port.
[Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing]
Select the check box to display the [Conrm Department ID/PIN] pop-up screen each time you print
from a computer.
[Authenticate Department ID/PIN at Device]
Select the check box if the machine and the computer are connected via a USB or WSD port.
3Click [OK].
Logging on to the machine
●When you try to print from a computer when Department ID
Management is enabled, the following pop-up screen is displayed
(unless the [Conrm Department ID/PIN When Printing] check box is
cleared):
Blocking Jobs When Department ID Is Unknown
The factory default settings are such that even when Department ID Management is enabled, you can print from a
computer without entering an ID and PIN. If you want to change this so that printing is not possible unless an ID and
PIN are entered, use the following procedure.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
213
3Click [Department ID Management] [Settings].
4Clear the [Accept Print Jobs With Unknown IDs] check box and click [OK].
●If you clear the check box, users cannot print by a method that is not supported by Department ID
Management or perform Direct Print from the Remote UI that the users log on in Management Mode.
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 204)
Setting the System Manager Password(P. 205)
Security
214
Setting a Remote UI PIN
51W4-040
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
●When Department ID Management is enabled, setting here is not required. Setting the Department ID
Management(P. 208)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Remote UI Settings> <RUI Access Sec. Set.>.
4Select <On>, and press .
5Set a PIN.
●Enter a number for the PIN and press .
●As <Conrm PIN> is displayed for conrmation, enter again the same PIN digits.
If Remote UI settings are initialized
●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. Initializing Menu(P. 456)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 204)
Setting the System Manager Password(P. 205)
Security
215
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
51W4-041
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Security
216
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules
51W4-042
You can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses. For data
reception, you can specify IP addresses by specifying port numbers.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [IP Address Filter].
4Click [Edit] for the lter type that you want to use.
Security
217
[IPv4 Address: TX Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.
[IPv4 Address: RX Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses and the port
number.
[IPv6 Address: TX Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.
[IPv6 Address: RX Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses and the port
number.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
For TX Filter
Select the default policy to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine, and then
specify IP addresses for exceptions.
Security
218
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default
Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
2Specify address exceptions.
●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in [Register Address] and click [Add].
Check for entry errors
●If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <Address Filter> to <Off>. Address Filter(P. 344)
When you have selected [Reject] under [Default Policy]
●Loopback, multicast, and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
●Select an IP address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
For RX Filter
When selecting [Allow] under [Default Policy], specify the IP addresses of devices whose communication with
the machine should be blocked. When selecting [Reject] under [Default Policy], specify the IP addresses of
devices that should be able to communicate with the machine.
Security
219
1Click [Register New].
2Specify address exceptions.
●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in [Register Address].
●To specify a port number, select the [Specify Port Number] check box, enter a port number in [Port
Number], and click [Add].
Check for entry errors
●If IP addresses or the port numbers are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine
from the Remote UI, in which case you need to set <Address Filter> to <Off>. Address Filter(P. 344)
To delete a set port number
●Select the port number to delete, and click [Delete].
Security
220
3Click [OK].
4Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Reject] or [Allow] radio button for the [Default
Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the machine.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are permitted.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose IP addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses]. Communications
with other devices are prohibited.
Editing a set IP address from exceptions
●Click the corresponding text link under [Exception Addresses], in the screen that has been displayed
change settings as necessary, and click [OK].
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
●Select an IP address to delete, and click [Delete].
Security
221
5Click [OK].
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IP address ltering from the Setting menu of the operation panel. Address
Filter(P. 344)
LINKS
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 223)
Security
222
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules
51W4-043
You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC
addresses but permit other communications.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [MAC Address Filter].
4Click [Edit] for a lter type.
Security
223
[TX Filter]
Select to restrict sending data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
[RX Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
●Select the precondition (default policy) to allow or reject the communication of other devices with the
machine, and then specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box and click the [Allow] or [Reject] radio button for the [Default Policy].
[Use Filter]
Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
[Default Policy]
Select the precondition to allow or reject other devices to communicate with the machine.
[Allow]
Select to block communication packets when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are permitted.
[Reject]
Select to pass communication packets only when they are sent to or received from
devices whose MAC addresses are entered in [Exception Addresses].
Communications with other devices are prohibited.
2Specify address exceptions.
●Enter the MAC address in the [Register Address] text box and click [Add].
Security
224
●You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
●If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <Address Filter> to <Off>. Address Filter(P. 344)
When you have selected [Reject] under [Default Policy]
●Outgoing multicast and broadcast packets cannot be ltered.
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
●Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Address Filter(P. 344)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 217)
Security
225
Setting a Proxy
51W4-044
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].
Security
226
5Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the
user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the
same password in the [Conrm] text box.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
Security
227
Restricting the Machine's Functions
51W4-045
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting the Printing Functions
Restricting the Printing Operations(P. 230)
Restricting USB Functions
Restricting USB Functions(P. 234)
Restricting Operation Panel Functions
Restricting Operation Panel Functions(P. 237)
Restricting Network Functions Including HTTP Communications
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 240)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 241)
Disabling the LAN Port(P. 242)
Hiding the Print Job History
Hiding the Print Job History(P. 243)
Security
229
Restricting the Printing Operations
51W4-046
You can specify settings to prevent received print data from being automatically printed, reducing wasteful use of
paper and disabling third parties to use the machine. To use this function, you must install an optional SD card.
Installing an SD Card(P. 495)
●Even when the printing operations are restricted, settings lists and reports can be printed. Printing
Reports and Lists(P. 441)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
Security
230
4Click [Edit].
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Select the [Restrict Printer Jobs] check box and click [OK].
Security
231
[Restrict Printer Jobs]
Select the check box to restrict the printing operations of the machine. Clear the check box to disable the
restriction.
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
When the printing operations are restricted
●Only Stored Job Print can be performed from the printer drivers. Printing a Document Stored in the
Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 92)
●Only PDF, PS, EPS, and XPS les stored in boxes can be printed from the Remote UI. Printing without
Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 101)
●USB Direct Print from the USB memory device and E-mail Print are not available.
LINKS
Security
232
Restricting USB Functions
51W4-047
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source
of information leakage if it is not properly managed. Be especially careful when handling USB memory devices. This
section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port of the machine and how to prohibit use of USB memory
devices.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 234)
Restricting the USB Direct Print Function(P. 235)
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
You can disable the USB port, for connecting a computer, located on the back side of the machine. Connection to a
computer via USB will be disabled, but a USB memory device can be connected to the USB port on the right side of the
machine.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Interface>, and press .
3Select <Interface Selection> and press .
●When a message appears, press .
4Select <USB> and press .
5Select <Off> and press .
<Off>
Disables the USB port located on the back side of the machine.
<On>
Enables the USB port located on the back side of the machine.
Security
234
6Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Restricting the USB Direct Print Function
You can disable printing data from a USB memory device. This makes it impossible to print data stored in the USB
memory.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
235
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Clear the [USB Direct Print] check box and click [OK].
[USB Direct Print]
Clear the check box to disable direct printing from a USB memory device. Select the check box to enable
printing from a USB memory device. If you also select the [Automatically Display USB Direct Print Screen]
check box, the USB Direct Print screen will be automatically displayed when a USB memory device is attached
to the machine.
LINKS
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 77)
Security
236
Restricting Operation Panel Functions
51W4-048
You can restrict the use of the keys on the operation panel to prevent the settings of the machine from being
carelessly changed.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
237
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Select the check box of the key to restrict and click [OK].
[Keys to Lock]
You can select the check box to lock the corresponding key even when it is pressed on the operation panel.
Clear the check box to unlock the key. You can also lock the Setup key from the operation panel ( Mng.
Settings(P. 320) ).
Security
238
Disabling HTTP Communication
51W4-049
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing., and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <HTTP>.
4Select <Off>, and press .
<Off>
Disables HTTP communication.
<On>
Enables HTTP communication.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 283)
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 149)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 128)
When the XPS Printer Driver Is Used(P. 211)
Security
240
Disabling Remote UI
51W4-04A
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied by using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
●When a message appears, press .
3Select <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI>.
4Select <Off>, and press .
<Off>
Disables the Remote UI.
<On>
Enables the Remote UI.
5Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
LINKS
Using Remote UI(P. 283)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 240)
Security
241
Disabling the LAN Port
51W4-04C
A LAN port is an interface that connects a LAN cable for using a network. When you are using the machine via USB, you
can disable the LAN port to completely shut down the network, blocking malicious third-party intrusions via the LAN
port.
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Interface>, and press .
3Select <Interface Selection> and press .
●When a message appears, press .
4Select <Network> and press .
5Select <Off> and press .
<Off>
Disables the LAN port.
<On>
Enables the LAN port.
6Perform a hard reset. Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408)
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Security
242
Hiding the Print Job History
51W4-04E
To protect the privacy of users, you can specify settings to disable displaying the print job history on the Remote UI
screen and printing the print history list. The print job history is updated and maintained even if it is set to be hidden,
so that administrators can view the history as necessary.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Display Job Log].
4Click [Edit].
Security
243
5Clear the [Display Job Log] check box and click [OK].
[Display Job Log]
If you clear the check box, the print job history will not be displayed on the Remote UI screen and the print
history list cannot be printed, either. To display the job history, select the check box.
[Allow to Retrieve Job Log with Management Software]
If you select the check box, device management software such as iW Management Console can be used to
obtain a print job history. Clear the check box to disable the management software to obtain the print job
history. This function is automatically enabled when the [Display Job Log] check box is selected.
LINKS
Checking History of Documents(P. 294)
Job Menu(P. 406)
Security
244
Implementing Robust Security Features
51W4-04F
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,
and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246)
IPSec Communication
While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail application,
IPSec encrypts the whole (or payloads of) IP packets. This enables IPSec to offer a more versatile security system
than TLS. Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 251)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch blocks access from
the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. Conguring
IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 261)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 267)
Security
245
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications
51W4-04H
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer and the IPP Print data to
print via Internet by using Transport Layer Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over
the network. TLS must be enabled when the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IPSec (Pre-Shared Key
Method), IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/PEAP), or SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication, you need to set a
key pair and enable the TLS function. Have a key pair to use ready ( Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates(P. 267) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
Security
246
4Click [Edit] in [TLS Settings].
5Edit TLS Settings.
[Key and Certicate Settings]
Select a key from the list of keys and certicates.
●Select a key from the list of keys and certicates, and click [Default Key Settings].
Viewing details of a certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 280)
Security
247
If [Default Key Settings] is not displayed
●When TLS is already enabled by [Remote UI Settings] or [IPP Print Settings], [Default Key Settings] is not
displayed. To change the key to use, refer to step 6 and clear the [Use TLS] check boxes under [Remote
UI Settings] or [IPP Print Settings], respectively.
[Allowed Versions]
Select the allowed versions for TLS.
[Encryption Algorithms to Restrict]
Select the encryption algorithms to be restricted against use for TLS. If you make no restriction, select
[None].
6Enable TLS for the Remote UI.
Using TLS for communication with the Remote UI
1Click [Security] [Remote UI Settings].
2Click [Edit].
3Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
Security
248
[Use TLS]
When using TLS for Remote UI communication, select the check box. When not using, clear the check
box.
Using TLS for a function that is compatible with encrypted communication
Using TLS for IPP printing
Make the following setting to perform IPP printing using TLS. For other IPP print settings, see Conguring
Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 149) .
[Network] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings] Select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from the setting menu of the operation panel.
Remote UI Settings(P. 341)
Security
249
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
●If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 268)
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 277)
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 251)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 261)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 184)
Security
250
Conguring IPSec Settings
51W4-04J
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec or IPsec) is a protocol suite for encrypting data transported over a network, including
Internet networks. While TLS only encrypts data used on a specic application, such as a Web browser or an e-mail
application, IPSec encrypts either whole IP packets or the payloads of IP packets, offering a more versatile security
system. The IPSec of the machine works in transport mode, in which the payloads of IP packets are encrypted. With
this feature, the machine can connect directly to a computer that is in the same virtual private network (VPN). Check
the system requirements and set the necessary conguration on the computer before you congure the machine.
Management Functions(P. 479)
Registering Security Policies(P. 251)
Enabling IPSec Communication(P. 258)
Using IPSec with IP address lter
●The IPSec settings are applied before the IP address lter settings during packet reception while the IP
address settings are applied before the IPSec settings during packet transmission. Specifying IP
Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 217)
Registering Security Policies
To use IPSec for encrypted communication, you need to register security policies (SP) before enabling the IPSec
settings ( Enabling IPSec Communication(P. 258) ). A security policy consists of the groups of settings described
below. You can register multiple policies according to a combination of the IP address and the port number. After
registering policies, specify the order in which they are applied.
Selector
Selector denes conditions for IP packets to apply IPSec communication. Selectable conditions include IP
addresses and port numbers of the machine and the devices to communicate with.
IKE
IKE congures the IKEv1 that is used for key exchange protocol. Note that instructions vary depending on the
authentication method selected.
[Pre-Shared Key Method]
A key of alphanumeric characters can be shared with the other devices. Enable TLS for the Remote UI in
advance ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246) ).
[Digital Signature Method]
The machine and the other devices authenticate each other by mutually verifying their digital signatures. Have
a key pair to use ready ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 277) ).
Setting Protocols and Options
Specify the settings for ESP and AH, which are added to packets during IPSec communication. ESP and AH
cannot be used at the same time. You can also select whether or not to enable PFS for tighter security.
Security
251
6Enter a policy name in [Policy Name], and select the [Enable Policy] check box.
[Policy Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name that is used for identifying the policy.
[Enable Policy]
Select the check box to enable the policy. When not using the policy, clear the check box.
7Specify the selector settings.
[Local Address]
Security
253
Select the type of the IP address of the machine to apply the policy from the following list.
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from the IPv4 address of the
machine.
[IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address of the
machine.
[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Local Address], enter the IP address to
apply the policy.
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 addresses, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Remote Address]
Select the type of IP address of the other devices to apply the policy from the list shown below.
[All IP Addresses] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets.
[All IPv4 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv4 address.
[All IPv6 Address] Select to use IPSec for all IP packets that are sent to or from an IPv6 address.
[IPv4 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv4 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[IPv6 Manual Settings] Select to specify a single IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses to apply IPSec.
Enter the IPv6 address (or the range) in the [Addresses to Set Manually] text box.
[Addresses to Set Manually]
If [IPv4 Manual Settings] or [IPv6 Manual Settings] is selected for [Remote Address], enter the IP address to
apply the policy.
[Subnet Settings]
When manually specifying IPv4 addresses, you can express the range by using the subnet mask. Enter the
subnet mask using periods to delimit numbers (example:"255.255.255.240").
[Local Port]/[Remote Port]
If you want to create separate policies for each protocol, such as HTTP or SMTP, enter the appropriate port
number for the protocol to determine whether to use IPSec.
●IPSec is not applied to the packets that have a specied multicast or broadcast address.
8Specify the IKE Settings.
Security
254
[IKE Mode]
The mode used for the key exchange protocol is displayed. Normally select the main mode.
●Select the aggressive mode when the IP address is not xed. Note that security is lower in the aggressive
mode than in the main mode.
[AUTH Method]
Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] or [Digital Signature Method] for the method used when authenticating the
machine.
●When the aggressive mode is selected in [IKE Mode], the [Pre-Shared Key Method] setting does not
encrypt the shared key.
[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]
To automatically set the algorithm that is used for key exchange, select the [Auto] check box. If you select the
check box, the algorithm is set as shown below.
[Authentication] [SHA1 and MD5]
[Encryption] [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC]
[DH Group] [Group 2 (1024)]
To manually set the algorithm, clear the check box and select the algorithm.
[Authentication] Select the hash algorithm.
[Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm.
[DH Group] Select the Die-Hellman group, which determines the key strength.
Using [Pre-Shared Key Method] for authentication
1Select [Pre-Shared Key Method] for [AUTH Method] and click [Shared Key Settings].
2Enter alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key and click [OK].
Security
255
Using [Digital Signature Method] for authentication
1Select [Digital Signature Method] for [AUTH Method] and click [Key and Certicate].
2Select the key pair you want to use, and click [Default Key Settings].
Viewing details of a key pair or certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 280)
9Specify the IPSec Network Settings.
[Use PFS]
Select the check box to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) for IPSec session keys. Enabling PFS enhances
the security while increasing the load on the communication. Make sure that PFS is also enabled for the other
devices. When not using PFS, clear the check box.
[Validity]
Security
256
Specify how long SA is used as a communication tunnel. Select the [Specify by Time] or [Specify by Size] check
box or both check boxes as necessary. If both check boxes are selected, the IPSec SA session is terminated
when either of the conditions has been satised.
[Specify by Time] Enter a time in minutes to specify how long a session lasts. The entered time is applied
to both IPSec SA and IKE SA.
[Specify by Size] Enter a size in megabytes to specify how much data can be transported in a session.
The entered size is applied to IPSec SA only.
If you have selected the [Specify by Size] check box only
●The IKE SA validity cannot be specied by size, so that the initial value (480 minutes) of [Specify by Time] is
applied.
[Authentication/Encryption Algorithm]
Select the protocol and algorithm to use for IPSec communication.
Automatically setting up connection
Select [Auto].
[ESP Authentication] ESP is enabled and the authentication algorithm is set to [SHA1 and MD5].
[ESP Encryption] ESP is enabled and the encryption algorithm is set to [3DES-CBC and AES-CBC].
Using ESP
Choose [ESP] and select the authentication algorithm and encryption algorithm.
[ESP Authentication] Select the hash algorithm to use for ESP authentication.
[ESP Encryption] Select the encryption algorithm for ESP.
Using AH
Choose [AH], and select the hash algorithm to use for AH authentication from [AH Authentication].
[Connection Mode]
The connection mode of IPSec is displayed. The machine supports transport mode, in which the payloads of
IP packets are encrypted. Tunnel mode, in which whole IP packets (headers and payloads) are encapsulated
is not available.
10 Click [OK].
●If you need to register an additional security policy, return to step 5.
11 Arrange the order of policies listed under [IPSec Policy List].
●Policies are applied from one at the highest position to the lowest. Click [Raise Priority] or [Lower Priority] to
move a policy up or down the order.
Security
257
Editing a policy
●You can click the text link under [Policy Name] to edit the settings.
Deleting a policy
●Click [Delete] on the right of the policy that you want to delete.
12 Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after a hard reset is performed.
Enabling IPSec Communication
After completion of registering security policies, enable the IPSec communication.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
258
3Click [Security] [IPSec Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Select the [Use IPSec] check box and click [OK].
Security
259
[Use IPSec]
When using IPSec in the machine, select the check box. When not using, clear the check box.
[Allow Receive Non-Policy Packets]
If you select the check box when using IPSec, packets that are not available for the registered policies are
also sent/received. To disable sending/receiving the packets that are not available for the policies, clear the
check box.
6Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IPSec communication from the setting menu of the operation panel.
IPSec(P. 336)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 267)
IPSec Policy List(P. 403)
Security
260
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
51W4-04K
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key pair or CA certicate
before conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 277) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. A
key pair issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the
machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a
CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certicate for
the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with
PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Using
TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246) ).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MS-CHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable
TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Using TLS for Encrypted
Communications(P. 246) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
261
3Click [Network] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, enter the login name in the [Login Name] text
box, and specify the required settings.
Security
262
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
Setting TLS
1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].
●You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.
2Select a key from the list of keys and certicates, and click [Default Key Settings].
Viewing details of a key pair or certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 280)
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Security
263
Internal protocol for TTLS
●You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP. If you want to use PAP, click the [PAP] radio button.
2Click [Change User Name/Password].
●To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3Set the user name/password and click [OK].
Security
264
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new
password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.
6Click [OK].
7Perform a hard reset.
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Security
265
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates
51W4-04L
In order to encrypt communication with a remote device, an encryption key must be sent and received over an
unsecured network beforehand. This problem is solved by public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography ensures
secure communication by protecting important and valuable information from attacks, such as sning, spoong, and
tampering of data as it ows over a network.
Key Pair
A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key, both of which are required for encrypting or
decrypting data. Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be
returned to its original data form without the other, public-key cryptography ensures secure
communication of data over the network. Up to eight key pairs, including the preinstalled pairs,
can be registered ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 277) ). For TLS
encrypted communication, a key pair can be generated for the machine ( Generating Key
Pairs(P. 268) ).
CA Certicate
Digital certicates including CA certicates are similar to other forms of identication, such as
driver's licenses. A digital certicate contains a digital signature, which enables the machine to
detect any spoong or tampering of data. It is extremely dicult for third parties to abuse
digital certicates. A digital certicate that contains a public key of a certication authority (CA)
is referred to as a CA certicate. CA certicates are used for verifying the device the machine is
communicating with for features such as printing with Google Cloud Print or IEEE 802.1X
authentication. Up to 150 CA certicates can be registered, including the 72 certicates that are
preinstalled in the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 277) ).
Security
267
Generating Key Pairs
51W4-04R
A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Transport Layer
Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI or performing IPP Print. Up to eight key
pairs, including the preinstalled pairs, can be registered. Self-signed certicates are used with key pairs generated in
"Network Communication". With a "Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)", you can apply for a CA-issued digital
certicate for the key pair generated by the machine.
Generate Network Communication Key(P. 268)
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 271)
Generate Network Communication Key
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings].
Security
268
4Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "TLS" or "IEEE 802.1X",
is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
5Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
Security
269
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later
in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA or ECDSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger
the number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
●[512 bit] cannot be selected for the key length of RSA, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for
[Signature Algorithm].
[Certicate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (dd/mm yyyy)]
Enter the validity start date of the certicate.
[Validity End Date (dd/mm yyyy)]
Enter the validity end date of the certicate. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date (dd/mm yyyy)]
cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Enter characters for the Internet country code.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
Security
270
To perform IPPS Print, the "IP address" or "<host name>.<domain name>" that is used for
connection via IPPS must be entered in [Common Name].
●Enter the "IP address" when it is xed.
●Enter "<host name>.<domain name>" when the DNS server is used. Enabling IPP/
IPPS(P. 155)
7Click [OK].
●Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
●After a key pair is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings].
Security
271
4Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "TLS" or "IEEE 802.1X",
is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before deleting it.
5Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
Security
272
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later
in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA or ECDSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger
the number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
●[512 bit] cannot be selected for the key length of RSA, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for
[Signature Algorithm].
[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Enter characters for the Internet country code.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
To perform IPPS Print, the "IP address" or "<host name>.<domain name>" that is used for
connection via IPPS must be entered in [Common Name].
●Enter the "IP address" when it is xed.
●Enter "<host name>.<domain name>" when the DNS server is used. Enabling IPP/
IPPS(P. 155)
Security
273
7Click [OK].
●Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
8Click [Store in File].
●A dialog box for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].
➠The Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) le is stored on the computer.
9Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority.
◼Register the digital certicate issued by the certication authority.
You cannot use the key pair generated by the Certicate Signing Request (CSR) until the certicate is registered. Once
the certication authority has issued the digital certicate, register it using the procedure below.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] for the certicate to be registered.
Security
274
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
51W4-04S
Key pairs and digital certicates can be obtained from a certication authority (CA) for use with the machine. You can
store and then register these les by using the Remote UI. Make sure that the key pair and the certicate satisfy the
requirements of the machine ( Registration of Keys and Certicates(P. 480) ). Up to 8 key pairs (including the
preinstalled ones) can be registered, and up to 150 CA certicates (including the 72 preinstalled ones) can be
registered.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to install a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA certicate.
Security
277
4Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].
Deleting a registered key pair or CA certicate
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair or CA certicate you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE
802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before
deleting it. The preinstalled CA certicate cannot be deleted.
5Click [Install].
Deleting a key pair or CA certicate
●Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete, and then click [OK].
6Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].
Security
278
●The key pair or CA certicate is installed in the machine.
7Register the key pair or CA certicate.
Registering a key pair
1Click [Register] on the right of the key pair you want to register.
2Enter the name of the key pair and password, and then click [OK].
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered.
[Password]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be registered.
Registering a CA certicate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate you want to register.
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 268)
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 280)
Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246)
Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 251)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 261)
Security
279
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
51W4-04U
Once key pairs and CA certicates are registered, you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity
and signature.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to verify a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to verify a CA certicate.
4Click the icon for the key pair or certicate that you want to verify.
Security
280
Using Remote UI
Using Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................. 283
Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 284
Remote UI Screens ............................................................................................................................................ 287
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status .............................................................................. 293
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents .................................................................................................. 298
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ...................................................................................................... 301
Saving/Loading Registered Data ...................................................................................................................... 303
Saving Registered Data ................................................................................................................................ 304
Loading Registered Data .............................................................................................................................. 306
Using Remote UI
282
Using Remote UI
51W4-04W
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make some settings for the machine. You can do this without leaving your desk,
making system management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see
System Environment(P. 483) .
Functions of the Remote UI
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 293)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 301)
Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 303)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
Remote UI Screens(P. 287)
Using Remote UI
283
Starting Remote UI
51W4-04X
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 403) ). If you have any questions, ask
your Network Administrator.
1Start the Web browser.
2Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address eld, and press the
[ENTER] key.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If using a DNS server
●You can enter "<host name of the machine>.<domain name>" instead of "IP address of the machine"
(example: http://my_printer.example.com).
If a security alert is displayed
●A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Using TLS for
Encrypted Communications(P. 246) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue
browsing the Web site.
3Log on to the Remote UI.
When the Department ID Management is disabled
Select [Management Mode] or [General User Mode].
[Management Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the System Manager password in
[Password].
Using Remote UI
284
●The default System Manager password is "7654321." Setting the System Manager
Password(P. 205)
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. If
you wish to delete your print documents, enter the user name of the documents in [User Name]. The user
name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or
computer logon name.
About [User Name]
●By default, [User Name] is not displayed to disable general users to operate documents. If you want to
operate documents in General User Mode, log on in Management Mode and enable [Allow General
User Job Operation]. Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 298)
[Remote UI Access PIN]
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is displayed, enter the PIN ( Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 215) ).
When the Department ID Management is enabled
Enter the appropriate ID in [Department ID] and PIN in [PIN] ( Setting the Department ID
Management(P. 208) ).
4Click [Log In].
➠Portal Page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screens(P. 287)
Using Remote UI
285
Using Remote UI
286
Remote UI Screens
51W4-04Y
This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI.
Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 287)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page(P. 288)
[Settings/Registration] Page(P. 289)
[Box] Page(P. 290)
[Direct Print] Page(P. 291)
Portal Page (Main Page)
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [Management Settings] under
[Security].
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Device Basic Information
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
Using Remote UI
287
Consumables Information
Displays information about paper (remaining amount, size, etc.) and the status of toner cartridges.
[Message Board]
Displays a message from the System Manager specied in [Message Board/Support Link] under [Settings/
Registration] [License/Other]. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 301)
Support Link
Displays a text link to the support information of the machine specied in [Message Board/Support Link]
under [Settings/Registration] [License/Other]. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 301)
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. You can use this page to check the current printing status, cancel
print processing, and view a history of print jobs.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged on in Management Mode, you can change the
settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 301)
[Box] (only when an optional SD card is installed)
Displays the [Box] page. You can print and delete documents stored in the machine. Printing a Document
Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 92)
[Direct Print]
You can print a le stored in a computer without opening it. Printing without Opening a File (Direct
Print)(P. 101)
[Service Management Service]
Starts Service Management Service (SMS) used to manage MEAP applications (function-enhancing software).
Function Guide for MEAP Application Management
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page
Using Remote UI
288
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, and the content is displayed in the right page. Managing Documents and Checking the
Machine Status(P. 293)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
[Settings/Registration] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, the content is displayed in the right page. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote
UI(P. 301)
Using Remote UI
289
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Menu on the [Settings/Registration] page
●You can change settings on the [Settings/Registration] page only when you have logged on in
Management Mode.
●If you log on in General User Mode, [Utility Menu], [Device Control], [Department ID Management],
and [Import/Export] are not displayed.
[Box] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
[Box]
Displays a list of boxes. You can open a box to check detailed information of the documents stored in the
box, print and delete the documents. Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)
(P. 92)
Using Remote UI
290
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Box Number
You can enter a box number and click [Open] to open the box of the entered number.
Box List
You can click the text link under [Box Number] to open the applicable box.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
[Direct Print] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Displays the page for specifying the le format of a le to be printed by Direct Print. Printing without
Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 101)
Using Remote UI
291
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Using Remote UI
292
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine
Status
51W4-050
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 293)
Checking History of Documents(P. 294)
Checking Error Information(P. 295)
Checking Device Specications(P. 295)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 296)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 297)
Checking Toner Cartridge Usage Logs(P. 297)
●A le name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the
le name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
You can check the print status (currently being printed or waiting to be printed) of the documents designated to be
printed from a computer, and delete or interrupt documents.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
[Cancel]
You can delete documents that are being printed or waiting to be printed.
[Interrupt] *
Temporarily stops the current print job in progress and starts a specied print job. For the interrupted print
job, printing of the remaining pages is started as soon as the interrupting print job is nished.
[Priority Print] *
Moves up the print order of a document waiting to be printed by one.
Using Remote UI
293
[Pause] */[Resume] *
Press [Pause] to temporarily stop the current print job. Press [Resume] to restart the paused print job.
●For a secured or encrypted secured document, clicking [Resume] displays a screen to prompt you to enter
the PIN. Enter the correct PIN and click [OK].
*Not displayed when <Interrupt Print> is set to <Off> in the setting menu of the operation panel ( Interrupt
Print(P. 319) ).
●The status of all print jobs is displayed regardless of the settings of the Department ID Management.
●The factory default settings prevent some operations, such as deleting a document to print or
interrupting a print job, from being performed in General User Mode. If you want to operate
documents in General User Mode, log on in Management Mode and enable [Allow General User Job
Operation]. Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 298)
●If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
●Click [Job No.] on the paused documents and secure documents to display detailed information. You
can check the user name and the page count of the printed document.
Checking History of Documents
The print history and e-mail reception history are displayed in list form.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]
[Job Log] (Print)
Print history can be displayed for each type of print. Maximum Number of Job Logs That Can Be
Displayed(P. 480)
[Job Log] (E-Mail RX)
The e-mail reception history is displayed. If an error occurs during e-mail reception, the applicable error code
is displayed in [RX Results]. E-Mail Reception Error Codes(P. 480)
Using Remote UI
294
[Display] (print history only)
When you select the print type from the drop-down list and click [Display], the history of the selected print
type is displayed in list form.
●If any optional SD card is not installed on the machine, the history is erased when a shutdown or hard reset
is performed.
●If you log into the machine in General User Mode when [Allow General User Job Operation] is active, the
document name for jobs other than yours is not shown but instead asterisks are shown, like "********".
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents(P. 298)
Checking Error Information
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on
Portal Page (main page). Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 287)
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error
Information]
Checking Device Specications
You can view the information including the maximum print speed and features of the machine.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Features]
Using Remote UI
295
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is what has been set in
[Security] [Management Settings] on the [Settings/Registration] page ( Setting the System Manager
Password(P. 205) ).
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Information]
Using Remote UI
296
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check
Counter]
Checking Toner Cartridge Usage Logs
You can check logs of usage of toner cartridge.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 284) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Cartridge
Log]
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 287)
Using Remote UI
297
Enabling End Users to Operate Documents
51W4-051
You can congure settings so that you can delete or interrupt the documents even when you log on to the Remote UI
in General User Mode.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security] [Management Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Using Remote UI
298
5Enter the System Manager password in [Current System Manager Password].
6Select the [Allow General User Job Operation] check box and click [OK].
[Allow General User Job Operation]
If you select the check box, general users will be able to operate the documents of which the user name
matches the one that was used to log on. When you do not want to allow general users to operate
documents, clear the check box.
Using Remote UI
299
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
51W4-052
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click the menu item you want to set, and click [Edit].
●For more information about the settings menu, see each item below
Menu items Referents
Preferences
Control Menu Control Menu(P. 311)
Paper Source Settings Select Feeder Menu(P. 410)
Network Network(P. 326)
Using Remote UI
301
Menu items Referents
Layout Layout(P. 347)
Print Quality Print Quality(P. 351)
User Maintenance User Maintenance(P. 358)
Output/Control
Utility Menu Printing Reports and Lists(P. 441)
Job Menu(P. 406)
Device Control You can control the status of the machine.
Online key(P. 26)
Soft Reset(P. 408)
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
Management Settings
Department ID Management Setting the Department ID Management(P. 208)
Security Security(P. 200)
Import/Export Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 303)
License/Other ●You can change messages shown on the message board and the link to the
support page that are displayed on the Portal Page (main page).
●You can register or update software ( Function Guide for Software
Registration and Update ).
●You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 287)
Setting Menu List(P. 309)
Using Remote UI
302
Saving/Loading Registered Data
51W4-053
Menu options data that has been registered in the machine can be saved in your computer (export). Data that is saved
on your computer can also be registered in the machine (import). Data exported from this machine can be imported to
another machine of the same model. So you can easily copy a variety of settings data to multiple machines. To use
these features, it is required that you have logged on in Management Mode.
Saving Registered Data(P. 304)
Loading Registered Data(P. 306)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the export/import process is complete
●It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the export/import process
●Before exporting/importing, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently processing.
Import/export using the operation panel
●You can also save/load settings data via a USB memory device by using the operation panel of the machine.
Import/Export Set.(P. 368)
Using Remote UI
303
Saving Registered Data
51W4-054
You can export machine settings data and save them in your computer. It is recommended that you regularly back up
important settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Export].
4Select the settings to export, and set the encryption password.
Using Remote UI
304
[Settings/Registration Basic Information]
To export the settings data of items that can be set from [Settings/Registration] in the Portal Page, select the
check boxes for those items.
[MEAP Application Setting Information]
To export the settings data of MEAP applications, select this check box.
[All PDL Setting Information]
To export the settings data of items that can be set from Settings Specic to Print Mode(P. 373) , select
this check box.
[Encryption Password]
Enter the password to encrypt data to be exported using characters. Enter the same password in [Conrm]. If
no password is set, data exporting is impossible.
●The password is required when exported data is imported. Loading Registered Data(P. 306)
5Click [Start Exporting].
6Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where the exported setting
data is saved.
➠The setting data will be saved.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 287)
Setting Menu List(P. 309)
Using Remote UI
305
Loading Registered Data
51W4-055
Load (import) data that was exported from the machine. You can also import settings from another machine if it is the
same model as your machine.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Import].
4Specify the setting le to be imported, and enter the password.
Using Remote UI
306
[File Path]
Click [Browse] and select the le.
[Decryption Password]
Enter the password set when the settings were exported.
5Click [Start Importing].
6Click [OK].
➠The specied setting data will be imported into the machine.
7Click [Restart].
➠The settings are enabled after the machine is restarted.
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 287)
Setting Menu List(P. 309)
Using Remote UI
307
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 309
Setup Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 310
Control Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 311
Paper Source ................................................................................................................................................ 325
Network ....................................................................................................................................................... 326
Layout .......................................................................................................................................................... 347
Print Quality ................................................................................................................................................. 351
Interface ....................................................................................................................................................... 355
User Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 358
Print Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 371
Settings Specic to Print Mode ..................................................................................................................... 373
UFR II ..................................................................................................................................................... 374
PCL ........................................................................................................................................................ 375
Imaging ................................................................................................................................................. 381
XPS ........................................................................................................................................................ 387
PDF ........................................................................................................................................................ 391
PS .......................................................................................................................................................... 395
MEAP Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 398
Check Counter .............................................................................................................................................. 400
Initialize Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 401
Utility Menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 402
Job Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 406
Reset Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 408
Select Feeder Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 410
Setting Menu List
308
Setting Menu List
51W4-056
There are various settings in this machine. You can adjust each of the settings in detail. Specify the settings from the
menu screens of the operation panel.
NOTE
Priority of settings
●Settings that are specied on the printer driver will
override those specied on the operation panel.
●When you perform USB Direct Print or Direct Print, the
settings specied for printing or stored in TIFF data
override those specied on the operation panel.
●You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
Conguration Page(P. 402)
Network Status Print(P. 403)
Setting Menu List
309
Setup Menu
51W4-057
You can specify the settings for the operation environment of the machine and for
printing. When you press ( ) on the operation panel, the Setup menu
appears to show the setting items under each function item.
Control Menu(P. 311)
Paper Source(P. 325)
Network(P. 326)
Layout(P. 347)
Print Quality(P. 351)
Interface(P. 355)
User Maintenance(P. 358)
Print Mode(P. 371)
Settings Specic to Print Mode(P. 373)
MEAP Settings(P. 398)
Check Counter(P. 400)
Initialize Menu(P. 401)
Setting Menu List
310
Control Menu
51W4-058
The settings about the sleep mode and how the machine should behave if an error
occurs are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
().
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Sleep Mode(P. 311)
Sleep Even if Error(P. 312)
Deep Sleep Eco Prior(P. 312)
Auto Sleep Time(P. 312)
Sleep When Using USB(P. 312)
Timer Settings(P. 313)
Auto Skip Error(P. 314)
Language(P. 314)
Alarm(P. 315)
Show Warnings(P. 315)
Action When Warning(P. 316)
Date/Time Settings(P. 316)
Main Pwr Quick Start(P. 318)
SD Card(P. 318)
Interrupt Print(P. 319)
Sec. Print Del. Time(P. 319)
Secure Job Log(P. 319)
USB-Connected PC OS(P. 320)
PDL Selection (PnP)(P. 320)
Mng. Settings(P. 320)
RMT-SW(P. 321)
Adjust Screen(P. 321)
Animated Instruction(P. 322)
Show Toner Gauge(P. 322)
Set. Comp. Notify(P. 323)
Check Paper Settings(P. 323)
Scrolling Speed(P. 323)
Canon Genuine Mode(P. 324)
Sleep Mode
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by temporarily stopping some
internal operations. Specify the sleep mode level. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
High (Deep Sleep)
Mid (Printer Sleep)
Sleep mode levels
●The energy consumption reduction effect is smaller with <Mid (Printer Sleep)> and greater with <High (Deep
Sleep)>.
When you are using utility software related to network
●If you set sleep mode to <High (Deep Sleep)>, the utility software may fail in communication.
Setting Menu List
311
Sleep Even if Error
Select whether to automatically enter sleep mode when an error occurs.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep Even if Error> <Off> or <On>
Deep Sleep Eco Prior
Select whether to further reduce power consumption when the machine and the computer are connected via USB.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Deep Sleep Eco Prior> <Off> or <On>
●It may be possible that when you do an operation to perform printing with this item set to <On>, the
machine does not exit the sleep mode. In that case, press to exit the sleep mode.
Auto Sleep Time
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to print for a specied period of time, it enters sleep mode to
save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed. We recommend
using the factory default settings to save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
5 min.
10 min.
15 min.
30 min.
60 min.
Sleep When Using USB *
Select whether to allow the machine to enter sleep mode when you are using USB over NW to access a USB device
from a computer via a network. Adv. Func. Settings(P. 355)
Do Not Allow
Setting Menu List
312
Allow
( ) <Control Menu> <Sleep When Using USB> <Do Not Allow> or
<Allow>
Timer Settings
You can specify the settings for the machine operations and time regarding Sleep Mode and for the Auto Reset
function that displays the main screen if any key is not pressed for a specied period of time.
Wake Up Timer
Select whether to automatically exit sleep mode at a specied time. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
Off
On
Wake Up Time
Set the time to exit sleep mode if <Wake Up Timer> is set to <On>. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59
Auto Reset Time
If any key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the current menu screen automatically returns to the
main screen and the machine returns to the online mode (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto
Reset is performed. Select <Off> to disable the Auto Reset function.
Off
10 sec.
20 sec.
30 sec.
40 sec.
50 sec.
1 min.
2 min.
3 min.
4 min.
5 min.
6 min.
7 min.
8 min.
9 min.
( ) <Control Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Reset
Time> Select the time
Setting Menu List
313
Sleep Timer
Select whether to automatically enter sleep mode at a specied time. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
Off
On
Sleep Time
Set the time to enter sleep mode if <Sleep Timer> is set to <On>. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
00:00 to 12:00 to 23:59
Auto Skip Error
If an error occurs during printing, the printing is stopped. When you want to continue printing even if an error occurs,
specify <On>. For the errors during which the current print job is allowed to continue by this setting, see
"Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Auto Skip Error> <Off> or <On>
Language
You can change the language displayed on the operation panel screen, login screen of the remote UI, and the setting
lists.
Čeština
Dansk
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Italiano
Magyar
Nederlands
Norsk
Polski
Português
Русский
Suomi
Svenska
Türkçe
中文(简体)
한국어
Setting Menu List
314
( ) <Control Menu> <Language> Select the language
Alarm
Select whether the machine beeps when a problem such as a paper jam or an operation mistake occurs.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Alarm> <Off> or <On>
Show Warnings
Select whether to inform about warnings by messages when the machine has entered the warning state.
Chk/Chg. Toner Cart.
Select whether to display an applicable message when the replacement time for the toner cartridge is near.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Chk/Chg. Toner
Cart.> <Off> or <On>
Drawer Empty
Select whether to display an applicable message when the paper drawer runs out of paper.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <Drawer Empty> <Off>
or <On>
Setting Menu List
315
E-Mail Trans. Error
Select whether to display an applicable message when a communication error occurs during E-Mail Print.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Warnings> <E-Mail Trans.
Error> <Off> or <On>
Action When Warning
Specify how the machine should behave when a toner cartridge lifetime message appears.
Chk/Chg. Toner Cart.
Select whether to automatically stop printing when the toner cartridge will soon reach the end of its lifetime.
Continue Printing
Stop Printing
( ) <Control Menu> <Action When Warning> <Chk/Chg. Toner
Cart.> <Continue Printing> or <Stop Printing>
<Continue Printing>
When the time for toner cartridge replacement is near, the <16 Tnr cart. will soon reach end of lifetime.>
message is displayed, but the printing is continued.
<Stop Printing>
When the time for toner cartridge replacement is near, the <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime. >
message is displayed, and the printing is temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press
( ).
Date/Time Settings
Set the current date and time.
Setting Menu List
316
Date
Set the current date in the order of Year, Month, and Day. Use / to move the cursor, and use the
numeric keys to specify the date.
01/01 2001 to 31/12 2030
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Date> Set the
date
Time (24 hour)
Specify the current time on a 24-hour basis. Use / to move the cursor, and use the numeric keys to
specify the time.
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Time (24
hour)> Set the time
Daylight Savings
Specify settings for daylight saving time.
DST Settings
Species whether to set the daylight saving time.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight
Savings> Check the message <DST Settings> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard Reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Start Date/Time
Species the start date and time of daylight saving time.
Month
Week
Day
Time (24 hour)
Setting Menu List
317
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight
Savings> Check the message <Start Date/Time> Set the date and
time Perform a hard Reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
End Date/Time
Species the end date and time of daylight saving time.
Month
Week
Day
Time (24 hour)
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight
Savings> Check the message <End Date/Time> Set the date and
time Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Time Zone
Species the time zone according to the region where the machine is being used.
GMT-12:00 to GMT 00:00 to GMT+12:00
( ) <Control Menu> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone>
Check the message Set the time zone Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Main Pwr Quick Start
If you specify the quick startup settings, you can reduce the time from when the power switch is pressed until the
screens become operable. Performing a Quick Start of the Machine(P. 37)
Off
On
SD Card *
Enable or disable the SD card.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
318
( ) <Control Menu> <SD Card> Check the message <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Interrupt Print *
Select whether to allow use of the Interrupt Print function.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Interrupt Print> <Off> or <On>
Sec. Print Del. Time *
Set the time until secured documents stored in the machine are automatically deleted. Changing the Valid Time
Period for Secured Documents(P. 90)
1 hr.
2 hr.
3 hr.
6 hr.
12 hr.
24 hr.
Secure Job Log *
Depending on the timing of shutdown, a print log may not be generated and the total number of printed pages may
not be counted. If you set this function to <On>, print log generation and total printed page counting are surely
performed. However, the print speed will be slower.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Secure Job Log> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
Setting Menu List
319
USB-Connected PC OS
Select the OS of the PC connecting to the machine via USB.
Mac OS
Windows
Other
●Be sure to match the machine settings to the OS of the PC. If not matched, the PC will not correctly
recognize the machine.
●If the OS of your computer is OS X 10.10 or earlier and if you want to print from a printer driver via
USB, set this item to <Other>.
( ) <Control Menu> <USB-Connected PC OS> Check the
message Select the OS of the computer to connect to the machine Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
PDL Selection (PnP)
Specify a printer driver to be installed when the machine is connected to a computer via USB or it is searched over the
WSD network.
UFR II
UFR II (V4)
PCL6
PCL6 (V4)
PS3
XPS (Direct)
( ) <Control Menu> <PDL Selection (PnP)> Check the message
Select the page description language Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Mng. Settings
Select whether to restrict the use of the ( ) key on the operation panel to prevent any settings from being
changed carelessly.
Setting Menu List
320
Settings Key Lock
If you select <On>, the Setup menu is not operable even if ( ) is pressed.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Mng. Settings> <Settings Key
Lock> Check the message <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the Settings key can be unlocked from the Remote UI only. Restricting
Operation Panel Functions(P. 237)
RMT-SW
Use this machine leaving this item set to <Off>. You may be asked to change the setting to <On> to allow for remote
maintenance on your machine by a Canon service representative.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <RMT-SW> <Off> or <On>
Adjust Screen
You can adjust the contrast and brightness of the display.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast (difference in brightness between light and dark areas) of the display to suit the installation
location of the machine.
-3 to 0 to +3
( ) <Control Menu> <Adjust Screen> <Contrast> Use /
to adjust the contrast
Setting Menu List
321
Adjusting the contrast
Set a "+" value to brighten the screen. Set a "-" value to darken the screen.
Backlight Brightness
Adjust the backlight brightness of the display by selecting from three levels. Select <Off> to disable the
backlight.
Off
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
( ) <Control Menu> <Adjust Screen> <Backlight
Brightness> Select the brightness level
Animated Instruction
Select whether to show animated instructions on the display when a paper jam occurs or when you replace toner
cartridges.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Animated Instruction> <Off> or <On>
Show Toner Gauge
Select whether to display the toner cartridge status indicator icon in the lower right of the display.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Show Toner Gauge> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
322
Set. Comp. Notify
Specify how long a message that appears when a setting is changed is displayed in
seconds. If you select <Off>, the message will no longer be displayed.
Off
1 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
( ) <Control Menu> <Set. Comp. Notify> Select the number of
seconds
Check Paper Settings
Select whether to display a message prompting you to check the paper settings when you set a paper drawer.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Check Paper Settings> <Off> or <On>
Scrolling Speed
Adjust the speed for scrolling characters from the right to the left on the display by selecting from three levels.
Slow
Normal
Fast
( ) <Control Menu> <Scrolling Speed> Select the speed
Setting Menu List
323
Canon Genuine Mode
The mode for when Canon genuine toner cartridges are used.
Off
On
( ) <Control Menu> <Canon Genuine Mode> <Off> or <On>
●When necessary, the service representative may change the setting. If this item is not displayed, contact the
administrator of the machine.
Setting Menu List
324
Network
51W4-05A
All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions. Default settings
are marked with a dagger ( ).
If <Network> is not displayed
●If <Network> under <Interface Selection> is set to <Off>, <Network> is not displayed in the Setup menu.
Interface Selection(P. 355)
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
TCP/IP Settings(P. 326)
Mopria(P. 337)
Google Cloud Print(P. 338)
SMB(P. 338)
SNMP Settings(P. 339)
Spooler(P. 340)
Receive in Parallel(P. 341)
Wait Time at Startup(P. 341)
Remote UI Settings(P. 341)
Software Regist/Updt(P. 342)
Ethernet Driver(P. 342)
Sleep Mode Priority(P. 343)
IEEE802.1X(P. 343)
Address Filter(P. 344)
MAC Address(P. 344)
E-Mail Print Set.(P. 344)
Monitoring Service(P. 345)
Init. Network Set.(P. 346)
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
IPv4 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
IPv4
Enable or disable IPv4 in the machine.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <IPv4> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Setting Menu List
326
IP Mode
Select how to set the IP address. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 140)
Auto
Manual
Protocol *
Select the protocol to use when <IP Mode> is set to <Auto>. If you set the selected protocol to <On>, the
other two protocols are automatically set to <Off>. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 140)
Use DHCP
Off
On
Use BOOTP
Off
On
Use RARP
Off
On
Auto IP *
Select whether to automatically obtain an IP address. Specify <On> when <IP Mode> is set to <Auto>.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 140)
Off
On
IP Address Settings
Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP
network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 140)
IP Address
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
DNS
Specify settings for the server address of the Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP
address resolutions. Use / to move the cursor, and use the numeric keys to specify the address. Use
the Remote UI to specify other settings for DNS. Conguring DNS(P. 172)
Primary Address
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
Secondary Address
Setting Menu List
327
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <DNS> Select the server to congure Set the
address Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
mDNS Settings *
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 172)
mDNS
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
mDNS Name *
When <mDNS> is set to <On>, set this item.
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS Name> Set the
name Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
DHCP Option
When DHCP is enabled, select whether to acquire the host name and whether to perform dynamic update of
the DNS using the DHCP options.
Acquire Host Name
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update
Off
On
Setting Menu List
328
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4
Settings> <DHCP Option> <Acquire Host Name> or <DNS Dynamic
Update> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
IPv6 Settings
Select whether to use the machine in an IPv6 network. Use the Remote UI to specify the IPv6 address settings.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 144)
IPv6
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <IPv6> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
mDNS Settings *
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 172)
mDNS
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Use IPv4 Name (mDNS) *
Off
On
Setting Menu List
329
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <Use IPv4 Name (mDNS)> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
mDNS Name *
When <Use IPv4 Name (mDNS)> is set to <Off>, set this item.
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv6
Settings> <mDNS Settings> <mDNS Name> Set the
name Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
WINS Resolution
Select whether to use Windows Internet Name Service (WINS), which provides a NetBIOS name for IP address
resolutions in a mixed network environment of NetBIOS and TCP/IP. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed
settings that are applied when WINS is enabled. Conguring WINS(P. 178)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <WINS
Resolution> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
FTP
Select whether to change the settings for printing and those congured in the machine from FTP.
FTP Print
Select whether to print from FTP. Use the Remote UI to set the user name and password that are used to
print from FTP. Preparing for Using the FTP Server(P. 509)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <FTP> <FTP Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard
reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Setting Menu List
330
Allow Set. via FTP
Select whether to change the settings congured in the machine from FTP.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <FTP> <Allow Set. via FTP> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
LPD Settings
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system. Also,
set the time period after which the print job automatically ends when print data cannot be received due to a
communication error or some other problem. Use the Remote UI to specify settings for banner page printing
when LPD is enabled. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 149)
LPD Print
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <LPD
Settings> <LPD Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
RX Timeout *
1 to 60 (min.)
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <LPD
Settings> <RX Timeout> Set Timeout Time Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
RAW Settings
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing protocol. Also, set the time period after which the print job
automatically ends when print data cannot be received due to a communication error or some other problem.
Use the Remote UI to specify settings for bidirectional communication. Conguring Printing Protocols and
WSD Functions(P. 149)
RAW Print
Off
Setting Menu List
331
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <RAW
Settings> <RAW Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
RX Timeout *
1 to 60 (min.)
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <RAW
Settings> <RX Timeout> Set Timeout Time Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
IPP Print
Enable or disable IPP, which enables printing from an external network via Internet. Use the Remote UI to
specify settings for TLS encryption of data to send and user authentication. Conguring Printing Protocols
and WSD Functions(P. 149)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <IPP
Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
WSD
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the machine by using the WSD protocol.
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 149)
WSD Print
Select whether to print with the machine by using WSD.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
332
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <WSD> <WSD Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard
reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
WSD Browsing *
Select whether to acquire information of the machine from a computer by using WSD. If <WSD Print> is set to
<On>, <WSD Browsing> is xed to <On> and is not displayed in the setting menu.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <WSD> <WSD Browsing> <Off> or <On> Perform a
hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Multicast Discovery
Select whether to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <WSD> <Multicast Discovery> <Off> or <On> Perform
a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
●If <Multicast Discovery> is set to <Off>, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast
discovery messages are owing on the network.
HTTP
Enable or disable HTTP. HTTP is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI and performing WSD printing. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 240)
Off
On
Proxy Settings
Specify settings for using the proxy server that relays HTTP communications. Setting a Proxy(P. 226)
Setting Menu List
333
Proxy
Enable or disable the proxy server when the machine performs HTTP communications.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Proxy> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Server Address *
Set the address of the proxy server to use. Specify the IP address, domain name, and other necessary
information that suit your operational environment. Use / to move the cursor, and use the numeric
keys to enter the address ( Entering Text(P. 33) ).
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Server Address> Enter the server address Perform a hard
reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Port Number *
Specify the port number of the proxy server to use.
1 to 80 to 65535
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Port Number> Enter the port number Perform a hard reset
( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Same Domain *
Enable or disable the proxy server even for performing HTTP communications with devices in the same
domain.
Use Proxy
Do Not Use Proxy
Setting Menu List
334
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Same Domain> <Use Proxy> or <Do Not Use Proxy> Perform
a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Proxy Authentication *
Enable or disable the authentication function of the proxy server.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Proxy Authentication> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset
( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
User Name *
To enable the proxy authentication, enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name to
authenticate. Use the numeric keys to enter the user name. ( Entering Text(P. 33) )
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <User Name> Enter the user name Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Password *
To set the password for the proxy authentication, enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters. Use the numeric
keys to enter the password. ( Entering Text(P. 33) )
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Proxy
Settings> <Password> Enter the password Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
SNTP
Select whether to acquire time from a network time server. Use the Remote UI to specify the server address
settings. Conguring SNTP(P. 181)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
335
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <SNTP> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Discovery Response
Select whether to set the machine to respond to multicast discovery packets on the network. Use the Remote UI
to specify the scope name that is used to include the machine into a specic scope. Conguring Settings for
Device Management Software(P. 190)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <Discovery Response> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
IPSec
Select whether to perform encrypted communication by establishing a virtual private network (VPN) via IPSec.
Use the Remote UI to register and specify the security policies. Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 251)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP
Settings> <IPSec> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Sleep Notif. Set.
Specify settings for SLP communication to notify imageWARE of the power status of the machine. If you set
<Sleep Mode Notif.> to <On>, you can expect the machine to avoid unnecessary communication during sleep
mode and reduce the total power consumption. Conguring Settings for Device Management
Software(P. 190)
Sleep Mode Notif.
Enable or disable SLP communication. If you select <On>, the power status of the machine is notied to
imageWARE.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
336
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Sleep Mode Notif.> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Port Number *
Enter the port number for SLP communications with management software.
1 to 11427 to 65535
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Port Number> Use the numeric keys to enter the port
number Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Routers to Traverse *
Specify how many routers the notication packets can pass.
0 to 3 to 254
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Routers to Traverse> Use the numeric keys to enter the number of
routers to traverse Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Notif. Interval *
Specify how often the machine noties imageWARE of its power status.
60 to 600 to 65535
( ) <Network> Check the message <TCP/IP Settings> <Sleep
Notif. Set.> <Notif. Interval> Use the numeric keys to enter the notication
interval Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Mopria
Select whether to use Mopria®. Printing by Mopria®(P. 120)
Setting Menu List
337
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Mopria> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Google Cloud Print
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 128)
Use Cloud Print
Off
On
Registration Status
SMB *
Select whether to use the machine as a shared printer on the SMB network. Use the Remote UI to specify other SMB
settings including the server name and the workgroup name. Conguring SMB(P. 194)
SMB Server
Select whether to display the machine as an SMB Server on the SMB network conguration screen.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SMB> <SMB
Server> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
SMB Print *
Enable or disable SMB Print.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SMB> <SMB
Print> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Setting Menu List
338
SNMP Settings
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 184)
SNMPv1 Settings
Specify settings for using SNMPv1. Use the Remote UI to specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
SNMPv1
Enable or disable SNMPv1.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP
Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> <SNMPv1> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Dctd. Community Set.
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for administrators using Canon software,
such as iW Management Console. Select the access privilege to Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
Dctd. Community
Off
Read/Write
Read Only
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP
Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> <Dctd. Community Set.> <Dctd.
Community> Select the access privilege Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
SNMPv3 Settings
Specify settings for using SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when
SNMPv3 is enabled.
SNMPv3
Enable or disable SNMPv3.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
339
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3
Settings> <SNMPv3> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset (
Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
User Settings N (N=1, 2, 3, 4, 5) *
Specify the authentication password and encryption password as the user information used on SNMPv3. Use
the Remote UI to register the user information. Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with
SNMP(P. 184)
Auth. Password /Encryption Password
Enter 6 to 16 alphanumeric characters for each password. Use the numeric keys to enter the password.
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP
Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select the user settings number Check the
user name <Auth. Password> or <Encryption Password> Enter the
password Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Rjct Packet in Sleep
Select whether to discard SNMP packets received during sleep mode.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <SNMP Settings> <Rjct
Packet in Sleep> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
●If you select <On>, applications that use the SNMP protocol, such as Canon software imageWARE
Series, may be disabled to access the machine.
Spooler *
Select whether to include the SD card in the storage locations of received print data. If you select <On>, the machine
capacity of receiving print data is increased.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
340
( ) <Network> Check the message <Spooler> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Receive in Parallel
Species whether to print jobs in the order received when print data for several jobs are sent to the printer from one
computer. If you select <Off>, jobs are printed in the order received but printing speed may be slower.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Receive in Parallel> <Off>
or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
●Even if you select <Off>, jobs may not be saved in the order received in some cases, for example when
the Stored Job Print function is being executed.
Wait Time at Startup
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 171)
0 to 300 (sec.)
Remote UI Settings
Specify settings for using the Remote UI. You can use the Remote UI to specify settings for the machine from a Web
browser.
Remote UI
Enable or disable the Remote UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 241)
Off
On
RUI Access Sec. Set.
Select whether to use a PIN to access the Remote UI. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 215)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
341
TLS *
Enable or disable TLS for Remote UI communications. To use TLS for encrypted communications, you need to
set key pairs by using the Remote UI ( Using TLS for Encrypted Communications(P. 246) ), respectively.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Remote UI
Settings> <TLS> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Software Regist/Updt *
When you register or update a MEAP application, you can check for communication with a distribution server to
connect to.
Software Mngt. Set.
Communication Test
( ) <Network> Check the message <Software Regist/Updt>
<Software Mngt. Set.> <Communication Test> <Yes> Check the message
Check the communication result
Ethernet Driver
Specify the Ethernet communication mode (half duplex/full duplex) and Ethernet type (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000
Base-T). Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 169)
Auto Detect
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Off
On
Communication Mode *
If <Auto Detect> is set to <Off>, select the Ethernet communication mode.
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Setting Menu List
342
Ethernet Type *
If <Auto Detect> is set to <Off>, select the Ethernet type.
10 Base-T
100 Base-TX
1000 Base-T
Sleep Mode Priority
Select whether to give priority to rapid returning from sleep mode or greater energy saving effect of sleep mode.
Optimal Balance
Exit Speed
Energy Saving
( ) <Network> Check the message <Sleep Mode
Priority> Select the settings item Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
Optimal Balance
The machine returns from sleep mode rapidly. When the devices directly connected to the machine support
EEE (Energy Ecient Ethernet), power consumption can be reduced to a greater degree. Normally use this
setting.
Exit Speed
The machine returns from sleep mode more rapidly.
Energy Saving
Communication speed during sleep mode is reduced for lowest power consumption.
●This item is available when <Sleep Mode> is set to <High (Deep Sleep)>. Entering Sleep
Mode(P. 63)
IEEE802.1X
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when
IEEE802.1X authentication is enabled. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 261)
Setting Menu List
343
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <IEEE802.1X> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
Address Filter
Enable or disable communication restricted with the IP address and MAC address. Use the Remote UI to specify the
address to restrict. Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 216)
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <Address Filter> <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
MAC Address
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device.
(Display only)
( ) <Network> Check the message <MAC Address>
E-Mail Print Set.
Specify settings for using the E-Mail Print function. Use the Remote UI to specify other settings for E-Mail Print
including the mail server settings. Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)(P. 111)
POP3 RX Interval
Specify the interval for automatically connecting to the mail server in minutes. New e-mails in the mailbox of the
mail server are automatically received and printed at the specied time intervals.
0 to 90 (min.)
Setting Menu List
344
( ) <Network> Check the message <E-Mail Print Set.> <POP3
RX Interval> Use the numeric keys to enter the interval of auto e-mail
reception Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
●If you select "0," e-mails are not automatically received. In this case, receive e-mails manually.
Manually Receiving E-Mails(P. 115)
POP3 RX
Enable or disable E-Mail Print for the POP3 mail server.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <E-Mail Print Set.> <POP3
RX> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
SMTP RX
Enable or disable E-Mail Print for the SMTP protocol.
Off
On
( ) <Network> Check the message <E-Mail Print Set.> <SMTP
RX> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Monitoring Service
Enable communication with a remote monitoring server and display of communication logs.
Comm. Test
Enable communication with a remote monitoring server. Execution of this item enables information about the
machine to be periodically sent to the remote monitoring server connected to the machine.
Setting Menu List
345
( ) <Network> Check the message <Monitoring Service>
<Comm. Test> Check the message <Yes>
Comm. Log
Display communication logs including error information generated with <Comm. Test>.
(Display only)
( ) <Network> Check the message <Monitoring Service>
<Comm. Log> Select the log Select the time
Init. Network Set.
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. Initializing the Network Settings(P. 457)
Setting Menu List
346
Layout
51W4-05C
The settings about print appearance including gutter margins and print positions
are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Number of Copies(P. 347)
Offset Y/Offset X(P. 347)
Binding Location(P. 348)
Gutter(P. 349)
Alternative Method(P. 350)
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies.
1 to 9999
( ) <Layout> <Number of Copies> Use the numeric keys to enter the
number of copies
Offset Y/Offset X
You can specify settings for shifting the print position for all types of printing in 0.5 mm increments regardless of the
paper source.
-50.0 to 0.0 to +50.0 (mm)
( ) <Layout> <Offset Y> or <Offset X> Use / to enter the offset
value
<Offset Y>
Shifts the print position vertically.
Setting Menu List
347
<Offset X>
Shifts the print position horizontally.
Offset values
For <Offset Y>, set a plus (+) value to shift the print position downward. For <Offset X>, set a plus (+) value to
shift the print position rightward. Set a minus (-) value to shift the print position in the opposite direction.
<Offset Y> <Offset X>
Specifying ne settings for the print position
You can select <Adj. Print Position> under <User Maintenance> to nely specify the print position for each paper
source. The range of available offset values is from -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm. Adjusting Print Position(P. 436)
Binding Location
Select whether to bind the long edge or short edge of the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler. In this case,
specify settings for <Gutter> to adjust the binding margin, as well.
Long Edge
Short Edge
( ) <Layout> <Binding Location> <Long Edge> or <Short Edge>
<Long Edge>
Select to bind the printouts along the long edge.
<Short Edge>
Select to bind the printouts along the short edge.
Setting Menu List
348
Gutter
Adjust the margin width of the edge specied in <Binding Location> by shifting the print position of the print data. If
you select "0.0", the margin will not be changed.
-50.0 to 0.0 to +50.0 (mm)
( ) <Layout> <Gutter> Use / to enter the offset value
Margin values
Specify the direction and width for shifting the print position of the print data. The edge where the margin is
changed varies depending on whether a "+" or "-" value is set. You can adjust the margin width in 0.5 mm
increments.
Portrait-oriented document
Setting Value Long edge binding Short edge binding
"+" value Left end of paper
(for left binding)
Upper end of paper
(for top binding)
"-" value Right end of paper
(for right binding)
Lower end of paper
(for bottom binding)
Landscape-oriented document
Setting Value Long edge binding Short edge binding
"+" value Left end of paper
(for top binding)
Upper end of paper
(for right binding)
Setting Menu List
349
Setting Value Long edge binding Short edge binding
"-" value Right end of paper
(for bottom binding)
Upper end of paper
(for right binding)
Alternative Method
When you perform 2-sided printing of a document that consists of an odd number of pages, you can select whether to
process the last page in 1-sided printing mode. If you select <On>, the printing will be nished faster than the regular
2-sided printing.
Off
On
( ) <Layout> <Alternative Method> <Off> or <On>
When the printing of a document consisting of an even number of pages nishes in 1-
sided printing mode
In the following cases, the last page is processed in 1-sided printing mode even if the document consists of an
even number of pages.
●The last page is blank.
●The last page cannot be printed for a reason such as the paper size is not available for 2-sided printing.
When paper with preprinted logo is used
●If the last page is processed in 1-sided printing mode with <Alternative Method> to <On>, the orientation or
print side of the last page may not match those of other pages. In this case, set <Alternative Method> to
<Off>.
Setting Menu List
350
Print Quality
51W4-05E
The settings about print quality including the resolution and toner density are listed
with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Resolution(P. 351)
Image Renement(P. 352)
Toner Save(P. 352)
Density(P. 352)
Density (Fine Adj)(P. 352)
Halftones(P. 353)
Reduce Quality(P. 354)
Adj. Prt. Line Width(P. 354)
Resolution
Specify the resolution for processing print data.
600 dpi
1200 dpi
( ) <Print Quality> <Resolution> <600 dpi> or <1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
This print mode is suitable for printing at a high speed.
<1200 dpi>
Edges of characters and graphics can be clearly reproduced at high resolution. This print mode is suitable for
printing data that contains many small characters.
Setting Menu List
351
Image Renement *
Enable or disable the smoothing mode in which the edges of characters and graphics are smoothly printed. <Image
Renement> is not displayed when <Resolution> is set to <1200 dpi>.
Off
On
( ) <Print Quality> <Image Renement> <Off> or <On>
Toner Save
Specify this setting when you want to check the nishing such as the layout before printing a large job, for example.
Since this printing mode saves toner, ne lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred.
Off
On
( ) <Print Quality> <Toner Save> <Off> or <On>
Density *
Adjust the toner density to apply to printing. <Density> is not displayed when <Toner Save> is set to <On>.
Adjusting Print Density(P. 434)
-8 to 0 to +8
Density (Fine Adj) *
You can make ne adjustment of the toner density applied to printing separately for three different density areas.
<Density (Fine Adj)> is not displayed when <Toner Save> is set to <On>. Adjusting Print Density(P. 434)
High
-8 to 0 to +8
Medium
-8 to 0 to +8
Low
-8 to 0 to +8
Setting Menu List
352
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image). Halftones can be specied for each image data type in a single document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Color Tone
High Resolution
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
Color Tone
High Resolution
Image
Resolution
Gradation
Color Tone
High Resolution
( ) <Print Quality> <Halftones> Select the image data
type Select the method to reproduce halftones
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
Setting Menu List
353
<Color Tone>
Prints vivid images with a tonal contrast effect. This print mode is suitable for printing image data such as
photos.
<High Resolution>
Implements higher denition printing than the <Resolution> setting, but is slightly inferior in stability of
texture. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing edges of data such as characters, thin lines, and CAD
data.
Reduce Quality
Select whether to continue printing by automatically reducing the quality when insucient memory is available for the
processing.
Continue Printing
Stop Printing
( ) <Print Quality> <Reduce Quality> <Continue Printing> or <Stop
Printing>
●If you select <Stop Printing>, an error message is displayed and the printing is stopped when the machine
runs out of memory. You can press ( ) to resume the printing by reducing the quality.
Adj. Prt. Line Width
Adjust this if the printed text or thin lines are faded.
-7 to 0 to +8
( ) <Print Quality> <Adj. Prt. Line Width> Use / for print line
width adjustment
Setting Menu List
354
Interface
51W4-05F
All the settings about interfaces for communications with a computer and USB are
listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Interface Selection(P. 355)
Timeout(P. 356)
Connection Recog.(P. 357)
Extended RX Buffer(P. 357)
Interface Selection
Select the interface used for the machine.
USB
Enable or disable the USB port. Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 234)
Off
On
Network
Enable or disable the LAN port. Disabling the LAN Port(P. 242)
Off
On
USB Adv. Functions
Specify settings for selecting a function to use a USB device or selecting a device driver to use.
Adv. Func. Settings
Select which of MEAP applications and USB over NW to be given priority when a USB device is connected to
the machine.
Meap Priority
USB Over NW Priority
Setting Menu List
355
( ) <Interface> <Interface Selection> Check the
message <USB Adv. Functions> <Adv. Func. Settings> <Meap Priority> or
<USB Over NW Priority> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
<Meap Priority>
Specify this to give priority to MEAP applications.
<USB Over NW Priority>
Specify this to give priority to USB over NW. This function enables you to use, from your computer, a USB
device connected to the machine's USB port.
USB Storage Device
Specify settings for the device driver for using a USB memory device.
MEAP Driver
Enable or disable the MEAP specic device driver when a USB memory device is attached to the machine.
When you want to perform the direct print function (USB Direct Print) from a USB memory device without
using a computer, select <Off>.
Off
On
( ) <Interface> <Interface Selection> Check the
message <USB Adv. Functions> <USB Storage Device> <MEAP
Driver> <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
Timeout
Specify how the machine should behave if receiving print data is interrupted.
Timeout
Select whether to cancel printing if print data receiving is interrupted for a specied period of time.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
356
( ) <Interface> <Timeout> <Timeout> <Off> or <On>
Timeout Time *
Set the time period until a timeout error occurs.
5 to 15 to 300 (seconds)
( ) <Interface> <Timeout> <Timeout Time> Use the numeric
keys to set the time period
Connection Recog.
A problem such as improper overlay printing or garbled characters may occur during printing via wired LAN
connection. In this case, set <Connection Recog.> to <Off>.
Off
On
( ) <Interface> <Connection Recog.> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
Extended RX Buffer
Select whether to increase the space of the memory built in the machine for receiving print data from a computer. If
you select <On>, the time until the computer will be freed from print data processing or transmission can be reduced
when the computer sends a large volume of data or complicatedly structured data.
Off
On
( ) <Interface> <Extended RX Buffer> Check the
message <Off> or <On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard
Reset(P. 408) )
Setting Menu List
357
User Maintenance
51W4-05H
The settings about adjustment of the machine including print position correction
for each paper source and print quality improvement are listed with short
descriptions. You can specify those settings when the machine is oine. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options,
or other setting items.
Adj. Print Position(P. 358)
Recovery Printing(P. 359)
Check Paper Size(P. 359)
Substitute Size(P. 359)
Short Edge Fd. Prty.(P. 360)
Sp. Transfer Mode(P. 360)
Special Print Mode A(P. 360)
Adj. Scndry Transfer(P. 361)
Wrinkle Correction(P. 361)
Afterimage Corr.(P. 361)
Sp. Transfer Mode 2(P. 362)
Special Deliv. Mode(P. 362)
Improve Toner Fixing(P. 363)
SD Card Maintenance(P. 363)
Special Print Mode(P. 363)
Special Print Adj. C(P. 365)
Update Firmware(P. 366)
Paper Feed Method(P. 366)
Show Job List(P. 367)
Rdc Thin Ppr Curling(P. 367)
Import/Export Set.(P. 368)
Notify to Clean(P. 368)
Clean. Notif. Timing(P. 369)
Toner Check Timing(P. 369)
Spec Tnr Chk Timing(P. 369)
Control Condensation(P. 369)
Rdc Drk Aftr Cart Ch(P. 370)
Adj. Print Position
You can adjust the print position for each paper source. Adjusting Print Position(P. 436)
Common
You can adjust the vertical/horizontal print position for printing on the rst page (front side) in 2-sided printing
mode. The print position on the second page (back side) follows the settings for the paper source available
when the printing is started.
Offset Y (2-Sided) / Offset X (2-Sided)
-5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Multi-Purpose Tray
You can adjust the vertical/horizontal print position for printing on paper from the multi-purpose tray.
Offset Y (MP Tray) / Offset X (MP Tray)
-5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Drawer 1 to 4 *
You can adjust the vertical/horizontal print position for printing on paper fed from a paper drawer.
Setting Menu List
358
Offset Y (Drawer 1 to 4)/ Offset X (Drawer 1 to 4)
-5.0 to 0.0 to +5.0 (mm)
Recovery Printing
Select whether to print again the page of which printing was interrupted by a paper jam or an error.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Recovery Printing> <Off> or <On>
Check Paper Size
Select whether to check the size of paper that is fed from the paper source with the paper size set to <Free Size>. If you
select <On>, the message for conrming the paper size is displayed and the printing is stopped when the size of the
paper fed from the paper source does not match the print data.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Check Paper Size> <Off> or <On>
●If the difference in size between the fed paper and the print data is not so large, it is possible that no
message will be displayed and the printing will be continued even when the selected setting is <On>.
Substitute Size
Select whether to print by substituting A4 size paper and Letter size paper with each other. If you select <On>, Letter
size paper is used for printing when you have specied A4 size paper for printing from a computer but the A4 size
paper is not loaded in the machine.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Substitute Size> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
359
Short Edge Fd. Prty.
When printing on paper of a size that allows for loading both in portrait and landscape orientations, set this item to
<On> if you want the paper in portrait orientation to be fed preferentially. This setting applies only when <Paper
Source> to <Auto>.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Short Edge Fd. Prty.> <Off> or <On>
Sp. Transfer Mode
When you use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images or text may be smudged. In this case,
setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Sp. Transfer Mode> <Off> or <On>
●When you set this item to <On> and use the machine in an environment with high humidity, the print
density may become lighter or uneven.
Special Print Mode A
Streaks may appear on printouts depending on the paper type or the environmental conditions. In this case, setting
this item may solve the problem. The improvement effect is weakest with <Mode 1> and strongest with <Mode 4>.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode A> Select the mode
Setting Menu List
360
●As the improvement effect is increased, the print density becomes lighter. In addition, the edges may be
blurred or roughness may be slightly emphasized.
●If you select <Mode 3> or <Mode 4>, the print speed will be slower.
Adj. Scndry Transfer
When you use the machine in an environment with high humidity, the print density may become lighter or uneven. In
this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Adj. Scndry Transfer> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On> and use the machine in an environment with low humidity, printed images or text may be
smudged.
Wrinkle Correction
If printouts crease, set this item to <On>.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Wrinkle Correction> <Off> or <On>
Afterimage Corr.
When you print on large size paper after printing on small size paper, afterimages may appear in blank areas. In this
case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
361
( ) <User Maintenance> <Afterimage Corr.> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower.
Sp. Transfer Mode 2
If blurring of graphics or text persists with <Sp. Transfer Mode> specied, setting this item to <On> may solve the
problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Sp. Transfer Mode 2> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On> and use the machine in an environment with high humidity, the print density may become
lighter or uneven.
Special Deliv. Mode
Printouts may crease or black horizontal streaks may appear in the leading edge of paper depending on the paper
type or environmental conditions. In this case, setting this item may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Deliv. Mode> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower.
Setting Menu List
362
Improve Toner Fixing
When you perform 2-sided printing after the machine is left unused for a long time, void may occur in printed images.
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Improve Toner Fixing> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower.
SD Card Maintenance *
When an error occurs in an SD card or when you want to discard an SD card, you can erase all the data stored on that
card.
Format
Initializes the SD card. All the stored data is erased from the card.
( ) <User Maintenance> <SD Card
Maintenance> <Format> <Yes>
Completely Del. Data
All the stored data is erased from the SD card. Perform this operation as necessary, such as when you want to
discard an SD card after erasing all the stored data including those fragments that cannot be erased normally.
Deleting All Data in an SD Card(P. 498)
Special Print Mode
Provides items you can set when printing cannot be performed properly.
Curl Correction
If the printed paper curls, set this item to <On>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
363
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Curl
Correction> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower. Also, printouts may be faded.
Reduce Ppr. Sticking
In 2-sided printing, printed paper may stick to each other depending on the image density of print data. In this
case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Reduce Ppr.
Sticking> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, the print speed may be slower.
Rough Paper Adj.
When you print on envelopes, toner may come off printed images depending on the environmental conditions.
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. However, the printing speed will be slower.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Rough Paper
Adj.> <Off> or <On>
●<Rough Paper Adj.> functions only when the paper type setting is <Envelope H>. Specifying Paper
Size and Type(P. 57)
●If you set to <On>, the <Curl Correction> setting will be disabled.
Setting Menu List
364
2-Sd Prnt Speed Prty
Printing speed may be slower during 2-sided printing. To avoid slower printing speed, set to <On>.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <2-Sd Prnt Speed
Prty> <Off> or <On>
●If you set to <On>, streaks may appear on printouts.
Incr Pcard Fix. Qlty
When you print on postcard, toner may come off printed images depending on the environmental conditions.
In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem. However, the printing speed will be slower.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Mode> <Incr Pcard Fix.
Qlty> <Off> or <On>
Special Print Adj. C
Set this item to <On> when printing noise is noticeable.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Special Print Adj. C> <Off> or <On>
●If you set this item to <On>, the printing speed becomes slower.
Setting Menu List
365
Update Firmware
Upgrades the rmware of the machine.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Update Firmware> Select the connection
method <Yes>
Connection method selection
Select the method to connect a computer that performs the rmware update.
Paper Feed Method
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. To print on paper with logos, you need to change
how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing.
However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper face down for both 1- and 2-
sided printing. For more information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 53) .
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
( ) <User Maintenance> <Paper Feed Method> Select the paper
source <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Paper source selection
Select the paper source for which you want to change the setting of Paper Feed Mode.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change which side is up depending on
1-sided or 2-sided printing.
Setting Menu List
366
●We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source regardless of
whether 1- or 2-sided printing is selected.
●Even if <Print Side Priority> is selected for the paper source ( Available Paper(P. 470) ), it is disabled and
the machine operates in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected. In this case, load the paper in
the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 53) ).
●If you select <Print Side Priority>, 1-sided printing speed will be slower.
Show Job List
Select whether to display a list of data that is being printed and waiting to be printed when you press ( ) on
the operation panel.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Show Job List> <Off> or <On>
●If you press ( ) when <Off> is selected, the current print job in progress is canceled.
Rdc Thin Ppr Curling
If printing on thin paper produces curled printouts, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Rdc Thin Ppr Curling> <Off> or <On>
●<Rdc Thin Ppr Curling> functions only when the paper type setting is <Thin 1>. Specifying Paper Size and
Type(P. 57)
●If you set to <On>, automatic 2-sided printing with <Thin 1> is disabled. Further, printouts may be faded due
to poor xing of toner.
Setting Menu List
367
Import/Export Set.
You can transfer and save the data registered in the machine and the setting data of the menu options to the USB
memory device attached to the machine. The exported data can be imported. If the machine model is the same, other
machines can import the data exported from this machine and vice versa.
IMPORT
You can import data that was written to a USB memory device from the machine.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Import/Export
Set.> <IMPORT> <Yes> Select the le to be imported Enter the
password Check the message
EXPORT
You can save the data registered in the machine and the setting data of the menu options to a USB memory
device.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Import/Export
Set.> <EXPORT> Enter the password Password (Conrm) Check
the message
●For these purposes, you can only use the USB port provided on the right side of the machine.
●If the <Ready to print les from USB memory.> screen is displayed when USB memory is connected, press
( ).
●For details about import/export of settings data, see Saving/Loading Registered Data(P. 303) .
Notify to Clean
Select whether to display a message that prompts you to clean the xing unit.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Notify to Clean> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
368
Clean. Notif. Timing *
When you have set <Notify to Clean> to <On>, you can specify the timing to display a prompt message for cleaning the
xing unit, in terms of the number of printed pages and in units of 1,000. The Conguration Page allows you to check
how many pages you can print before the prompt message is displayed. ( Conguration Page(P. 441) )
1000 to 50000
( ) <User Maintenance> <Clean. Notif. Timing> Enter the number of
printed pages
Toner Check Timing
To change the timing to display a message when the toner remaining amount is low, select <Custom>.
Default
Custom
( ) <User Maintenance> <Toner Check Timing> <Default> or
<Custom>
Spec Tnr Chk Timing *
When you have set <Toner Check Timing> to <Custom>, specify the timing to display the message.
( ) <User Maintenance> <Spec Tnr Chk Timing> Use the numeric keys
to enter the toner cartridge remaining amount
Control Condensation
When the temperature changes rapidly in the environment where the machine is installed, condensation occurs, which
may cause fading or bleeding in images and text. If this item is set to <On>, condensation inside the machine will be
removed.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
369
( ) <User Maintenance> <Control Condensation> <Off> or <On>
●While condensation removal is being performed, printing may not be performed properly and blank paper
may be output.
●If you set to <On>, you need to keep the machine turned ON to maintain the effect of condensation removal.
Rdc Drk Aftr Cart Ch
Immediately after replacing toner cartridges with new ones, black streaks may appear on printouts or printing on
heavy paper may result in grayish printouts. In this case, setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
Off
On
( ) <User Maintenance> <Rdc Drk Aftr Cart Ch> <Off> or <On>
●If you set to <On>, the setting will become effective with next replacement of toner cartridges.
●Immediately after cartridge replacement, a certain amount of time is required for toner to be evenly
distributed inside the cartridge.
Setting Menu List
370
Print Mode
51W4-05J
All the settings about print mode switching are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options,
or other setting items.
Auto Mode Selection(P. 371)
Auto Select(P. 372)
Mode Priority(P. 372)
◼Type of Print Mode
Auto selection mode The machine enters the auto selection mode when <Auto Selection> is selected for <Auto Mode
Selection>. The machine automatically discriminates data sent from a computer and selects the
print mode. Normally use this print mode when you print from an application.
<PCL> Mode for printing a PCL le sent from a computer.
<PS> Mode for printing a PS le sent from a computer.
<PDF> Mode for printing a PDF le by using Direct Print or USB Direct Print.
<XPS> Mode for printing an XPS le by using Direct Print or USB Direct Print.
Auto Mode Selection
Specify the print mode in which the machine operates.
Auto Selection
PCL
PS
PDF
XPS
( ) <Print Mode> <Auto Mode Selection> Select the print mode
Setting Menu List
371
Auto Select
Enable or disable the automatic mode selection feature for the print modes during auto selection mode.
Off
On
( ) <Print Mode> <Auto Select> Select the print mode <Off>
or <On>
●If all print modes are set to <Off>, the machine operates in the print mode specied for <Mode Priority>.
Mode Priority
Specify the print mode that is automatically selected when the machine cannot identify the control command during
auto selection mode.
None
PCL
PS
PDF
XPS
( ) <Print Mode> <Mode Priority> Select the preferential print
mode
●If you select <None>, the machine automatically determines the print mode when it cannot identify the
control command.
Setting Menu List
372
UFR II
51W4-05L
This section describes the settings available during use of UFR II with the control
commands. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Paper Save
Select whether to prevent blank pages from being output when they are contained in documents to print.
Off
On
( ) <UFR II> <Paper Save> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
374
PCL
51W4-05R
All the settings about the PCL control commands are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Paper Save(P. 375)
Orientation(P. 375)
Font Number(P. 376)
Point Size(P. 376)
Pitch(P. 376)
Form Lines(P. 376)
Character Code(P. 377)
Custom Size(P. 378)
Unit of Measurement(P. 378)
X Dimension(P. 378)
Y Dimension(P. 379)
Append CR to LF(P. 379)
Enlarge A4 Prt Width(P. 379)
BarDIMM(P. 380)
FreeScape(P. 380)
Paper Save
Species whether the machine outputs the blank page that can be created due to no data existing between two form
feed codes sent from an application.
Off
On
( ) <PCL> <Paper Save> <Off> or <On>
Orientation
Enables you to set the paper orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
( ) <PCL> <Orientation> <Portrait> or <Landscape>
Setting Menu List
375
Font Number
Enables you to set the default font for this machine function using the corresponding font numbers. Valid font
numbers are from 0 to 116.
0 to 116
( ) <PCL> <Font Number> Use the numeric keys to enter the font
number
Point Size *
If the number selected in <Font Number> is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font, this option appears in the
<PCL> options. It enables you to specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in increments
of 0.25 pts.
4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)
( ) <PCL> <Point Size> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Pitch *
If the number selected in <Font Number> is that of a xed pitch scalable font, <Pitch> appears in the <PCL> options. It
enables you to specify the pitch for the default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments of 0.01 cpi (characters per
inch).
0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)
( ) <PCL> <Pitch> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Form Lines
Enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. You can specify from 5 to 128 lines.
5 to 64 to 128 (lines)
Setting Menu List
376
( ) <PCL> <Form Lines> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Character Code
Enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer.
PC8
ROMAN8
ROMAN9
ISOL1
ISOL2
ISOL5
ISOL6
ISOL9
PC775
PC8DN
PC850
PC852
PC858
PC8TK
PC1004
WINL1
WINL2
WINL5
WINBALT
DESKTOP
PSTEXT
LEGAL
ISO4
ISO6
ISO11
ISO15
ISO17
ISO21
ISO60
ISO69
WIN 30
MCTEXT
PC864
ARABIC8
WINARB
PC866
ISOCYR
WINCYR
PC851
GREEK8
ISOGRK
PC8GRK
WINGRK
Setting Menu List
377
PC862
HEBREW7
HEBREW8
ISOHEB
( ) <PCL> <Character Code> Select the character code
Custom Size
Enables you to specify a custom paper size. If <Set> is selected, you can enter a custom size.
Do Not Set
Set
( ) <PCL> <Custom Size> <Do Not Set> or <Set>
Unit of Measurement *
Enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify your custom paper size.
Millimeters
Inches
( ) <PCL> <Unit of Measurement> <Millimeters> or <Inches>
X Dimension *
Enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom paper. The X dimension can be adjusted between 76.0 mm and
216.0 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.
76.0 to 215.9 to 216.0 mm
( ) <PCL> <X Dimension> Use / to enter the setting
value
Setting Menu List
378
Y Dimension *
Enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom paper. The Y dimension can be adjusted between 127.0 mm and
356.0 mm in increments of 0.1 mm.
127.0 to 355.6 to 356.0 mm
( ) <PCL> <Y Dimension> Use / to enter the setting value
Append CR to LF
Enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.
Yes
No
( ) <PCL> <Append CR to LF> <Yes> or <No>
Enlarge A4 Prt Width
Determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 paper to that of Letter size in width.
Off
On
( ) <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Prt Width> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
379
BarDIMM *
You can enable or disable the Bar Code Printing function of the machine.
Enable
Disable
( ) <PCL> <BarDIMM> <Enable> or <Disable>
FreeScape *
You can specify the AEC (Alternate Escape Code) to be used for bar code commands when the host computer does not
support the standard Escape Code.
Off
~
"
#
$
/
\
?
{
}
|
( ) <PCL> <FreeScape> Select Escape Code
Setting Menu List
380
Imaging
51W4-05S
All the settings about image les (JPEG and TIFF les) available for USB Direct Print,
Direct Print, and E-Mail Print are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are
marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Image Orientation(P. 381)
Zoom(P. 382)
Print Position(P. 382)
TIFF Spooler(P. 383)
Show Warnings(P. 383)
Print E-Mail Text(P. 384)
Limit E-Mail Print(P. 384)
Enlarge Print Area(P. 385)
Halftones(P. 385)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 386)
Image Orientation
Specify the print orientation of an image.
Auto
Vertical
Horizontal
( ) <Imaging> <Image Orientation> Select the orientation
<Auto>
Automatically determines the print orientation based on the width and height of the image.
<Vertical>
Select when printing a vertically-long image.
<Horizontal>
Select when printing a horizontally-long image.
Setting Menu List
381
●If the specied setting (<Vertical> or <Horizontal>) does not match the orientation of the image, the image is
printed at a reduced size.
Zoom
Enable or disable enlarging/reducing images. The printouts are enlarged or reduced with the image aspect ratio kept.
Off
Auto
( ) <Imaging> <Zoom> <Off> or <Auto>
<Off>
When an image is within printable area, it is printed at the original size. When an image is larger than the
printable area, printouts are reduced.
<Auto>
Makes enlarged or reduced printouts according to the printable area of the paper.
Print Position
Specify the position to print the image.
Auto
Center
Top Left
( ) <Imaging> <Print Position> Select <Auto> or the position
Setting Menu List
382
<Auto>
If the TIFF data contains the information that species the print position, the image is printed according to
the information, otherwise, it is printed at the center of paper. JPEG data is always printed at the center of
paper.
<Center>
Images are printed at the center of paper.
<Top Left>
Images are printed at the top left.
TIFF Spooler
Select whether to store TIFF data in the SD card prior to processing it for printing. Set this item to <On> if an error
occurs during printing.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <TIFF Spooler> Check the message <Off> or
<On> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
<Off>
TIFF data is continuously processed as soon as it is received, reducing the processing time.
<On>
All of received TIFF data is processed at one time, reducing the occurrence of errors. When an SD card is
installed, the data is stored to the SD card.
Show Warnings
You can specify how the machine should behave if an error occurs.
Off
Print
Panel
Setting Menu List
383
( ) <Imaging> <Show Warnings> Select how the machine should
behave
<Off>
No image is printed and no error is displayed.
<Print>
Error information is printed and no image is printed.
<Panel>
No image is printed and an error message is displayed on the operation panel.
Print E-Mail Text
Select whether to print e-mail messages when E-Mail Print is performed. If you select <Off>, only an image attached to
the e-mail is printed.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Print E-Mail Text> <Off> or <On>
Limit E-Mail Print *
Select whether to limit the number of e-mail message pages to print when <Print E-Mail Text> is set to <On>. If you
select <On>, the number of e-mail message pages to print is limited to 5.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Limit E-Mail Print> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
384
Enlarge Print Area
Specify whether or not to print the image by extending the printable area fully to the paper size.
Off
On
( ) <Imaging> <Enlarge Print Area> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, some portions of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper may
be partly tainted depending on the original.
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image).
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
( ) <Imaging> <Halftones> Select the method to reproduce
halftones
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
Setting Menu List
385
<High Resolution>
Implements higher denition printing than the <Resolution> setting, but is slightly inferior in stability of
texture. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing edges of data such as characters, thin lines, and CAD
data.
Grayscale Conversion
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
( ) <Imaging> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the conversion
method
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
Setting Menu List
386
XPS
51W4-05U
All the settings about XPS les available for USB Direct Print and Direct Print are
listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Halftones(P. 387)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 388)
Compressed Img Mode(P. 389)
Compressed Img Outpt(P. 390)
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image). Halftones can be specied for each image data type in a single document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Image
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
( ) <XPS> <Halftones> Select the image data type Select the
method to reproduce halftones
Setting Menu List
387
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
<High Resolution>
Implements higher denition printing than the <Resolution> setting, but is slightly inferior in stability of
texture. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing edges of data such as characters, thin lines, and CAD
data.
Grayscale Conversion
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data. You can specify the conversion method
for each image data type: <Text>, <Graphics>, and <Image>.
Text
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
Graphics
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
Image
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
( ) <XPS> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the image data
type Select the conversion method
Setting Menu List
388
Image data type
Select the image data type for which you want to specify the conversion method.
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
Compressed Img Mode *
Specify how the machine should behave when the machine is running out of memory during XPS le printing.
Image Priority
Output Priority
( ) <XPS> <Compressed Img Mode> <Image Priority> or <Output
Priority>
<Image Priority>
Cancels printing before the quality is reduced when insucient memory is available.
<Output Priority>
Continues printing even if the quality is reduced due to insucient memory.
●You can specify this item when no SD card is used. If <SD Card> is set to <On>, the machine always operates
with <Output Priority> selected ( SD Card(P. 318) ).
Setting Menu List
389
Compressed Img Outpt
If <Compressed Img Mode> is set to <Output Priority>, the quality may be reduced over time depending on image
data. You can specify how the machine should behave if the quality is excessively reduced.
Output
Display Error
( ) <XPS> <Compressed Img Outpt> <Output> or <Display
Error>
<Output>
Continues printing regardless of how the quality is reduced.
<Display Error>
Displays an applicable error message and cancels printing when the quality is excessively reduced.
●This setting is valid when <Compressed Img Mode> is set to <Output Priority> or <SD Card> ( SD
Card(P. 318) ) is set to <On>.
Setting Menu List
390
PDF
51W4-05W
All the settings about PDF les available for USB Direct Print and Direct Print are
listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Fit to Paper Size(P. 391)
Enlarge Print Area(P. 391)
N on 1(P. 392)
Comment Print(P. 392)
Halftones(P. 392)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 393)
Fit to Paper Size
Specify whether to enlarge or reduce printouts according to the printable area of paper. The printouts are enlarged or
reduced with the original aspect ratio kept.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Fit to Paper Size> <Off> or <On>
Enlarge Print Area
Specify whether or not to print the image by extending the printable area fully to the paper size.
Off
On
( ) <PDF> <Enlarge Print Area> <Off> or <On>
●If you select <On>, some portions of the image may be missing near the edge of the paper or the paper may
be partly tainted depending on the original.
Setting Menu List
391
N on 1
Select whether to print multiple pages onto a single sheet at a reduced size by sequentially allocating them from the
top left. For example, to print four pages onto a single sheet, select <4 on 1>.
Off
2 on 1
4 on 1
6 on 1
8 on 1
9 on 1
16 on 1
( ) <PDF> <N on 1> Select the aggregation method
Comment Print
Select whether to print comments. If you select <Auto>, comments in the PDF le are printed.
Off
Auto
( ) <PDF> <Comment Print> <Off> or <Auto>
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image). Halftones can be specied for each image data type in a single document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Image
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Setting Menu List
392
( ) <PDF> <Halftones> Select the image data type Select the
method to reproduce halftones
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
<High Resolution>
Implements higher denition printing than the <Resolution> setting, but is slightly inferior in stability of
texture. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing edges of data such as characters, thin lines, and CAD
data.
Grayscale Conversion
You can select the method to convert color pint data to black-and-white data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
( ) <PDF> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the conversion
method
Setting Menu List
393
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
Setting Menu List
394
PS
51W4-05X
All the settings about the PS control commands are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Job Timeout(P. 395)
Print PS Errors(P. 395)
Halftones(P. 395)
Grayscale Conversion(P. 396)
Job Timeout
If the time specied in this item has elapsed since a job process was started, the machine automatically nishes the
job and receives the next job.
If you do not want to specify the timeout, specify "0 seconds."
0 to 3600 (seconds)
( ) <PS> <Job Timeout> Use the numeric keys to enter the setting
value
Print PS Errors
Species whether an error page should be printed when a PostScript error is occurring.
Off
On
( ) <PS> <Print PS Errors> <Off> or <On>
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and darker
areas of an image). Halftones can be specied for each image data type in a single document.
Text
Resolution
Gradation
Setting Menu List
395
High Resolution
Graphics
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
Image
Resolution
Gradation
High Resolution
( ) <PS> <Halftones> Select the image data type Select the
method to reproduce halftones
Image data type
Select the image data type for which the settings are changed. Select <Text> for characters, <Graphics> for
lines and gures, or <Image> for images such as photos.
<Resolution>
Performs ne printing by sharply reproducing the edges of characters. This print mode is suitable for
printing data of characters and thin lines with a clear nish.
<Gradation>
Prints gradation and lines with a smooth nish. This print mode is suitable for printing gures and charts
with gradation.
<High Resolution>
Implements higher denition printing than the <Resolution> setting, but is slightly inferior in stability of
texture. This print mode is suitable for sharply printing edges of data such as characters, thin lines, and CAD
data.
Grayscale Conversion
You can select the method to convert color print data to black-and-white data.
sRGB
NTSC
Uniform RGB
Setting Menu List
396
( ) <PS> <Grayscale Conversion> Select the conversion method
<sRGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate color-conscious smooth gradation.
<NTSC>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to generate appearances equivalent to television pictures
(NTSC).
<Uniform RGB>
Color data is converted to black-and-white data to equalize all RGB levels based on the brightness only.
Setting Menu List
397
MEAP Settings
51W4-05Y
The setting items about the main screen on MEAP are listed with short descriptions.
Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or
other setting items.
Select Def. Screen(P. 398)
Use DNS Caching(P. 399)
Period of Validity(P. 399)
Add X-FRAME-OPTIONS(P. 399)
Select Def. Screen
You can specify the screen that appears on the display of the operation panel when the machine starts up.
Print Screen
MEAP
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Select Def. Screen> <Print Screen> or
<MEAP>
<Print Screen>
The print standby screen (main screen) is displayed.
<MEAP>
The screen of an installed MEAP application is displayed if any installed.
●You can press ( ) on the operation panel to change the screens of the display.
Setting Menu List
398
Use DNS Caching
You can specify whether to hold in memory the DNS information with which search by a MEAP application has
succeeded. Selecting <On (Specify Period)> allows for temporary holding and makes it possible to specify a valid
holding period ( Period of Validity(P. 399) ).
Off
On (Unlimited Use)
On (Specify Period)
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Use DNS Caching> Select the setting value
Period of Validity *
When the setting of <Use DNS Caching> is <On (Specify Period)>, specify the time period for which to hold the DNS
information in memory.
1 to 60 to 120 (seconds)
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Period of Validity> Use the numeric keys to set
the time period
Add X-FRAME-OPTIONS
Specify whether to add X-FRAME-OPTIONS to the header when the HTTP server returns a response. Adding X-FRAME-
OPTIONS prevents the information from overlapping on contents generated by other servers.
Off
On
( ) <MEAP Settings> <Add X-FRAME-OPTIONS> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
399
Check Counter
51W4-060
You can check the total number of printed pages.
●You can also check the counter value by selecting <Check Counter> in the Utility Menu(P. 402) as well as
this item.
101: Total 1
You can check the total number of pages printed.
(Display only)
113: Total (B&W/Sml)
You can check the total number of pages printed.
(Display only)
114:Total 1(2-Sided)
You can check the total number of pages printed in 2-sided printing mode.
(Display only)
Setting Menu List
400
Initialize Menu
51W4-061
Select to restore the settings of the Setup menu listed below to the factory defaults.
Initializing Menu(P. 456)
Settings that cannot be initialized
●You cannot initialize the settings specied for <Network> and <Adj. Print Position>. When you want to
initialize the <Network> settings, see Initializing the Network Settings(P. 457) . When you want to
initialize the <Adj. Print Position> settings, manually restore them to the factory default settings ( Adj.
Print Position(P. 358) ).
Setting Menu List
401
Utility Menu
51W4-062
You can display the total number of printed pages and print internal system
information. When you press ( ) on the operation panel, the Utility menu
is displayed. You can specify the settings described below when the machine is
oine.
Check Counter(P. 402)
Conguration Page(P. 402)
Network Status Print(P. 403)
Consmbl. Status Prt.(P. 403)
IPSec Policy List(P. 403)
PCL Utility(P. 403)
PS Utility(P. 403)
Cleaning(P. 403)
E-Mail Print Utility(P. 403)
Printing Pos. Print(P. 404)
Page Count List(P. 404)
Counter Report(P. 404)
Print MEAP Sys. Info(P. 404)
Cartridge Log Print(P. 404)
Serial Number(P. 404)
Consumables Info.(P. 404)
Check Counter
You can check the total number of printed pages. Checking Total Number of Printed Pages(P. 450)
●You can also check the counter value by selecting <Check Counter> in the Setup Menu(P. 310) as well as
this item.
101: Total 1
You can check the total number of pages printed.
(Display only)
113: Total (B&W/Sml)
You can check the total number of pages printed.
(Display only)
114:Total 1(2-Sided)
You can check the total number of pages printed in 2-sided printing mode.
(Display only)
Conguration Page
You can check the machine settings ( Setup Menu(P. 310) ) congured in the machine. You can also check other
information such as the toner cartridge status, the number of printed pages, and the capacity of the memory (RAM)
mounted on the machine. Conguration Page(P. 441)
Setting Menu List
402
Network Status Print
Select to print a list of the settings ( Network(P. 326) ) about the network congured in the machine. You can also
check the information about the security including the address lter settings and IPSec settings. Network Status
Print(P. 441)
Consmbl. Status Prt.
You can print information such as toner cartridge status, warning messages, and information on where you can
purchase new toner cartridges. Consmbl. Status Prt.(P. 442)
IPSec Policy List
Select to print a list of the IPSec policy names and settings ( Conguring IPSec Settings(P. 251) ) congured in the
machine. IPSec Policy List(P. 442)
PCL Utility
Select to print a list of the internal information items registered in the machine for use of the PCL mode.
Font List
Select to print a list of the fonts that can be used in the PCL mode. PCL Font List(P. 445)
PS Utility
Select to print a list of the settings for use of the PS mode and the internal information items registered in the
machine. PS Mode List(P. 446)
Conguration Page
Select to print a list of the machine settings ( PS(P. 395) ).
Font List
Select to print a list of the fonts that can be used in the PS mode.
Cleaning
Select to clean the xing unit when black spots or streaks appear on printouts. Fixing Unit(P. 424)
E-Mail Print Utility
Select to manually receive e-mails and print a log of received e-mails in list form.
Received E-Mail
Select to manually receive e-mails from the POP3 mail server and print them. Manually Receiving E-
Mails(P. 115)
E-Mail RX Log List
Select to print a log consisting of subjects and received date/time of e-mails received in the machine in list form.
E-Mail Print Log(P. 449)
Setting Menu List
403
Printing Pos. Print
Select to print marks that indicate the current print position. Adjusting Print Position(P. 436)
Page Count List
Select to print a report on the number of printed pages for each department when Department ID Management is
enabled. Page Count List(P. 443)
Counter Report
Prints an aggregate report of the number of pages printed for each counter. Counter Report(P. 444)
Print MEAP Sys. Info
Select to print a list of information about MEAP applications installed in the machine and the MEAP system applications
when the MEAP function is enabled. Print MEAP Sys. Info(P. 444)
Cartridge Log Print
Prints logs of usage of toner cartridge in the form of a list. Cartridge Log Print(P. 445)
Serial Number
Select to display the serial number of the machine.
( ) <Serial Number>
Consumables Info.
Select to display the information about the paper and toner cartridge.
Paper Information
Select to display the currently specied paper size and paper type, and the remaining paper level for each paper
source. Checking Paper(P. 453)
Toner Cart. Model
Select to display the model number of the toner cartridge for the machine. Checking the Toner Cartridge
Model(P. 453)
Setting Menu List
404
Job Menu
51W4-063
You can print documents stored in the SD card and a print log. When you
press ( ) on the operation panel, the Job menu is displayed. You can specify
the settings described below when the machine is oine.
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
●Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed when [Display Job Log] check box of the Remote UI is not
selected. Hiding the Print Job History(P. 243)
Encrypted Print(P. 406)
Secured Print(P. 406)
Stored Job List(P. 406)
Stored Job Print(P. 406)
Job Print Log(P. 407)
Stored Job Print Log(P. 407)
Report Print Log(P. 407)
E-Mail Print Log(P. 407)
Encrypted Print *1
Select to print encrypted secured documents that you sent to the machine from the computer. Printing Out
Secured Documents(P. 89)
Secured Print *1
Select to print secured documents that you sent to the machine from the computer. Printing Out Secured
Documents(P. 89)
Stored Job List *1
Select to print a list of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine. Stored Job List(P. 447)
Stored Job Print *1
Select to print documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine. Printing a Document Stored in the
Machine(P. 94)
Setting Menu List
406
Job Print Log *2
Select to print a log of documents printed from the computer in list from. Job Print Log(P. 447)
Stored Job Print Log *1*2
Select to print a print log of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine in list form. Stored Job Print
Log(P. 448)
Report Print Log *2
Select to print the settings and a print log of reports in list form. Report Print Log(P. 448)
E-Mail Print Log *2
Select to print a print log of received e-mails in list form. E-Mail Print Log(P. 449)
Setting Menu List
407
Reset Menu
51W4-064
You can cancel all processes, delete data in memory, and turn OFF the power. When
you press ( ) on the operation panel, the Reset menu is displayed.
Soft Reset(P. 408)
Form Feed(P. 409)
Shut Down(P. 409)
●When the message Ennn-nnnn (n is a number) is displayed, only <Shut Down> can be executed.
Soft Reset
Select to erase all data of print jobs that are not yet nished (soft reset). You can also select this item to perform a hard
reset for enabling the changed settings.
●Make sure to check that other users are not using the machine before performing a soft reset or hard reset,
otherwise, all print data is erased before being printed.
◼Performing a Soft Reset
Perform a soft reset when you want to erase all print data that is being printed, waiting to be printed, or being
received.
( ) <Soft Reset> <Yes>
◼Performing a Hard Reset
Perform a hard reset when you want to enable the changed settings of machine or to erase data registered in memory
of the machine.
1Press ( ).
●If the setting menu is displayed, rst press ( ) to return to the main screen and then
perform this step 1.
Setting Menu List
408
2Use / to select <Soft Reset>, press and hold for 5 seconds or more, and
release it.
➠The message <Execute hard reset?> is displayed.
3Select <Yes>, and press .
➠When a hard reset is executed, the machine is restarted.
●When a soft reset or hard reset is performed, secured documents stored in the optional SD card are also
deleted.
Form Feed
If printing is canceled from the computer or the communication is interrupted during data reception, the data may
remain in the memory of the machine, preventing the printing from nishing. The next print data cannot be printed
with the remaining data left as is. In this case, select <Form Feed> to forcibly print the data remaining in memory.
( ) <Form Feed> <Yes>
●If the remaining data is not printed, perform a soft reset.
●If the data still remains in the memory of the machine after a form feed is performed (the [Job] indicator is lit
on the machine), perform a soft reset.
Shut Down
When turning OFF the machine, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power switch.
Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35)
Setting Menu List
409
Select Feeder Menu
51W4-065
The settings about the paper source and the size of paper loaded in the machine
are listed with short descriptions. When you press ( ) on the operation panel,
the Select Feeder menu is displayed. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Common settings
●The settings are the same as those for <Paper Source> in the Setup Menu(P. 310) . The settings specied
here are also applied to the <Paper Source> settings.
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options,
or other setting items.
Paper Source(P. 410)
MP Tray Paper Size(P. 410)
Drawer N Paper Size (N=1, 2, 3, 4)(P. 411)
Standard Paper Size(P. 411)
MP Tray Priority(P. 412)
MP Tray for Mix Ppr.(P. 413)
Auto Select Drawer(P. 413)
Default Paper Type(P. 414)
MP Tray Paper Type(P. 414)
Drawer N Paper Type (N=1, 2, 3, 4)(P. 415)
Manual 2-Sided (MP)(P. 415)
2-Sided Printing(P. 416)
Paper Source
Select the paper source from which paper is fed. When you want to automatically change the paper source based on
the paper size and paper type, select <Auto>.
Auto
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Drawer 2 *
Drawer 3 *
Drawer 4 *
( ) <Paper Source> Select the paper source
MP Tray Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper that is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-
Purpose Tray(P. 60)
Setting Menu List
410
A6
A5
A5R
B5
A4
LTR
LGL
EXEC
Free Size
Custom Size
Custom Size R
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4on1 Postcard
Env. Nagagata3
Env. Younaga 3
Env. ISO-C5
Env. Monarch
Env. No.10
Env. DL
India-LGL
Index Card
STMT
FLSC
16K
Drawer N Paper Size (N=1, 2, 3, 4) *
Set the size of paper loaded in the machine's paper drawer or optional paper feeder's paper drawer. Specifying
Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 58)
A6
A5
A5R
B5
A4
LTR
LGL
EXEC
Free Size
Custom Size
Custom Size R
India-LGL
STMT
FLSC
16K
Standard Paper Size
Set the default paper size. Printing will be performed with the paper size set here when you want to print from an OS
not supporting printer drivers or a mobile device or other device not supporting paper size settings.
A6
Setting Menu List
411
A5
B5
A4
LTR
LGL
EXEC
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4on1 Postcard
Env. Nagagata3
Env. Younaga 3
Env. ISO-C5
Env. Monarch
Env. No.10
Env. DL
India-LGL
Index Card
STMT
FLSC
16K
( ) <Standard Paper Size> Select the paper size
Selecting the paper size
Specify the setting according to the size of the paper to print on.
MP Tray Priority
Select whether to prioritize paper feeding from the multi-purpose tray when <Paper Source> is set to <Auto>. If you
select <On>, paper is fed from the multi-purpose tray when the same size paper is loaded in both the multi-purpose
tray and the paper drawer.
Off
On
( ) <MP Tray Priority> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
412
●When <MP Tray for Mix Ppr.> is set to <On>, paper is preferentially fed from the paper drawer even if <MP
Tray Priority> is set to <On>.
MP Tray for Mix Ppr.
If you select <On> with <Paper Source> set to other than <Multi-Purpose Tray>, the multi-purpose tray is automatically
selected when appropriate size paper is not loaded in any paper drawer.
Off
On
( ) <MP Tray for Mix Ppr.> <Off> or <On>
Auto Select Drawer
If you select <Use> with <Paper Source> set to <Auto>, the machine automatically selects the paper source with
appropriate size paper loaded. Also, when the paper runs out, this setting enables continuous printing by switching
from one paper source to another that is loaded with the same paper size.
Do Not Use
Use
( ) <Auto Select Drawer> Select the paper source <Do Not Use> or
<Use>
Paper source selection
Select the paper source to which you want to apply the Auto Select Drawer function.
Switching of the settings
Select <Use> to enable automatic drawer selection for the paper source you selected on the previous screen
().
Setting Menu List
413
Default Paper Type
Set the default paper type. Printing will be performed with the paper type set here when you want to print from an OS
not supporting printer drivers or a mobile device or other device not supporting paper type settings.
Thin 1
Plain 1
Plain 2
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Heavy 3
Heavy 4
Postcard
Envelope
Envelope H
Labels
Bond 1
Bond 2
Bond 3
( ) <Default Paper Type> Select the paper type
Paper type selection
Specify the settings in the same way as the paper settings in the printer driver according to the paper type
for printing. Loading Paper(P. 39)
●Printing will be performed with the paper type set here if [Paper Type] is set to [Printer Default] on the
printer driver side and the type of the paper loaded in the paper source is set to <Mixed Types> on the
machine side.
MP Tray Paper Type
Set the type of paper loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray(P. 60)
Thin 1
Plain 1
Plain 2
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Setting Menu List
414
Heavy 3
Heavy 4
Postcard
Envelope
Envelope H
Labels
Bond 1
Bond 2
Bond 3
Mixed Types
Drawer N Paper Type (N=1, 2, 3, 4) *
Set the type of paper loaded in the paper drawer. Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Paper Drawer(P. 58)
Thin 1
Plain 1
Plain 2
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
Bond 1
Bond 2
Bond 3
Mixed Types
Manual 2-Sided (MP)
If printouts on the back side of printed paper are too light, select <2nd Side>.
1st Side
2nd Side
( ) <Manual 2-Sided (MP)> <1st Side> or <2nd Side>
<1st Side>
Select to print on the front side (the side to print rst).
<2nd Side>
Select to print on the back side (the opposite of the side that is already printed).
Setting Menu List
415
2-Sided Printing
Select whether to print on both sides of paper.
Off
On
( ) <2-Sided Printing> <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
416
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
51W4-066
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.
Troubleshooting (FAQ)
418
Maintenance
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 420
Cleaning the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 422
Exterior ......................................................................................................................................................... 423
Fixing Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 424
Replacing the Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................................................ 425
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 431
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality ....................................................................................................... 433
Adjusting Print Density ................................................................................................................................. 434
Adjusting Print Position ................................................................................................................................ 436
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 441
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 450
Checking Consumables ..................................................................................................................................... 453
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 455
Initializing Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 456
Initializing the Network Settings ................................................................................................................... 457
Maintenance
419
Maintenance
51W4-06L
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and initialize settings.
◼Basic Cleaning Cleaning the Machine(P. 422)
●The machine becomes dirty, see Exterior(P. 423) .
●Black spots appear on printouts, see Fixing Unit(P. 424) .
◼Replacing the Toner Cartridges
●To check the toner cartridge status, or how to replace the toner cartridge,
see Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 425) .
◼Relocating the Machine
●Relocating the machine for maintenance or an oce move, see Relocating
the Machine(P. 431) .
◼Managing Print Quality Maintaining and Improving Print Quality(P. 433)
●If you want to adjust the toner density to be used for printing, see Adjusting Print Density(P. 434) .
●If you want to adjust the print position, see Adjusting Print Position(P. 436) .
◼Printing Reports and Lists
●Printing out lists of settings or the like , see Printing Reports and Lists(P. 441) .
◼Checking the Total Pages Printed by the Machine
If you want to check the total page number of printouts , see Viewing the Counter Value(P. 450) .
Maintenance
420
Exterior
51W4-06S
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the power, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power
switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35)
2Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
●Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
●To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side(P. 18) and Back Side(P. 20) .
3Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
423
Fixing Unit
51W4-06U
Dirt may adhere to the xing unit inside the machine and cause black spots to appear on printouts. To clean the xing
unit, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing unit when the machine has documents
waiting to be printed. Note that cleaning the xing unit requires A4 or Letter size paper. Set the paper in the multi-
purpose tray before performing the following procedure.
●Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge. Make sure that there is sucient toner cartridge remaining
beforehand. Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 427)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Cleaning>, and press .
3Select the size of the loaded paper, and press .
4Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The <Set cleaning paper and press the Online key.> message appears on the display.
5Press ( ).
➠The cleaning paper is slowly fed into the machine and the cleaning of the xing unit starts.
●You cannot stop the cleaning halfway. Wait until the cleaning is completed.
Maintenance
424
Replacing the Toner Cartridges
51W4-06W
When the replacement time for a toner cartridge is near, a message appears on the display. Note that the print quality
becomes poor if you continue printing without taking any action. You can also check the toner cartridge status on the
display.
When a Message Appear(P. 425)
If Printouts are Poor in Quality(P. 426)
Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 427)
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 427)
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 428)
◼When a Message Appear
Depending on which message is displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge
ready or replace the toner cartridge. Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 427) How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 428) Consumables(P. 485)
<16 Tnr cart. will soon reach end of lifetime.>
<Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.>
This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
●When the <Toner cartridge will soon reach end of lifetime.> message is displayed, the printing is
temporarily stopped. To resume the printing, press ( ).
●Which message is to be displayed depends on the <Action When Warning> setting in the setting
menu of the operation panel. Action When Warning(P. 316)
●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
this message. Spec Tnr Chk Timing(P. 369)
<1G Change toner cartridge recommended.>
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you replace this cartridge with a
new one.
●You can continue printing when this message is displayed, but the print quality may deteriorate.
Maintenance
425
●Receiving e-mail and fax documents will be disabled. Printing Received E-mail (E-Mail Print)
(P. 111)
<Non-Canon cart. not covered by warranty.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace this cartridge with a new one.
●You can continue printing when this message is displayed, but the print quality may deteriorate.
Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
<Cannot print. Cart. may be non-Canon/counterfeit.>
This message noties you that the machine may not print in optimum quality. It is recommended that you
replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
●When this message is displayed, you cannot continue printing. Canon Genuine Mode(P. 324)
◼If Printouts are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is consumed. Replace the
nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed. Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 427)
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 428)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Uneven
Partially faded Uneven density White Spots Appear
Toner smudges and splatters appear Blank space of originals becomes grayish in printouts
Maintenance
426
◼Checking the Toner Cartridge Status
You can check the toner cartridge status on the main screen. It is recommended that you check the amount before
you start to print a large job.
●The displayed toner cartridge status can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual
status.
●You can also check the toner cartridge status with <Remaining Toner> under <Consumables Info.>.
Consumables Info.(P. 404)
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Perform the following before replacing the toner cartridge. The message may no longer appear, or print quality may
be improved.
1Press the button to open the Front cover.
2Remove the toner cartridge.
Maintenance
427
3Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times as shown below to evenly distribute the
toner inside the cartridge.
4Install the toner cartridge.
●Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
5Close the Front cover.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9) and Consumables(P. 10) before replacing the
toner cartridges.
1Press the button to open the Front cover.
Maintenance
428
2Remove the toner cartridge.
3Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective case.
4Shake the toner cartridge ve or six times as shown below to evenly distribute the
toner inside the cartridge.
5Install the toner cartridge.
●Fully push it in until it cannot go any further.
Maintenance
429
Relocating the Machine
51W4-06Y
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedures below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also
make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)
1Turn OFF the machine and computer.
●When you turn OFF the power, be sure to shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the
power switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35)
2Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustration below.
●Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB device*
USB cable*
LAN cable*
3When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 425)
4Pull out the paper drawer until it stops, and remove it while lifting the front side.
5Close all the open covers, and move the machine to a new location.
●The machine is heavy ( Main Unit(P. 468) ). Do not try hard to carry the machine.
●Position yourself toward the front side of the machine and hold the lift handles, then lift up the machine.
Maintenance
431
If the optional paper feeder is attached to the machine
●Unlock the paper feeder before lifting the machine, and transport the paper feeder separately.
Front Side Back Side
6Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
●For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see Getting Started. Manuals and
Their Contents(P. 500)
Maintenance
432
Maintaining and Improving Print Quality
51W4-070
When you cannot obtain a satisfactory print result, such as when the resulting print density or print position is
different than expected, try the following adjustments.
◼Density Adjustment
Adjust the toner density. You can make ne adjustment of toner density by density level. Adjusting Print
Density(P. 434)
◼Print Position Adjustment
For each paper source, you can adjust the print position. Adjusting Print Position(P. 436)
Maintenance
433
Adjusting Print Density
51W4-071
If the resulting print is darker or lighter than expected, you can adjust the toner density. You can make ne adjustment
of the toner density by dividing the whole density range into three areas.
●If <Toner Save> is set to <On>, you cannot use this adjustment function. Toner Save(P. 352)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Print Quality>, and press .
3Adjust the density.
1Select <Density>, and press .
2Use / to adjust the density.
Density adjustment
Set a "+" value to increase the density. Set a "-" value to decrease the density.
3Press .
Making ne adjustment of toner density by density level
You can make ne adjustment of toner density on three density levels - high, medium, and low.
1Select <Density (Fine Adj)>, and press .
2Select the desired density level, and press .
Maintenance
434
3Use / to adjust the density.
Density adjustment
Set a "+" value to increase the density. Set a "-" value to decrease the density.
Example adjustment of each density area
<High>
<Medium>
<Low>
4Press .
●If you want to also make adjustments on other density levels, repeat the operations in steps 2 to 4.
Maintenance
435
Adjusting Print Position
51W4-072
If a document is printed off-center or out of the printable range, adjust the print position. You can adjust the print
position for each paper source.
Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position(P. 436)
Step 2: Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust(P. 437)
Step 3: Adjusting the Print Position for Each Paper Source(P. 438)
Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position
You can perform "Printing Position Adjustment Print" to check the direction and distance to adjust.
●When you want to check the print position for 2-sided printing, set <2-Sided Printing> to <On> in the setting
menu of the operation panel in advance. 2-Sided Printing(P. 416)
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Paper Source>, and press .
3Select the paper source for which you want to check the print position, and press .
4Press ( ).
➠The screen returns to the main screen.
5Press ( ).
Maintenance
436
6Select <Printing Pos. Print>, and press .
7Select <Yes>, and press .
➠A printing position adjustment printout is output.
Step 2: Checking the Direction and Distance to Adjust
When Printing Position Adjustment Print is performed, the print position check marks are printed. Determine the
direction and distance to adjust based on those marks. When the print position is normal, all the marks are printed at
a position 5 mm from the nearest edge of the paper.
How to Check Printing Position Adjustment Printouts
The edge of paper that comes out rst when the paper is output is the top of a Printing Position Adjustment
Print. When you check the print position, make sure which edge of the paper is the top.
●The size of the mark for checking the
print position is as shown in the illustration
below.
When the Print Position Is Off-Center
When the print position check marks are printed off the correct position, you need to adjust the print position.
When you adjust the print position, specify the direction using "+" and "-" and the distance using "mm". Use "-"
to shift the print position upward and "+" to shift it downward (vertical position correction). Use "-" to shift the
print position leftward and "+" to shift it rightward (horizontal position correction).
Vertical direction (<Offset Y>) Horizontal direction (<Offset X>)
Maintenance
437
In the example shown below, to shift the print position 5 mm upward and 1.7 mm rightward, "-5.0 mm" is set in
<Offset Y> and "+1.70 mm" is set in <Offset X>.
Step 3: Adjusting the Print Position for Each Paper Source
After you conrm the direction and distance to adjust, specify an adjusted print position. You can adjust the print
position in the range of -5.0 mm to +5.0 mm in 0.1 mm increments in either direction: vertical and horizontal.
1Set the machine to oine.
●When ( ) is lit, press ( ).
2Press ( ).
3Use / to select <User Maintenance>, and press .
4Select <Adj. Print Position>, and press .
5Select the paper source, and press .
Maintenance
438
●Use <Common> to adjust the print position on the rst page (front side) in 2-sided printing mode regardless
of the paper source.
6Select the direction to adjust, and press .
Print position adjustment for 2-sided printing
●<Offset Y (2-Sided)> and <Offset X (2-Sided)> allow you to adjust the print position on the rst page (front
side). The print position on the second page (back side) will be adjusted based on the values set for each
paper source.
An example of print position adjustment
First page (front side) <Offset Y (2-Sided)> setting value
Second page (back side) <Offset Y (MP Tray)> setting value
7Set a value, and press .
●Based on the printout made by Printing Position Adjustment Print, use / to enter a value.
●To adjust another position or paper source, repeat steps 5 and 7.
8Press ( ).
➠The screen returns to the main screen.
9Press ( ) again.
➠The machine becomes online.
10 Perform the Printing Position Adjustment Print, and check the adjusted print
position on the printout. Step 1: Printing the Current Print Position(P. 436)
Adjusting all print positions
Maintenance
439
You can use <Offset Y> and <Offset X> in the setting menu of the operation panel to adjust the print positions
for all types of printing regardless of the paper source. You can adjust the print position in the range of -50.0
mm to +50.0 mm in 0.5 mm increments in either direction: vertical and horizontal. Offset Y/Offset X(P. 347)
Maintenance
440
Printing Reports and Lists
51W4-073
You can check the condition of consumables and the machine settings by printing reports and lists.
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, options, or other
setting items.
●Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed when [Display Job Log] check box of the Remote UI is not
selected. Hiding the Print Job History(P. 243)
Conguration Page
You can check the machine settings ( Setup Menu(P. 310) ), the contents registered in the machine, and other
information in list form. The other information includes the amount of remaining toner, the number of printed pages,
and the capacity of the memory (RAM) mounted on the machine. Setting items whose name is preceded by an asterisk
(*) are the items whose setting was changed from the factory default.
( ) <Conguration Page> <Yes>
Example:
Network Status Print
You can check the settings about the network congured in the machine ( Network(P. 326) ) in list form. The
information about the security including the address lter settings and IPSec settings is also printed.
Maintenance
441
( ) <Network Status Print> <Yes>
Example:
Consmbl. Status Prt.
The information such as toner remaining amount, warning messages, and information on where you can purchase
new toner cartridges can be viewed in list form.
( ) <Consmbl. Status Prt.> <Yes>
Example:
IPSec Policy List
You can check the list of policy names and the IPSec settings registered in the machine by printing an IPSec Policy List.
Maintenance
442
( ) <IPSec Policy List> <Yes>
Example:
E-Mail RX Log List
You can check a log consisting of subjects and received date/time of e-mails received in the machine in list form.
( ) <E-Mail Print Utility> <E-Mail RX Log List> <Yes>
Example:
Page Count List
You can check the number of pages printed for each department by printing a report when [Department ID
Management] is enabled.
Maintenance
443
( ) <Page Count List> <Yes>
Example:
Counter Report
You can print an aggregate report of the number of pages printed for each counter.
( ) <Counter Report> <Yes>
Example:
Print MEAP Sys. Info
You can check the information about MEAP applications installed in the machine and the MEAP system applications in
list form if the MEAP function is enabled.
( ) <Print MEAP Sys. Info> <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
444
PS Mode List
The settings for use of the PS mode and the internal information items registered in the machine are printed in list
form.
Conguration Page(P. 446)
Font List(P. 446)
◼Conguration Page
You can check the machine settings ( PS(P. 395) ) and the contents registered in the machine in list form.
( ) <PS Utility> <Conguration Page> <Yes>
Example:
◼Font List
You can check the fonts available in PS mode in list form.
Maintenance
446
( ) <PS Utility> <Font List> <Yes>
Example:
Stored Job List *1
You can print a list of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine.
( ) <Stored Job List> <Yes>
Example:
Job Print Log *2
You can print a log of documents printed from the computer in list from.
( ) <Job Print Log> <Yes>
Maintenance
447
Example:
Stored Job Print Log *1*2
You can print a print log of documents stored in the SD card installed on the machine in list form.
( ) <Stored Job Print Log> <Yes>
Example:
Report Print Log *2
You can print the settings and a print log of reports in list form.
( ) <Report Print Log> <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
448
Viewing the Counter Value
51W4-074
You can check the number of printed pages.
Checking Total Number of Printed Pages(P. 450)
Checking the Number of Pages Printed for Each Department(P. 450)
Checking Total Number of Printed Pages
You can check the total number of printed pages.
( ) <Check Counter> <101: Total 1>, <113: Total (B&W/Sml)>, or <114:Total 1(2-
Sided)>
Checking the Number of Pages Printed for Each Department
You can check the number of pages printed for each department.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Department ID Management].
Maintenance
450
➠The number of printed pages is displayed for each Department ID under [Printed Pages].
To print the check result
Page Count List(P. 443)
To clear the page count to zero
●When you want to clear the page count to zero for each department, click the text link under [Dept. ID], and
click [Clear Count] [OK].
Maintenance
451
●If you want to return the counts of all departments to zero, click [Clear All Counts] [OK].
Maintenance
452
Checking Consumables
51W4-075
You can use the operation panel to check the information of the consumables.
Checking Paper(P. 453)
Checking the Toner Cartridge Model(P. 453)
Checking the Toner Cartridge Status(P. 453)
Checking Paper
You can display the currently specied paper size and paper type, and the remaining paper level for each paper
source.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Paper Information> Select the paper
source
Paper source selection
Select the paper source of which information is displayed.
Checking the Toner Cartridge Model
You can display the model number of the toner cartridge for the machine.
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Toner Cart. Model>
Checking the Toner Cartridge Status
Displays the toner cartridge status. Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the toner runs out.
Maintenance
453
( ) <Consumables Info.> <Remaining Toner>
●The displayed values can be used only as a guide and may differ from the actual status.
Maintenance
454
Initializing Menu
51W4-077
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setup Menu(P. 310) ) to the factory default settings.
Do not press the power switch when the initialization is in progress
●If the machine is turned OFF during the initialization, it may be damaged.
If a Remote UI Access PIN has been specied
●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After performing initialization, respecify a Remote UI Access
PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 215)
●When you want to initialize the network settings, follow the procedure in Initializing the Network
Settings(P. 457) .
●When you want to initialize the settings in <Adj. Print Position>, follow the procedure in Adj. Print
Position(P. 358) .
( ) <Initialize Menu> <Yes> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a
Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Maintenance
456
Initializing the Network Settings
51W4-078
You can restore the network settings ( Network(P. 326) ) to the factory default settings.
Do not initialize the network settings when the machine is printing or receiving print
data
●Doing so may result in incorrect printing, paper jams, or damage to the machine.
( ) <Network> Check the message <Init. Network
Set.> <Yes> Perform a hard reset ( Performing a Hard Reset(P. 408) )
Maintenance
457
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 459
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 460
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 461
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 462
Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 463
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 465
Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 467
Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 468
Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 470
Paper Feeder PF-C ........................................................................................................................................ 474
Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 475
Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 479
System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 483
Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 484
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 485
Options .............................................................................................................................................................. 487
Optional Equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 488
System Options ............................................................................................................................................ 489
Installing the ROM ................................................................................................................................. 491
Installing an SD Card ............................................................................................................................. 495
Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 500
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 501
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 502
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 505
Managing MEAP Applications ........................................................................................................................... 507
Using FTP Clients ............................................................................................................................................... 508
Preparing for Using the FTP Server .............................................................................................................. 509
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print) .................................................................................................................. 512
Specifying Settings via FTP Client ................................................................................................................. 514
Others ................................................................................................................................................................ 521
Basic Windows Operations ........................................................................................................................... 522
Font Samples ................................................................................................................................................ 530
Notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 535
Appendix
458
Appendix
51W4-079
This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
Appendix
459
Third Party Software
51W4-07A
For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).
Appendix
460
Feature Highlights
51W4-07C
Give the features that are described in this section a try. The features are grouped under three headings: "Going
Green and Saving Money," "Improving Eciency," and "So Much More."
Appendix
461
Going Green and Saving Money
51W4-07E
There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.
2-Sided Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper. Use 2-sided printing to save paper not only on large print jobs but also
when you only want to print a few pages. To save even more, combine 2-sided printing with N on 1 printing of
multiple pages on one sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single sheet, which is both economical
and environmentally friendly.
Printing from a Computer(P. 70)
Sleep Mode
If you will not be using the machine for a while, you can save power by putting it into sleep mode, either
manually or automatically. You don't need to turn OFF the power each time, but you can still have the machine
minimize its power consumption. The auto shutdown function can boost the savings, by automatically turning
OFF the machine if it remains idle for a longer time. These convenient functions work in the background to save
power and money every day.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 63)
Setting Auto Shutdown Time(P. 65)
Appendix
462
Improving Eciency
51W4-07F
Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more ecient.
Print without Application Programs
You can send PDF/PS/EPS/JPEG/TIFF/XPS data from the Remote UI directly to the machine for printing. You can
also print without a computer by connecting a USB memory device to the machine. There is no need to open
les, so you do not need to start an application program. This is very convenient when you are in a hurry and do
not have access to a computer.
Printing without Opening a File (Direct Print)(P. 101)
Printing from USB Memory (USB Direct Print)(P. 77)
Remote Management with Remote UI
The Remote UI allows you to manage the machine remotely from the computer at your desk. You can check the
remaining amounts of paper and toner cartridge, and check the current status of print jobs to decide if you
should temporarily interrupt print jobs to print urgent documents or move documents up among the jobs
waiting to be printed. Save time and trouble by eliminating trips between your desk and the printer.
Using Remote UI(P. 283) .
Appendix
463
Save Time with Shortcuts
When you have a number of documents to print, it would be convenient to print them all with one operation.
Canon PageComposer allows you to combine multiple documents and print them all at once. You can also save
frequently printed documents like fax cover sheets in the machine's SD card, and then print them directly from
the operation panel. You don't need to return to your computer and start the printer driver. These shortcuts
save time and allow you to work more eciently.
Printing from a Computer(P. 70)
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 92)
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided
printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to
conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied.
Printing from a Computer(P. 70)
Appendix
464
So Much More
51W4-07H
There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the oce, or even on the road.
Using a smartphone/tablet
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, Canon Mobile Application comes in handy.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age
of speed.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device(P. 118)
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed
documents. With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from
wherever you want.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 128) .
Keep Your Printouts Private
Normally, when you print something from your computer, it comes out of the printer right away. However, if
you have sensitive documents, this may not be what you want. Just use secure printing and no one will be able
to print your documents without entering your password on the machine's operation panel. Don't let your
condential documents lie exposed on the tray for everyone to see.
Appendix
465
Specications
51W4-07J
Specications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
◼Machine Specications
Main Unit(P. 468)
Available Paper(P. 470)
◼Specications of Optional Equipment
Paper Feeder PF-C(P. 474)
◼Functional Specications
Printer Functions(P. 475)
Management Functions(P. 479)
◼Environment To Use the Machine
System Environment(P. 483)
Network Environment(P. 484)
Appendix
467
Main Unit
51W4-07K
●For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see " Available Paper(P. 470) ."
Type Desktop
Color Supported Black and White
Resolution for Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Number of Tones 256
Acceptable Paper Stock Paper Sizes
●Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
●Min (Paper Drawer): 105.0 mm x 148.0 mm
●Min (Multi-Purpose Tray): 76.2 mm x 127.0 mm
Paper Weight
●Paper Drawer: 60 g/m² to 120 g/m²
●Multi-Purpose Tray: 60 g/m² to 199 g/m²
Paper Type Available Paper(P. 470)
Warm-Up Time *1 After Powering ON
30.0 seconds or less
Returning from the Sleep Mode
3.0 seconds or less
First Print Time
(A4)
Approx. 5.7 seconds
Print Speed *2
(A4)
43.0 sheets/minute
Paper Feeding System/Capacity *3 Paper Drawer
550 sheets (80 g/m²)/640 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Multi-Purpose Tray
100 sheets (80 g/m²)/100 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Paper Output System/Capacity *3 Output Tray
250 sheets (68 g/m²)
Appendix
468
Power Source AC 220 V - 240 V, 3.6 A, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption *1 Maximum Power Consumption
1,380 W or less
During Sleep Mode
●Approx. 1.9 W (USB connection)
●Approx. 1.2 W (wired LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.4 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
417 mm x 376 mm x 330 mm
Weight Main Unit *4
Approx. 11.5 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 485)
Installation Space See "Getting Started" Manuals and Their Contents(P. 500)
Memory Capacity RAM: 1 GB
Environmental Conditions ●Temperature: 10 °C to 30 °C
●Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
*1May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.
*2Print speed is measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper printed with 100% print ratio to original on one-
sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print speed
may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.
*3May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
*4The toner cartridge is not included.
Appendix
469
Available Paper
51W4-07L
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.
◼Supported Paper Sizes
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Size Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-Sided
Printing *2
A4
B5
A5 *3
A6
Legal (LGL)
Letter (LTR)
Statement (STMT)
Executive (EXEC)
Foolscap (FLSC)
16K
Index Card
*1Includes the optional Paper Feeder PF-C.
*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Can be loaded in portrait orientation.
*4The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 105.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 355.6 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm
*5The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 76.2 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 127.0 mm to 355.6 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 127.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 127.0 mm to 216.0 mm
*6The following sizes are available:
●Width 210.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 270.0 mm to 355.6 mm
Appendix
470
Paper Size Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose
Tray
Automatic 2-Sided
Printing *2
Indian Legal (India-LGL)
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4 on 1 Postcard
Envelope NAGAGATA 3
Envelope YOUGATANAGA 3 (Younaga 3)
Envelope No. 10 (COM10)
Envelope Monarch
Envelope C5 (ISO-C5)
Envelope DL
Custom Paper Size *4 *5 *6
*1Includes the optional Paper Feeder PF-C.
*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Can be loaded in portrait orientation.
*4The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 105.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 355.6 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 148.0 mm to 216.0 mm
*5The following sizes are available:
●When loaded in portrait orientation (only with the Canon Generic Plus UFR II printer driver used):
Width 76.2 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 127.0 mm to 355.6 mm
●When loaded in landscape orientation:
Width 127.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 127.0 mm to 216.0 mm
*6The following sizes are available:
●Width 210.0 mm to 216.0 mm, Length 270.0 mm to 355.6 mm
●Some paper sizes may not be displayed depending on the printer driver. If the paper size that you want to
use is not displayed, download the UFR II / UFRII LT V4 printer driver from the Canon website. If you cannot
download, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Appendix
471
◼Supported Paper Types
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
●Print quality may deteriorate depending on the paper type used.
: Available : Unavailable
Paper Type Paper Drawer *1 Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *2
Thin 1 *3*4 60 g/m²
Plain 1 *3 60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Plain 2 *3 75 g/m² to 89 g/m²
Heavy 1 90 g/m² to 105 g/m²
Heavy 2 106 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Heavy 3 121 g/m² to 149 g/m²
Heavy 4 150 g/m² to 199 g/m²
Bond 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m²
Bond 2 75 g/m² to 104 g/m²
Bond 3 105 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Labels
Postcard *5
Envelope
Envelope H *6
*1Includes the optional Paper Feeder PF-C.
*2Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*3Recycled paper is also available.
*4If the <Plain 1> setting results in curled printouts, change the setting to <Thin 1>.
*5The inkjet printable postcard or reply postcard cannot be used.
*6Specify <Envelope H> as the paper type if printouts come out faded due to poor toner xing with <Envelope> specied.
Appendix
472
Paper Feeder PF-C
51W4-08F
Paper Sizes ●Max: 216.0 mm x 355.6 mm
●Min: 105.0 mm x 148.0 mm
Paper Weight 60 g/m² to 120 g/m²
Paper Drawers Capacity *550 sheets (80 g/m²)/640 sheets (64 g/m²) x 1
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
417 mm x 373 mm x 156 mm
Weight Approx. 4.0 kg
*May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
Appendix
474
Printer Functions
51W4-08H
◼UFR II Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 470)
Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 468)
Resolution Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II
Protocol Supported TCP/IP, SMB (with SD card installed)
Resident Fonts None
Interface USB
USB2.0
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
◼PS Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 470)
Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 468)
Resolution Data Processing
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) Adobe®PostScript®3TM
(*Genuine Adobe PostScript. Support version is 3018)
Protocol Supported TCP/IP, SMB (with SD card installed)
Appendix
475
Resident Fonts 136 Roman
Interface USB
USB2.0
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
◼PCL Printer Function
Type Internal
Print Size Available Paper(P. 470)
Print Speed Same as "Print Speed" in "Main Unit" Main Unit(P. 468)
Resolution Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi (only for PCL6), 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5
Protocol Supported TCP/IP, SMB (with SD card installed)
Resident Fonts PCL fonts: 93 Roman, 10 Bitmap fonts, 2 OCR fonts, Andalé Mono WT, THAI Fonts 12, J/K/S/
T*1 (Japanese, Korean, Simplied and Traditional Chinese), Barcode fonts*2
Interface USB
USB2.0
Wired LAN
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
*1Requires optional PCL International Font Set
*2Require optional Barcode Printing Kit
◼USB Direct Print Function
Printable File Formats ●PDF
●XPS
●TIFF (MH/MR/MMR/Packbits/JPEG/LZW)
●JPEG (Standard DCT method)
◼Stored Job Print Function
●Up to 1,000 documents (3 GB total) can be stored on an SD card.
Appendix
476
◼Direct Print Function
Printable File Formats *1 ●PDF (Version 1.7)*2
●PS
●EPS
●JPEG
●TIFF
●XPS
*1Printing may not be performed properly depending on the data.
*2The machine supports the PDF encryption algorithm of RC4 128 bit/AES 128 bit/AES 256 bit.
The maximum printable le size is as shown below.
●PDF/XPS les (with SD card installed) : 2 GB
(without SD card installed) : 20 MB
●JPEG les (with SD card installed) : 2 GB
(without SD card installed) : 2 GB
●TIFF les*1 (with SD card installed) : 2 GB
(without SD card installed) : 2 GB
*1Even TIFF les not exceeding the upper limit of size may not be printed depending on the le structure. In this case, set
<TIFF Spooler> to <On> and try printing again. TIFF Spooler(P. 383)
◼E-Mail Print Function
Outline of E-Mail Print
General
●An e-mail message is printed with e-mail header information.
●An HTML e-mail message is printed as a plain text.
●If a line (without line feed) in an e-mail message contains more than 1,000 characters, excessive characters
are placed on a new line and may not be correctly printed.
When <TIFF Spooler> is set to <On>
●If the e-mail message size exceeds 25 MB or the e-mail size exceeds 1.5 GB, the e-mail message is not
printed.
●If the e-mail header data exceeds 20 KB, the excessive data is not printed.
●If no SD card is installed, TIFF les exceeding 40 MB in size may not be printed.
●If the SD card has no sucient free space, E-Mail Print is not available.
●When the toner cartridge is nearly empty, no e-mails can be received.
Appendix
477
Supported Encoding Formats ●7 bit
●8 bit
●binary
●uuencode
●x-uuencode
●base64
●quoted-printable
Supported Character Sets *●us-ascii
●iso-8859-1
●iso-8859-15
Printable Formats of Attached Image Files ●JPEG
●TIFF
*If any character set is not specied, "us-ascii" is applied.
Attached image les
●Some les are unavailable depending on the le structure.
●You can print up to three attached les for each e-mail. (Excessive attached les are not printed.)
●If the SD card is installed, the printable le size is 100 MB or less per le.
Appendix
478
Management Functions
51W4-08J
◼Firewall Settings
●Up to 16 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.
●The packet lters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.
●Up to 50 MAC addresses can be specied.
◼IPSec
●IPSec that is supported by the machine conforms to RFC2401, RFC2402, RFC2406, and RFC4305.
Operating system
●Windows 7
●Windows 8
●Windows 8.1
●Windows 10
Connection mode Transport mode
Key exchange protocol
IKEv1 (main mode)
Authentication method
●Pre-shared key
●Digital signature
Hash algorithm (and key length)
●HMAC-MD5-96
●HMAC-SHA1-96
Encryption algorithm (and key length)
●3DES-CBC
●AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
Key exchange algorithm/group (and key length)
Die-Hellman (DH)
●Group 1 (768 bits)
●Group 2 (1024 bits)
●Group 14 (2048 bits)
ESP
Hash algorithm
●HMAC-MD5-96
●HMAC-SHA1-96
Encryption algorithm (and key length)
●3DES-CBC
●AES-CBC (128 bits, 192 bits, or 256 bits)
AH Hash algorithm
●HMAC-MD5-96
●HMAC-SHA1-96
●IPSec supports communication to a unicast address (or a single device).
●The machine cannot use both IPSec and DHCPv6 at the same time.
Appendix
479
◼Registration of Keys and Certicates
●If you install a key or CA certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
Format CA certicate: X.509 DER/PEM
File extension CA certicate: ".cer" or ".pem"
Public key algorithm
(and key length)
●RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)
●DSA (1024 bits, 2048 bits, 3072 bits)
●ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
Certicate signature algorithm
●RSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384*, SHA-512*, MD2, MD5
●DSA: SHA-1
●ECDSA: SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512
Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*RSA-SHA-384 and RSA-SHA-512 are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
●The machine does not support use of a certicate revocation list (CRL).
◼Maximum Number of Job Logs That Can Be Displayed
[Print Job/Direct Print] Up to 200 documents printed from computers and USB memory devices are
displayed.
[Stored Job] The history of up to 200 printed documents stored in the machine is displayed (only
when the SD card is installed).
[Report] The history of up to 16 documents printed as setting lists and reports is displayed (up
to 128 documents when the SD card is installed).
[E-Mail Print] The history of up to 16 e-mails printed after received is displayed (up to 128
documents when the SD card is installed).
◼E-Mail Reception Error Codes
The details of error codes are as follows.
Error Code Cause Action
407
The POP3 mail server was
disconnected. ●Consult your network administrator.
●If the error occurs frequently with the same e-mail
data, check whether the e-mail data is normal.
Data of 1 KB (1024 bytes) could
not be received within 10
minutes during e-mail reception.
408
The "ERR" response was
returned from the POP3 mail
server.
Consult your network administrator.
Appendix
480
412
Data of 1 KB (1024 bytes) could
not be received within 10
minutes during e-mail reception.
●Consult your network administrator.
●If the error occurs frequently with the same e-mail
data, check whether the e-mail data is normal.
420 The e-mail data size exceeds 1.5
GB.
If the SD card is installed on the machine, the data size of
an e-mail to send must be 1.5 GB or less.
421 The e-mail message size
exceeds 25 MB.
If the SD card is installed on the machine, the message
size of an e-mail to send must be 25 MB or less.
422 The size of an attached le
exceeds 100 MB.
If the SD card is installed on the machine, the size of each
attached le must be 100 MB or less.
423 A received attached le is in an
unsupported format.
Attached les must be in JPEG or TIFF format. Do not
attach any les of other formats to an e-mail to send.
424 More than three les are
attached. Excessive attached les are not printed.
430 The sender of the received e-
mail is unknown. Make sure to set a sender before sending e-mails.
431
A divided e-mail has been
received.
Take the following action to prevent e-mails from being
sent as a divided e-mail.
●Reduce the size of an e-mail to send. (Reduce the e-
mail size to be less than the one that causes a divided
e-mail.)
●Congure the application to prevent e-mails from
being divided before sending.
The received e-mail contains
unsupported encoding or
character codes.
For e-mails to send, use the encoding and character codes
supported by the machine. Outline of E-Mail
Print(P. 477)
The received e-mail is in an
unsupported format.
Check the e-mail format. We recommend sending e-mails
in text format.
432 The received data is invalid. Check whether the data of the sent e-mail is normal.
433 The received e-mail is in HTML
format.
This machine does not support HTML e-mails. (An HTML e-
mail message is printed as a plain text.)
434 No message is in the e-mail. The received e-mail contains no message.
435 Forwarded fax document is
illegal.
The attached le is not in TIFF format or exceeds the
printable size.
436 Forwarded fax document has no
attached le. No document is printed due to no attached le.
440 Printing was canceled for some
reason. Resend the e-mail.
441 An error has occurred during
processing. Resend the e-mail.
499 An error has occurred in the
machine.
Take appropriate action according to the message on the
display of the machine. For more information, see
"Troubleshooting (FAQ)" on the online manual website.
●If two or more errors occur, only the error code of a lower number is displayed.
Appendix
481
System Environment
51W4-08K
System Requirements for the Remote UI *1 Windows
●Internet Explorer 7.0 and later
System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows
●Internet Explorer 9 and later
●Microsoft Edge
●Firefox
●Firefox ESR
●Chrome*2
macOS
●Safari
●Firefox
●Chrome*2
Linux
●Firefox
iOS
●Safari*2
Android
●Chrome*2
*1Before changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.
*2Only when browsing the manual on the Internet.
Appendix
483
Network Environment
51W4-08L
◼Network Specications
Protocol Supported TCP/IP
●Frame type: Ethernet II
●Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10
Mobile Print
Interface Interface supporting 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T
Appendix
484
Consumables
51W4-07R
This section describes the consumables of the machine and the estimated timing for
replacing them. Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe
safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum
print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.
●To handle and store consumables, observe the precautions below.
Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9)
Consumables(P. 10)
●Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or document type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
◼Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridges
The average yield and the weight of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.
●Average yield*
5,100 sheets
●Weight
Approx. 0.8 kg
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
Canon Cartridge 056 L
●Average yield*
5,100 sheets
●Weight
Approx. 0.8 kg
Canon Cartridge 056
●Average yield*
10,000 sheets
●Weight
Approx. 1.0 kg
Canon Cartridge 056 H
●Average yield*
21,000 sheets
●Weight
Approx. 1.4 kg
Appendix
485
*The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see global.canon/ctc.
●When replacing toner cartridges Replacing the Toner Cartridges(P. 425)
Appendix
486
Optional Equipment
51W4-07S
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional items described below. Optional items can
be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Paper Feeder PF-C
Use of the optional paper feeder allows you to load a different size of paper than
that loadable in the standard paper drawer, thus reducing the time and labor of
paper size replacement.
Installation Method
See "Getting Started." Manuals and Their Contents(P. 500)
●You can install up to three units of paper feeder in the machine.
Appendix
488
System Options
51W4-08S
The functionality of the machine can be fully utilized by using the optional equipment described below. Optional
equipment can be purchased from the retail outlet where you purchased the machine or from your local Canon dealer.
Barcode Printing Kit(P. 489)
PCL International Font Set(P. 489)
SD CARD(P. 490)
Barcode Printing Kit
If the Barcode Printing Kit is installed on the machine, barcode printing mode is added, enabling
barcodes to be printed from your computer.
The Barcode Printing Kit contains the following barcode fonts.
●OCR-B
●Symb. FontInform
●Symbole stethos
●BarDIMM ©1997
●USPS ZEBRA+4Stat
This option enables you to generate barcodes in various formats. Note that if you want to print
barcodes, PCL must be enabled. For information on using the Barcode Printing Kit, see the
Barcode Printing Guide (PDF manual).
Installation Method
Installing the ROM(P. 491)
PCL International Font Set
If the PCL International Font Set is installed on the machine, the following fonts are added for a
PCL printer. As a result, you can output using multiple languages in a SAP Unicode environment.
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection J (Japanese Version)
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection K (Korean Version)
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection S (Simplied Chinese Version)
●Andale® and WorldType® Collection T (Traditional Chinese Version)
In order to support differences in character design depending on the region, four font versions
are enabled.
Installation Method
Installing the ROM(P. 491)
Appendix
489
SD CARD
You can install the SD card to use the functions described below.
●Secured Print
Printing a Document Secured by a PIN (Secured Print)(P. 88)
●Stored Job Print
Printing a Document Stored in the Machine (Stored Job Print)(P. 92)
●Interrupt Print, Priority Print, Pause/Resume
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 293)
●SMB Print
Conguring SMB(P. 194)
●Spooler
Spooler(P. 340)
Installation Method
Installing an SD Card(P. 495)
●When you dispose of a used SD card, perform <Completely Del. Data> for it or physically destroy it to
prevent your personal information from being leaked. Installing an SD Card(P. 495)
Appendix
490
Installing the ROM
51W4-07U
This section describes how to install the Barcode Printing Kit or PCL
International Font Set in the machine. The ROM is used connected to the
ROM connectors inside the right cover of the machine. Read the
precautions in Installation(P. 3) before installing the ROM.
Precautions when installing the ROM
●Do not cause any metal such as screws to come into contact with the circuit boards in the machine. Doing so
may result in damage to the machine.
●Do not touch the internal parts, printed wiring, connectors, or switches. Doing so may result in damage to
the machine.
●Do not turn ON the power when the ROM cover is open. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
Precautions for avoiding static electricity
The ROM contains parts that are sensitive to static electricity. Observe the following precautions for preventing
the ROM from being damaged by static electricity.
●Touch a metal portion in the room to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the ROM.
●Do not touch any item that is likely to generate static electricity, such as a display, during work.
●To avoid the inuence of static electricity, do not remove the ROM from the packing material until just before
connecting it to the ROM connectors.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the power, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power
switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35)
2Remove the right cover.
1While pushing the catch, slightly open the cover toward you.
Appendix
491
2Remove the right cover in the direction indicated by the arrow.
3Remove the ROM cover.
1Use a coin to remove the screws.
2Open the ROM cover, and remove it in the direction indicated by the arrow.
4Install the ROM.
●While aligning the ROM with the two ROM connectors of the machine, securely push it until it stops.
When disconnecting the ROM
Appendix
492
●Hold the edges of the ROM and pull it out as shown in the illustration below.
5Put the ROM cover back into position.
1Close the ROM cover by pushing in the catch of the ROM cover in the direction indicated by the
arrow.
2Use a coin to reattach the screws.
6Insert the right cover in the direction indicated by the arrow, and close it while
pushing the catch.
●When you want to install an SD card at the same time, proceed to Installing an SD Card(P. 495) .
Appendix
493
◼Checking that Barcode Printing Kit Is Properly Installed
Print the Conguration Page(P. 402) , and conrm that "BarDIMM" is
displayed in "PCL"
If "BarDIMM" is displayed, the ROM is properly installed.
If "BarDIMM" is not displayed
●The ROM is not installed properly. Remove the ROM from the machine, and
reconnect it.
Appendix
494
Installing an SD Card
51W4-07W
This section describes how to mount and initialize an SD card. Insert the
SD card into the SD card slot on the back side of the machine. Read the
precautions in Installation(P. 3) before installing the SD card. Note
that the data in the machine that is stored to the SD card is all subjected to
encryption. This ensures safe use of the SD card on a computer or in other
situation because the encrypted data in the SD card is protected against
unauthorized extraction.
●Before mounting the SD card, check whether the SD card is write-protected. If the card is write-protected,
unlock the card before inserting it.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the power, shut down the machine from the operation panel without using the power
switch. Turning OFF the Power (Performing a Shutdown)(P. 35)
2Remove the SD card slot cover.
1Use a coin to remove the screws.
2Open the SD card slot cover, and remove it in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Appendix
495
3Install an SD Card.
●Insert the card into the SD card slot until it clicks.
When removing the SD card
●Push the SD card until it clicks as shown in the illustration, release your nger, and then remove it.
4Reinstall the SD card slot cover.
1Close the SD card slot cover by pushing in the catch of the cover.
2Use a coin to reattach the screws.
Appendix
496
SD Card Anti-theft Security Slot
●The SD card slot cover is provided with a security slot, to which you can
attach security wire or equivalent.
●The hole of the security slot is 7.6 mm wide and 3.6 mm high.
●For inquires about the security slot, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
◼Initializing the SD Card
When you turn ON the power for the rst time after installing the SD card, <Format
SD Card?> appears on the display. Press to start initializing the SD card. When the
initialization is completed, the SD card is ready to use.
If <Format SD Card?> is not displayed
●Initialize the SD card by selecting <Format> under <SD Card Maintenance> in the setting menu of the
operation panel. SD Card Maintenance(P. 363)
Appendix
497
◼Checking that the SD Card Is Properly Installed on the Machine
Print the Conguration Page(P. 441) , and the SD card is installed properly
if "SD Card" in "Control Menu" is "On."
If no SD card status information is indicated
●The SD card is not installed properly. Remove the SD card from the
machine, and remount it.
◼Conguring the Information of the SD Card
If an SD card was added after the printer driver was installed, you need to congure the SD card information in the
printer driver. Options(P. 487)
◼Deleting All Data in an SD Card
Before disposing of an SD card, you can use the procedure below to delete all data in the card. The procedure deletes
even those fragments of data that cannot be deleted normally. This eliminates the risk of your data being red by third
parties, thus you can dispose of the SD card safely.
●This function cannot be used with any SD card other than that indicated as an available optional device.
1Set the machine to oine.
●When ( ) is lit, press ( ).
2Press ( )
3Use / to select <User Maintenance>, and press .
4Proceed with <SD Card Maintenance> <Completely Del. Data> in this order.
●When a message appears, press .
Appendix
498
5Select <Yes>, and press .
➠The machine is restarted. After that, the machine is turned OFF automatically.
●When <Completely Del. Data> has been performed, the setting for <SD Card> changes to <Off>.
Appendix
499
Manuals and Their Contents
51W4-07X
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing the
packing materials to setting up the machine.
User's Guide
(This Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed
using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a
keyword to search for pages on a specic topic. Using User's Guide(P. 501)
Appendix
500
Using User's Guide
51W4-07Y
The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the
functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are
looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify
how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.
◼Screen Layout of User's Guide
This section describes the screens conguring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons. Screen
Layout of User's Guide(P. 502)
◼Viewing User's Guide
This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and
the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information
contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 505)
◼Specifying How the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks
You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to t to the device you use to
view the User's Guide.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
Search the contents
●You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the
screen.
Search by keyword
●Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing
the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter
phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for
multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see
Search(P. 503) .
Appendix
501
Screen Layout of User's Guide
51W4-080
The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when User's Guide is started.
/
Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.
/
Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each
click on switches between hiding and showing the display.
Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
Appendix
502
Topic Page
Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
browser.
/
Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to return to the page top.
Search
Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page
you are looking for.
Appendix
503
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages
containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for
pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.
Search result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
●The specied keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.
Appendix
504
Viewing User's Guide
51W4-081
This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and
cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See
also these instructions.
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information are indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay
attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if
not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to
these cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items
carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these
items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the
machine or property.
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations
for a procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type Example
Keys on the operation panel ( )
Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer Settings>
<Paper is jammed.>
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
/ Used in This Manual
The / keys are used to select a desired setting. They are only described at the rst applicable occurrence
of their use in a page and omitted from the second time onward. For example, the / keys appear in Step
2, but are omitted in Step 3.
Example:
1Press ( ).
2Use / to select <Network>, and press .
Appendix
505
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
Computer Screens Used in This Manual
Depending on the operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may
slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of the printer driver and software may differ
depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
The illustrations of the toner cartridge used in the User's Guide are those for the Canon Cartridge 056.
Appendix
506
Managing MEAP Applications
51W4-083
You can install MEAP applications (function-enhancing software) on the machine to add various features. You can
customize the functions according to your needs, for example, to congure an authentication system with IC cards or
to manage printouts based on logs. When you want to manage MEAP applications, access the machine from your
computer via a Web browser. For more information, see Function Guide for MEAP Application Management .
Appendix
507
Using FTP Clients
51W4-084
You can use an FTP client to access the FTP server of the machine and specify settings for document printing and
networking. Printing and settings can be performed with Command Prompt installed in the operating system as
standard, requiring neither specic drivers nor specic applications.
Preparing for Using the FTP Server
Specify settings to enable communication between the machine and the clients. Preparing for Using the FTP
Server(P. 509)
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print)
You can print a document sent to the machine via FTP. Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print)(P. 512)
Specifying Settings via FTP Client
You can download the machine settings in text format and edit them. Specifying Settings via FTP
Client(P. 514)
Appendix
508
Preparing for Using the FTP Server
51W4-085
Because the factory default settings prevent operations from FTP clients, specify settings to allow the operations.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Management Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 284)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [FTP Settings].
Appendix
509
5Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[Use FTP Print]
To perform printing via FTP client, select the check box. Otherwise, clear the check box.
[FTP Print User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name used to log on to the FTP server when performing FTP
Print.
●You cannot set "root."
[Set/Change Password]
Select the check box to set the FTP Print password, and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password in the [Conrm] text box.
●If you click [OK] with the check box selected and the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes left blank, the
currently set password is deleted.
[Use UTF-8 to Display Name of FTP Print Job]
Select the check box if you are using UTF-8 character code for the name of the le to be printed.
[Allow Setting via FTP]
Select the check box to allow setting changes of the machine via FTP client. When not allowing setting
changes, clear the check box.
6Perform a hard reset.
Appendix
510
●Click [Device Control], select [Hard Reset], and then click [Execute].
➠The settings are enabled after the hard reset is performed.
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable FTP print, and FTP settings from the setting menu of the operation panel.
FTP(P. 330)
LINKS
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print)(P. 512)
Specifying Settings via FTP Client(P. 514)
Appendix
511
Printing via FTP Client (FTP Print)
51W4-086
Documents in TEXT/JPEG/TIFF format can be printed from FTP clients via network. Check the IP address set to the
machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 441) ). If you are unsure of the IP address, contact your network
administrator.
1Start [Command Prompt].
●Open the [Start] menu and select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt].
For macOS users
●Start the Terminal.
For UNIX users
●Display the console screen.
2Copy a document that you want to print to the directory displayed in Command
Prompt.
●In an example of a screen, the document is copied into the "USER_NAME" folder in [Users] on drive C:.
3Enter "ftp <IP address of the machine>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●Example: ftp 192.168.1.45
4Enter the FTP Print user name and press the [ENTER] key.
●The default user name is "guest".
●Anonymous (a user with no account) cannot be used to log on.
5Enter the FTP Print password and press the [ENTER] key.
●The default password is "7654321".
➠"230 User <FTP Print user name> logged in." is displayed.
6Enter "bin" and press the [ENTER] key.
Appendix
512
➠The data transfer mode is changed to binary mode.
●You also need to specify binary mode when printing a text document.
7Enter "put <File name to print>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●Example: put sample.txt
➠The document is printed.
8Enter "quit" and press the [ENTER] key.
9Enter "exit" and press the [ENTER] key.
➠Command Prompt exits.
Appendix
513
Specifying Settings via FTP Client
51W4-087
You can specify settings, such as the network settings of the machine, from an FTP client via TCP/IP network. Check the
IP address set to the machine in advance ( Network Status Print(P. 441) ). If you are unsure of the IP address,
contact your network administrator.
1Start [Command Prompt].
●Open the [Start] menu and select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Command Prompt].
For macOS users
●Start the Terminal.
For UNIX users
●Display the console screen.
2Enter "ftp <IP address of the machine>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●Example: ftp 192.168.1.45
3Enter "root" for the user name and press the [ENTER] key.
4Enter the System Manager password and press the [ENTER] key.
●The default password is "7654321". Setting the System Manager Password(P. 205)
➠"230 User root logged in." is displayed.
5Enter "cd cong" and press the [ENTER] key.
6Enter "get CONFIG <le name>" and press the [ENTER] key.
●"CONFIG" must be all uppercase.
●Any characters can be used in <le name> (example: get CONFIG Setting.txt).
➠The setting le is downloaded to the directory that is displayed when Command Prompt is started. In an
example of a screen, the le is downloaded to the "USER_NAME" folder in [Users] on drive C:.
Appendix
514
7Edit the downloaded cong le by using the text editor such as Notepad.
List of cong le setting items
General Menu (General Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
DEVICE_NAME
(Device Name) Up to 128 characters LBP325x
SYS_LOC
(Location) Up to 128 characters (Blank)
SYS_CONTACT
(System Manager) Up to 32 characters (Blank)
ROOT_PWD
(System Manager Password) Up to 16 alphanumeric characters 7654321
USER_JOB_CONT
(Allow End-User's Job Operation) ON, OFF OFF
LINK_URL1
(Support Link URL) Up to 512 alphanumeric characters http://canon.jp
TCP/IP Menu (TCP/IP Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
INT_ADDR
(IP Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
NET_MASK
(Subnet Mask) IP Address 0.0.0.0
DEF_GW
(Gateway Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
DHCP_ENB
(Use DHCP) ON, OFF OFF
RARP_ENB
(Use RARP) ON, OFF OFF
BOOTP_ENB
(Use BOOTP) ON, OFF OFF
DNS_PADDR IP Address 0.0.0.0
Appendix
515
(Primary DNS Server Address)
DNS_SADDR
(Secondary DNS Server Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
HOST_NAME
(Host Name) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters
"Canon"+
"Lower 6 digits
of MAC address"
DOMAIN_NAME
(Domain Name) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
DDNS_ENB
(DNS Dynamic Update) ON, OFF OFF
WINS_ENB
(WINS Resolution) ON, OFF OFF
WINS_SERVER
(WINS Server Address) IP Address 0.0.0.0
ARP_PING_ENB
(Use ARP/PING) ON, OFF OFF
LPD_ENB
(Use LPD Printing) ON, OFF ON
LPD_BANN
(Print LPD Banner Page) ON, OFF OFF
RAW_ENB
(Use RAW Printing) ON, OFF ON
RAW_BIDIR_ENB
(Use Bidirectional Communication) ON, OFF OFF
FTP_PRINT_ENB
(Use FTP Print) ON, OFF OFF
FTP_PRINT_USER
(FTP Print User Name) Up to 24 alphanumeric characters guest
FTP_PRINT_PWD
(FTP Print Password) Up to 24 alphanumeric characters 7654321
IPP_ENB
(Use IPP) ON, OFF ON
IPP_AUTH_ENB
(Use IPP Authentication) ON, OFF OFF
IPP_AUTH_ACCUNT1
(IPP Authentication User Name)
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (mandatory when using IPP
authentication) guest
IPP_AUTH_PASSWD1
(IPP Authentication Password)
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters (mandatory when using IPP
authentication) 7654321
WSD_ENB
(Use WSD Printing) ON, OFF ON
WSD_BROWSING
(Use WSD Browsing) ON, OFF ON
WSD_MULTICAST_
DISCOVERY ON, OFF ON
Appendix
516
(Use Multicast Discovery)
HTTP_ENB
(Use HTTP) ON, OFF ON
SNTP_ENB
(Use SNTP) ON, OFF OFF
SNTP_ADDR
(NTP Server Name) IP address or host name (Blank)
SNTP_INTERVAL
(Polling Interval) 1 to 48 (hr.) 24
DISCOVERY_ENB
(Respond to Discovery) ON, OFF ON
DISCOVERY_SCOPE_NAME
(Scope Name) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters default
EMAIL_PRINT_ENB
(POP3 RX) ON, OFF OFF
EMAIL_POP_ADDR
(POP3 Server Name) Up to 48 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
EMAIL_POP_ACCOUNT
(POP3 User Name) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
EMAIL_POP_PASSWD
(POP3 Password) Up to 32 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
EMAIL_POP_INTERVAL
(POP3 RX Interval) 0 to 90 (min.) 0
EMAIL_POP_PORTNO
(POP3 Server Port Number) 0 to 65535 110
IPV4_USE
(Use IPv4) ON, OFF ON
IPV6_USE
(Use IPv6) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_STATELESS_USE
(Use Stateless Address) ON, OFF ON
IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_USE
(Use Manual Address) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_SET
(IP Address) IP Address (Blank)
IPV6_MANUAL_ADDR_PREFIX
(Prex Length) 0 to 128 64
IPV6_MANUAL_ROUTER_ADDR
(Default Router Address) IP Address (Blank)
IPV6_DHCPV6_USE
(Use DHCPv6) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_PRI
(Primary DNS Server Address) IP Address (Blank)
IPV6_DNS_ADDRESS_SEC IP Address (Blank)
Appendix
517
(Secondary DNS Server Address)
IPV6_DNS_NAME_
SAME_AS_IPV4
(Use IPv4 Host/Domain Names)
ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_HOST_NAME_V6
(Host Name) Up to 47 alphanumeric characters
"Canon"+
"Lower 6 digits
of MAC address"
IPV6_DNS_DOMAIN_
NAME_V6
(Domain Name)
Up to 47 alphanumeric characters (Blank)
IPV6_DNS_DYNAMIC_SET
(DNS Dynamic Update) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_STATELESS
(Register Stateless Address) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_MANUAL
(Register Manual Address) ON, OFF OFF
IPV6_DNS_STATEFUL
(Register Stateful Address) ON, OFF OFF
SMB Server Menu (SMB Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
SMB_ENB
(Use SMB) ON, OFF OFF
SMB_SERVER
(Server Name) Up to 16 characters (Blank)
SMB_WG
(Workgroup Name) Up to 16 characters WORKGROUP
SMB_COMMENT
(Comments) Up to 192 characters (Blank)
SMB_LM_ENB
(Use LM Announce) ON, OFF OFF
SMB_PRINT_ENB
(Use SMB Printing) ON, OFF OFF
SMB_PRINTER
(Printer Name) Up to 13 characters PRINTER
SNMP Menu (SNMP Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default
Setting
SNMP_V1_ENB
(Use SNMPv1) ON, OFF ON
Appendix
518
SNMP_COMMUNITY1_
ENB
(Use Community Name 1)
ON, OFF ON
SNMP_COMMUNITY1_
ACCESS
(MIB Access Permission)
RW (Read/Write), RO (Read Only) RO
SNMP_COMMUNITY1_
NAME
(Community Name 1)
Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters public
SNMP_COMMUNITY2_
ENB
(Use Community Name 2)
ON, OFF OFF
SNMP_COMMUNITY2_
ACCESS
(MIB Access Permission)
RW (Read/Write), RO (Read Only) RO
SNMP_COMMUNITY2_
NAME
(Community Name 2)
Up to 32 alphanumeric
characters public2
SNMP_V3_ENB
(Use SNMPv3) ON, OFF OFF
SNMP_GET_PRT_MNG_
INFO
(Obtain Printer Management Information from Host)
ON, OFF OFF
SPOOLER Menu (Spool Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default Setting
SPOOL_ENB
(Use Spooler) ON, OFF OFF
START TIMER Menu (Waiting Time Settings for Connection at Startup)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default Setting
STRT_DELAY_TIME
(Waiting Time for Connection at Startup) 0 to 300 (sec.) 0
RUI Menu (Remote UI Settings)
Item Name Setting Value Factory Default Setting
RUI_ENB
(Use Remote UI) ON, OFF ON
8Enter "put <le name> CONFIG" and press the [ENTER] key.
Appendix
519
●Specify the edited le name in <le name> (example: put Setting.txt CONFIG).
➠The setting le is uploaded.
9Enter "get reset" and press the [ENTER] key.
➠The machine is restarted. The settings are enabled after the machine is restarted.
10 Conrm that the machine has been normally restarted, press [C] key while holding
down the [CTRL] key.
11 Enter "quit" and press the [ENTER] key.
12 Enter "exit" and press the [ENTER] key.
➠Command Prompt exits.
LINKS
Network(P. 326)
Appendix
520
Others
51W4-088
This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other
information.
Appendix
521
Basic Windows Operations
51W4-089
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 522)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 523)
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 524)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 524)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 525)
Checking the Computer Name(P. 526)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 527)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 528)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 529)
●Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.
◼Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 10
[] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].
◼Enabling [Network discovery]
Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Network discovery].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Appendix
522
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 10
[] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced
sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network
discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
◼Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].
2Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
●To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠Shared printers are displayed.
Appendix
523
◼Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CD-
ROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual.
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 10
Click [Ask me anything] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
Windows Server 2016
Click [ ] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
◼Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1Load A4 size paper in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper(P. 39)
2Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522)
3Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Appendix
524
4Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
➠The test page is printed.
◼Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Proceed to step 2.
Appendix
525
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Click [ ] [Settings] [System] select [About].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
◼Checking the Computer Name
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10
Click [ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel].
Appendix
526
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2016
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3Check the computer name.
◼Checking the Printer Port
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 522)
2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Appendix
527
3In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
◼When Printing from the Windows Store App
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you
use [Print].
Windows 10
Tap or click [Print] on the application The driver that you use [Print].
Windows Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].
●If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.
●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the
machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
Appendix
529
Font Samples
51W4-08A
The fonts lists printed from the Utility menu are a comprehensive listing of all fonts currently available. The listing
contains the names and print samples of the fonts stored on the printer.
Scalable Fonts (PCL)(P. 531)
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL) (P. 534)
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)(P. 534)
Appendix
530
Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Appendix
531
Appendix
532
Appendix
533
OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)
Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)
Appendix
534
Notice
51W4-08C
◼IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2
established by the IPv6 Forum.
◼Product Information required by COMMISSION REGULATION (EU) No 801/2013 amending
Regulation (EC) No 1275/2008
Power consumption of the product in networked standby if wired network ports are connected and all wireless
network ports are activated (if they are available at the same time).
Model Name Power consumption of the product in networked standby
LBP325x 3.0 W or less
●The above value(s) are the actual values for single machine, chosen arbitrarily, and may therefore vary from
the value of the machine in use. Optional network ports are not connected and/or activated in the
measurement.
◼WEEE and Battery Directives
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specied in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE.Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city oce, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-
europe.com/battery.
Appendix
535
◼Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
Power Consumption and Activation Time
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set
in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can
print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.
The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please
consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.
Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.
Energy Star®
The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy ecient
models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benets and
the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.
Paper types
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certied to an environmental stewardship
scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media
down to a weight of 64g/m².
Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)
Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of
valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.
The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends
that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental
impact of your work with this product at all times.
◼Disclaimers
●The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
●CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
●If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as PDF
Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
◼Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Safari, Mac, macOS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, Excel and PowerPoint are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
"MEAP" is a trademark of CANON Inc., referring to an "application platform" for Canon multifunction and single
function printers.
Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Appendix
536
Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its aliates.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
◼Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
Appendix
537
◼Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal
and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide
only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any
particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should
consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
●Paper Money
●Travelers Checks
●Money Orders
●Food Stamps
●Certicates of Deposit
●Passports
●Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
●Immigration Papers
●Identifying Badges or Insignias
●Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
●Selective Service or Draft Papers
●Bonds or Other Certicates of Indebtedness
●Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
●Stock Certicates
●Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certicates of Title
●Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
V_190320
Appendix
538
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
539
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
540
- 1 -
Third-Party Services
If you use third-party services through the PRODUCT, use of the services are subjected the conditions below.
When you access and/or obtain some third party content (such as text, images, videos, audios, or software)
through the SOFTWARE, except as expressly permitted by the content owner or by applicable law, you may
not (a) scrape, build databases or otherwise create permanent copies of such content, or keep cached copies
longer than permitted by the cache header; (b) copy, translate, modify, create a derivative work of, sell, lease,
lend, convey, distribute, publicly display or sublicense to any third party; (c) misrepresent the source or
ownership; and (d) remove, obscure, or alter any copyright, trademark or other proprietary rights notices, falsify
or delete any author attributions, legal notices or other labels of the origin or source of material.
- 2 -
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
Adobe PostScript 3 4
HttpClient2.0 Alpha1 Release 11
Crypto API 13
expat 14
J2ME 15
libjingle 16
MD4 17
NET-SNMP 18
OpenSSL 25
OSGi Release 4.2 29
servlet.jar 35
- 3 -
If you need source code of the following Software, please send email with the following information in English
or Japanese at: <oipossg@canon.co.jp>
-Name of the model that you purchased.
-Product ID number labeled on the back of the main unit.
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See page
Linux 38
glibc 45
json-glib
glib 54
- 4 -
Adobe PostScript 3
Copyright 2007-2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved.
Portions include software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions of Pool.c_Copyright 1987 - NeXT, Inc., and portions of Graphics.c_Copyright 1988 NeXT, Inc. as an
unpublished work. All Rights Reserved.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Apache Software License, Version 1.1
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Portions Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
- 5 -
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1985, 1986 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
- 6 -
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by James A. Woods, derived from original work by
Spencer Thomas and Joseph Orost.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and
this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other
materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University
of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 X Consortium
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THEX CONSORTIUM BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER INAN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR INCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X
Consortium.
______________________________________________________________________________________
NOTICE REGARDING SABLOTRON
March 27, 2003
- 7 -
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated are
available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
- 8 -
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu. This code accompanies the book:
Alexandrescu, Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright
(c) 2001. Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Welsey Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions developed by the University of California, Berkeley.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright © 1991-2005 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and
associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and associated documentation (the
"Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and
this permission notice appear in all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified
Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that
the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
- 9 -
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
Unicode and the Unicode logo are trademarks of Unicode, Inc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions. All
other trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Adobe shall retain and reproduce, and require its Sublicensees to retain and reproduce JIM's following
copyright notice within each copy of the licensed programs in any form, in whole or in part: "© 1981, 1990 JMI
Consultants, Inc. All rights reserved."
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Portions Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS
- 10 -
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
______________________________________________________________________________________
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu // This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied". Copyright (c) 2001.
Addison-Wesley.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 11 -
HttpClient2.0 Alpha1 Release
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/) and is subject to the following terms and conditions.
Copyright (c) 2001 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must
include the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgement may appear in the software itself, if and
wherever such third-party acknowledgements normally appear.
4. The names "The Jakarta Project", "Commons", "Xerces", "Crimson", "Velocity",
and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Jakarta", "Commons",
"Xerces" "Crimson", "Velocity", or "Apache", nor may "Jakarta", "Commons",
"Xerces" "Crimson", "Velocity", or "Apache" appear in their names without prior
written permission of the Apache Group.
- 12 -
NO WARRANTY
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on
behalf of the Apache Software Foundation. For more information on the Apache
Software Foundation, please see <http://www.apache.org/>.
- 13 -
Crypto API
COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
Copyright (c) 2000 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle (http://www.bouncycastle.org)
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 14 -
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
- 15 -
J2ME
Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
“commercial computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used
in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S.
Government End Users acquire Software with only those rights set forth herein.
- 16 -
libjingle
Copyright 2004--2007, Google Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 17 -
MD4
"RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Algorithm"
- 18 -
NET-SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts
below. Please make sure that you read all the parts. Up until 2001,
the project was based at UC Davis, and the first part covers all code
written during this time. From 2001 onwards, the project has been
based at SourceForge, and Networks Associates Technology, Inc hold the
copyright on behalf of the wider Net-SNMP community, covering all
derivative work done since then. An additional copyright section has
been added as Part 3 below also under a BSD license for the work
contributed by Cambridge Broadband Ltd. to the project since 2001.
An additional copyright section has been added as Part 4 below also
under a BSD license for the work contributed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
to the project since 2003.
Code has been contributed to this project by many people over
the years it has been in development, and a full list of contributors
can be found in the README file under the THANKS section.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of
the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
- 19 -
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
- 20 -
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
- 21 -
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 22 -
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2005, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
- 23 -
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and
Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com>
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- 24 -
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries,
brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- 25 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 26 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 27 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 28 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 29 -
OSGi Release 4.2
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
- 30 -
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
- 31 -
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works
that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
- 32 -
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
- 33 -
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]"
replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate
comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a
file or class name and description of purpose be included on the
same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
- 34 -
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
- 35 -
servlet.jar
1. Java Platform Interface. Licensee may not
modify the Java Platform
Interface (JPI, identified as classes
contained within the javax package or any
subpackages of the javax package), by
creating additional classes within the JPI or
otherwise causing the addition to or
modification of the classes in the JPI. In
the event that Licensee creates any
Java-related API and distribute such API to
others for applet or application development,
you must promptly publish broadly, an
accurate specification for such API for free
use by all developers of Java-based
software.
2. Restrictions. Software is confidential
copyrighted information of Sun and
title to all copies is retained by Sun
and/or its licensors. Licensee shall not
modify, decompile, disassemble, decrypt,
extract, or otherwise reverse engineer
Software. Software may not be leased,
assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in
part. Software is not designed or intended
for use in on-line control of aircraft, air
traffic, aircraft navigation or aircraft
communications; or in the design,
construction, operation or maintenance of
any nuclear facility. Licensee warrants
that it will not use or redistribute the
Software for such purposes.
3. Disclaimer of Warranty. Software is
- 36 -
provided "AS IS," without a warranty
of any kind. ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED.
4. Termination. This License is effective
until terminated. Licensee may
terminate this License at any time by
destroying all copies of Software. This
License will terminate immediately without
notice from Sun if Licensee fails to comply
with any provision of this License. Upon
such termination, Licensee must destroy all
copies of Software.
5. Export Regulations. Software, including
technical data, is subject to U.S.
export control laws, including the U.S.
Export Administration Act and its associated
regulations, and may be subject to export or
import regulations in other countries.
Licensee agrees to comply strictly with all
such regulations and acknowledges that it
has the responsibility to obtain licenses to
export, re-export, or import Software.
Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise
exported or re-exported (i) into, or to a
national or resident of, Cuba, Iraq, Iran,
North Korea, Libya, Sudan, Syria or any
country to which the U.S. has embargoed
goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S.
Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce
- 37 -
Department's Table of Denial Orders.
- 38 -
Linux
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to
make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free
Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it
to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software
or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients
all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you
must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its
recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not
reflect on the original authors' reputations.
- 39 -
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed
at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder
saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to
any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its
scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its
contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium,
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and
the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
- 40 -
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you
provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the
user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not
normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of
the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work
based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge
no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable
copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source
code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
- 41 -
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of
the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source
code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this
License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will
automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if
you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms
and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Program.
- 42 -
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address
new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does
not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software
Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting
the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
- 43 -
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED
IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to
achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file
to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and
a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C)
yyyy
name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- 44 -
GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C)
year
name of author
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public
License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they
could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the program `Gnomovision'
(which makes passes at compilers) written
by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon
, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your
program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
- 45 -
glibc
json-glib
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast,
the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can
use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public
License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses
are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute
copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link
other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so
they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license,
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if
the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not
- 46 -
the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure
that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a
patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This
license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different
from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking
those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two
is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License
therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom
than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage
over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public
License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain
library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the
library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this
case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public
License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people
to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs
enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux
operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the
user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using
a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the
difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code
derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by
the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser
General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
- 47 -
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with
application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms.
A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to
say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its
scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is
covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a
tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the
Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any
medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright
notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty
protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that
you also meet all of these conditions:
• a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
• b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and
the date of any change.
• c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms
of this License.
• d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is
invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not
supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined
independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
- 48 -
function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived
from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this
License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the
whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole,
and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the
Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based
on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope
of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a
given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to
the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version
2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you
wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public
License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or
executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by
being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a
derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the
Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is
therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code
for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is
- 49 -
especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold
for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros
and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless
of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library
will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the
terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are
linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the
Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice,
provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for
debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and
its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution
displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a
reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
• a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1
and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete
machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user
can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will
not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
• b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one
that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather
than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version
of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the
version that the work was made with.
• c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
• d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
• e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this
user a copy.
- 50 -
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be
distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not
normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the
Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together
with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the
separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted,
and provided that you do these two things:
• a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
• b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under
this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and
will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you
permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you
do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these
terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights
granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not
limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that
contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly
- 51 -
through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of
the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to
contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software
through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this
License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an
explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the
body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License
which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are
incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN
WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
- 52 -
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY
COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE
LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY
TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend
making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution
under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each
source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and an idea of what it does.
Copyright (C)
year
name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright
disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written
by James Random Hacker.
- 53 -
signature of Ty Coon
, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
- 54 -
glib
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is
numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
your libraries, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
- 55 -
or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide
complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this,
we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
free use or not licensed at all.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This
license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary
one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
the same as in the ordinary license.
The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without
changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in
a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
- 56 -
derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
treats it as such.
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We
concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to
permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve
this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this
will lead to faster development of free libraries.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
works together with the library.
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
General Public License rather than by this special one.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is
addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
- 57 -
(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
and what the program that uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
- 58 -
distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
in the event an application does not supply such function or
table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must
be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
- 59 -
your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
- 60 -
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
- 61 -
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
to use the modified definitions.)
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
least three years, to give the same user the materials
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
than the cost of performing this distribution.
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
specified materials from the same place.
d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
- 62 -
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
- 63 -
Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
- 64 -
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
- 65 -
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
- 66 -
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Library General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
License along with this library; if not, write to the
Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
Copyright (c) 1997-2008 University of Cambridge.
↑ Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
- 67 -
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of Google
Inc. nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* Copyright (C) 2007 Red Hat Inc.
*
* Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
* obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files
* (the "Software"), to deal in the Software ↑ without restriction,
* including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
* publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
* and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
* subject to the following conditions:
*
* The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
* included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
*
* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
* MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
* NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
* BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
- 68 -
* ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
* CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
* SOFTWARE.
Function Guide for Software
Registration and Update
User's Guide
USRM2-6358-01 2017-11 en Copyright CANON INC. 2017
Contents
Available Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications ........................................................... 4
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) ....................................................................... 6
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) ................................................................. 9
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software ...................................................................................................... 15
Updating the Firmware .......................................................................................................................... 17
Managing the Register/Update Software Function ....................................................... 28
Using This Guide ........................................................................................................................................... 32
Operating Environment of This Guide ...................................................................................................................... 33
Screen Layout of This Guide ..................................................................................................................................... 34
Top Page ........................................................................................................................................................... 35
Topic Page ......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Site Map ............................................................................................................................................................ 37
Search Method ................................................................................................................................................... 38
Viewing This Guide .................................................................................................................................................. 39
Disclaimer .......................................................................................................................................................... 41
Trademarks ...................................................................................................................................................... 43
I
Available Functions
0Y1C-000
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
Using the Register/Update Software function, you can install the System Options/MEAP Applications to the
printer. You can use this function from both the touch panel display and the computer (Remote UI).
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by accessing the delivery server from this printer.
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can install the System Options/MEAP Applications by using the license le/license key that you obtained
from the License Management System.
Updating the Firmware
Using the Register/Update Software function, you can update the rmware of the printer to the most recent
version. You can use this function from the computer (Remote UI).
Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
You can update the rmware by accessing the delivery server from this printer.
Available Functions
2
Installing the System Options/MEAP
Applications
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications ......................................................................... 4
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Delivery) .......................................................... 6
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network (Manual) ..................................................... 9
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software ............................................................................................. 15
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
3
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
0Y1C-001
The procedures to install the system options or MEAP applications on the printer differ, depending on whether
the printer is connected or not to an outside network. Select the procedure that matches your conditions using
the references below.
Installing by Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network
Install from the Remote UI.
NOTE
Communication test
To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a
communication test before installation.
" Testing Communication Using the Remote UI(P. 29) "
Installing by Not Connecting this Printer to an Outside Network
Installing System Options
Install using one of the following procedures.
NOTE
If you install multiple system options
We recommend that you install from the Remote UI.
Procedure Necessary Steps Reference Page
Using the Remote UI to install
1. Obtain the license le from the
License Management System " Obtaining the License File(P. 9) "
2. Install the license le using the
Remote UI
" Installing the System Options Using
the Remote UI(P. 9) "
Installing MEAP Applications
Use the following procedure to install.
Procedure Necessary Steps Reference Page
Using the Remote UI to install 1. Obtain the license le from the
License Management System " Obtaining the License File(P. 9) "
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
4
Installing by Connecting This Printer to an Outside
Network (Delivery)
0Y1C-002
If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can install the system options and MEAP applications
from the Remote UI by linking with the delivery server.
NOTE
Preparing a license access number certicate
Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Delivered Installation].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
6
4Enter the license access number → click [Next].
Once the license access number is conrmed after contacting the delivery server, information for the system
options/MEAP applications you can install are displayed.
5Select the system options and MEAP applications → click [Start Installation].
Status after Installation:
Start: Starts the installed MEAP applications.
Stop: Stops the installed MEAP applications.
IMPORTANT
If [Stop] is selected when installing MEAP applications
You need to start the application before using the MEAP application.
" Function Guide for MEAP Application Management "
If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, click [Accept].
6Check the Installation Result page.
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
7
When the installation of the system options is completed, the message <Restart the device.> appears. Restart
the printer to enable the function.
To return to the Delivered Installation screen, click [To Delivered Installation].
NOTE
The manual for system options/MEAP applications
You can download the manual for the installed system options/MEAP applications by accessing the URL
for the manual download site displayed on the Installation Result screen.
" Downloading the Manuals and Related Software(P. 15) "
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
8
Installing by Not Connecting This Printer to an Outside
Network (Manual)
0Y1C-003
This section describes how to install the system options and MEAP applications without connecting the printer
to an outside network.
Obtaining the License File
Obtain the license le.
License le: Obtain the license le when installing the system options/MEAP applications using the Remote UI.
NOTE
Preparing a license access number certicate
Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
License access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application
If the license access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application you are using, the
license le is issued by the distributor of the MEAP application. You do not need to obtain the license le
explained in this section. For more information, see the manual for each MEAP application.
1Check the management number you need to obtain the license le.
To obtain the license le, the following management number is required.
●License Access Number: Check the license access number certicate.
●Device Serial Number: You can check this number from the Utility menu of the operation panel.
" e-Manual "
2Access http://www.canon.com/lms/license/.
3Follow the instructions on the screen and obtain the license le.
Next, install the system options or the MEAP applications.
Installing the System Options Using the Remote UI
You can install the system options to the printer using the Remote UI.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
9
3Click [Manual Installation].
4Click [Browse...] → select the license le to install → click [Next].
File extensions:
License File: A le with the [lic] extension.
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
10
5Check the contents that will be installed on the conrmation screen → click [Install].
Installing the MEAP Applications Using the Remote UI
You can install the MEAP applications to the printer using the Remote UI.
NOTE
The number of MEAP applications that can be installed
You can install up to eight applications.
For details on MEAP applications
There may be other system requirements for installation, depending on the MEAP applications. For
instructions on settings, see the manual provided with the MEAP application.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Manual Installation].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
11
4Click [Browse...] → select the license le and the application le to install → click
[Next].
File extensions:
License File: A le with the [lic] extension.
Application File: A le with the [jar] extension.
IMPORTANT
When you install MEAP applications
●You cannot install license les only.
●When installing the MEAP application, make sure you specify the license le. You cannot install the
MEAP application without specifying the license le.
5Conrm the information displayed on the install conrmation page → click [Yes].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
12
Depending on the MEAP application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Conrm the
information displayed on the screen → click [OK].
If you are installing a new MEAP application, the following information is displayed on the screen.
●Application Information
●License Information
The following information is displayed when you overwrite a MEAP application.
●Current Application Information
●Application Information after Overwrite
Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait.> is displayed again. After the installation, click
[To Manual Installation] to display the Manual Installation screen.
IMPORTANT
To use MEAP applications
To use the installed MEAP application, you must start the MEAP application.
" Function Guide for MEAP Application Management "
Starting the MEAP Applications
This section describes how to start the installed MEAP application from the SMS screen.
NOTE
Details on SMS
For details on SMS, see " Function Guide for MEAP Application Management ."
1From the top page of the SMS, click [MEAP Application Management].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
13
2Select the application you want to start → click [Start].
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
14
Downloading the Manuals and Related Software
0Y1C-004
You can download the manuals for the installed system options/MEAP applications and their related software
from the following URL.
http://canon.com/fau/downloads
NOTE
●Make sure that the license access number that is included with the package is available.
●If you installed from the Remote UI, you can jump to the above URL from the link displayed on the
Installation Result screen. If you do so, the license access number is entered automatically.
1Start the Web browser on your computer.
2Enter the URL in [Address].
3After entering the license access number, follow the instructions on the screen to
download the manuals and related software.
If software is downloaded, refer to the manual of that software to install.
Installing the System Options/MEAP Applications
15
Updating the Firmware
0Y1C-005
Update from the Remote UI.
NOTE
Communication test
To check that the transmission with the delivery server is properly operating, if necessary, perform a
communication test before installation.
" Testing Communication Using the Remote UI(P. 29) "
Updating by Connecting This Printer to an Outside Network
If the printer is connected to an outside network, you can update to a most recent rmware by linking with the
delivery server.
IMPORTANT
Estimated time required to apply rmware
The time required to apply the downloaded rmware is approximately 20 minutes. This operation may
take more time depending on the system conguration and network environment of your printer.
Checking the New Firmware/Specifying the Delivery Settings
You can check the new rmware that is applicable with the printer and specify the delivery settings.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Updating the Firmware
17
3Click [Delivered Update].
4Click [Conrm New Firmware].
Contact the delivery server for information on whether an applicable new rmware is available or not.
5Verify the displayed information → specify necessary settings → click [Execute].
If the agreement screen is displayed, read the agreement. If you abide with the agreement, press [I Accept].
Updating the Firmware
18
Details of each item are shown below.
●Firmware:
Current Version: Displays the version of the current rmware.
Applicable Firmware: Displays the new rmware that is applicable with the printer.
Release Note: If the new rmware has a release note, that information is displayed.
Delivery Settings:
●Delivery Schedule: Click "Deliver now" or "Deliver at specied date and time."
[Deliver now]: Downloads the rmware after the delivery setting is specied.
[Deliver at specied date and
time]:
Select the date/time (year, month, date, and time) to download the rmware
from the drop-down list.
●Timing to Apply: Click [Auto] or [Manual].
[Auto]: The rmware is automatically applied after the download of the rmware is completed.
[Manual]: Only downloads the rmware. To apply the downloaded rmware, set from [Apply Firmware].
●Deliver Update: Click [On] or [Off].
[On]: Downloads only the difference between the current rmware and the new rmware.
[Off]: Downloads the new rmware entirely.
●E-Mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the administrator. You can receive e-mails regarding the update
status that is sent from the delivery server.
●Comments: Enter the comment that will automatically be added to the e-mail. If the model name is entered,
you can identify which device status the e-mail is about.
Updating the Firmware
19
NOTE
Delivery Schedule and Timing to Apply
●When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Auto]
The rmware is applied after the new rmware is downloaded from the delivery server. When the
application is completed, the printer automatically restarts.
●When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver now] and the Timing to Apply is set to [Manual]
The new rmware is downloaded.
●When the Delivery Schedule is set to [Deliver at specied date and time]
The scheduled delivery is set to the specied date/time.
Applying the Downloaded Firmware
You can apply the downloaded rmware to the printer.
NOTE
If the Timing to Apply in Delivery Settings is set to [Auto], this step is not necessary.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Updating the Firmware
20
3Click [Delivered Update].
4Click [Apply Firmware].
5Conrm the rmware to apply → click [Yes].
Updating the Firmware
21
The new rmware is applied to the printer. When the application is completed, the printer automatically
restarts.
Deleting the Downloaded Firmware
You can delete the downloaded rmware.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
Updating the Firmware
22
3Click [Delivered Update].
4Click [Delete Firmware].
5Conrm the rmware to delete → click [Yes].
Updating the Firmware
23
The rmware is deleted.
Deleting the Scheduled Delivery
You can delete the scheduled delivery of the rmware.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Delivered Update].
Updating the Firmware
24
4Click [Delete Scheduled Delivery].
5Conrm the information of the scheduled delivery → click [Yes].
Updating the Firmware
25
The scheduled delivery is deleted.
Updating the Firmware
26
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
0Y1C-006
You can display the installation logs and test communication using the Remote UI.
Displaying the Installation/Update Log Using the Remote UI
You can check the installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the rmware.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Display Logs /Communication Test].
4From the Log View drop-down list, select [Update Logs] → click [Switch].
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
28
The installation logs of the system options/MEAP applications and the update log of the rmware are displayed.
Testing Communication Using the Remote UI
You can check whether the printer can properly communicate with the delivery server.
1Start the Remote UI, and then log in as Administrator.
" e-Manual "
2From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [License/Other] →
[Register/Update Software].
3Click [Display Logs /Communication Test] → [Communication Test].
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
29
When the conrmation dialog is displayed, click [Yes].
Contents for the test are downloaded from the delivery server.
When the communication test is completed, the communication test result screen is displayed.
NOTE
If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result
If [Failed] is displayed on the communication test result screen, check that the network cable is
connected and that the network settings are correct. If the problem is not resolved, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Managing the Register/Update Software Function
30
Using This Guide
Using This Guide ............................................................................................................................................... 32
Operating Environment of This Guide ................................................................................................................ 33
Screen Layout of This Guide ................................................................................................................................ 34
Top Page ......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Topic Page ...................................................................................................................................................... 36
Site Map ......................................................................................................................................................... 37
Search Method ............................................................................................................................................... 38
Viewing This Guide .............................................................................................................................................. 39
Using This Guide
31
Using This Guide
0Y1C-007
This chapter describes how to use this guide.
Operating Environment of This Guide(P. 33)
Screen Layout of This Guide(P. 34)
Top Page(P. 35)
Topic Page(P. 36)
Site Map(P. 37)
Search Method(P. 38)
Viewing This Guide(P. 39)
<To nd the desired content>
●Selecting between the category icons
From the top page, select a category icon you want.
" Top Page(P. 35) "
●Searching from the site map
On the site map, you can view the list of whole sections of this guide sorted by category. You can
directly display sections in a category.
" Site Map(P. 37) "
●Whole text search function
You can search by keyword in this guide. You can display the desired description from the search
results by entering a keyword you want to search. This function supports AND search.
" Search Method(P. 38) "
Using This Guide
32
Operating Environment of This Guide
0Y1C-008
You need a Web browser to use this guide. Operation of the following Web browsers is guaranteed.
Windows
●Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
●Firefox 2.x or later
Mac OS
●Safari 3.x or later
●Firefox 3.x or later
NOTE
Enabling the script function
Enable the script function for a Web browser before using this guide.
Using This Guide
33
Screen Layout of This Guide
0Y1C-009
This section describes the screen layout of this guide.
The page displayed right after this guide starts is called "Top Page" and the guide description is called "Topic
Page" in this section.
"Site map" is displayed from [Site map] which is located on the upper right of this guide.
The search panel is used to make search through this guide.
The screen layout is different for each page, so click the following links to see the instruction.
Top Page(P. 35)
Topic Page(P. 36)
Site Map(P. 37)
Search Method(P. 38)
Using This Guide
34
Top Page
0Y1C-00A
(1) Select from functions
The instructions of each function and operation method are described.
(2) [Search]
The search panel is displayed by entering keyword(s) and clicking [ ].
For details, see " Search Method(P. 38) ."
(3) [Top]
The top page of this guide is displayed.
(4) [Site map]
The entire contents of this guide are displayed.
(5) [Help]
How to use this guide is displayed.
(6) [Disclaimers]
The disclaimers are displayed.
(7) [Copyright]
The information of copyrights is displayed.
(8) [Trademarks]
The trademarks are displayed.
Using This Guide
35
Topic Page
0Y1C-00C
(1) Chapter contents
This is the list of the contents in the chapter. Clicking each item displays the description in the topic page.
Click [ ] to expand a menu, and click [ ] to collapse a menu.
Alternatively, click [ Expand all ] to expand all menus, and click [ Collapse all ] to collapse all
menus.
(2) Topic page
The descriptions of each item are displayed.
The current location of the displayed topic is displayed at the upper left of the topic page. Click a link to
move to a higher level.
(3) [Chapter] menu
You can select a different chapter from the pull-down menu.
(4) [Contents] tab
Click to display the chapter contents panel.
(5) [Search] tab
Click to display the search panel.
For details, see " Search Method(P. 38) ."
(6) [ ]
Click to display or hide the chapter contents panel/search panel.
(7) [Previous]/[Next]
Click to move to the previous or next topic.
(8) [Print this topic]
Prints only the topic page currently displayed.
(9) [Print all]
Prints all the contents in a chapter.
Using This Guide
36
Site Map
0Y1C-00E
(1) Whole contents
Shows the all chapters and sections of this guide. Click an item to view the contents.
Using This Guide
37
Search Method
0Y1C-00F
(1) Search
Entering a character string in [Search] on the top page or in the [Keyword] text box on the search panel
and then clicking [ ] displays the search results.
The AND search is available in this guide so you can rene the search results by entering two or more
keywords. When entering keywords, enter a space between the keywords.
●Example: license le (if you want to display pages which include words, "license" and "le")
(2) Search result
The search results for a keyword are displayed.
If there are more than 10 search results, you can see the other results by clicking [ ], [ ], or the
number which is located below the result.
(3) [Search options]
Click to display the search options.
The search options can be used to specify the chapter to search, case sensitivity, and whether to
differentiate between one- and two-byte characters.
Click [Search with these conditions] to search with the specied conditions.
Using This Guide
38
Viewing This Guide
0Y1C-00H
Symbols Used in This Guide
The following symbols are used in this Guide to mark descriptions of handling restrictions, precautions, and
instructions that should be observed for your safety.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading
these notes is highly recommended.
Buttons Used in This Guide
The following are examples of how control panel keys and on-screen buttons are depicted in this guide.
Type Depiction in This Guide Example
Buttons on computer operation screen and so on [Button name and so on] [OK]
Screenshots Used in This Guide
The contents of the screenshots used in this guide are the default settings.
Depending on the system conguration, the contents of the screenshots may partly differ.
Using This Guide
39
Disclaimer
0Y1C-00J
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS
MATERIAL.
Disclaimer
41
Trademarks
0Y1C-00L
●"MEAP" is a trademark of CANON Inc., referring to an "application platform" for Canon multifunction and
single function printers.
●Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Mac, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
●Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
●This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype
Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Oce and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
●UFST: Copyright© 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
●Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its
aliates.
●Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Copyright© 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
●Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763;
6,639,593; 6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
●All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe
Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for
Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
●Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or
similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript
technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to
be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
●Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks
43
●All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
●All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their
respective owners.
Trademarks
44
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
45
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
46
Function Guide for MEAP Application
Management
User's Guide
USRM2-6341-02 2017-11 en Copyright CANON INC. 2017
Contents
Available Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 2
Launching and Closing SMS .................................................................................................................. 5
Before Launching SMS (Preparation) .......................................................................................................................... 7
Setting Up HTTP Communication ............................................................................................................................ 8
Launching SMS (Log in) .............................................................................................................................................. 9
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in)) ........................................................................................................................ 13
Closing SMS (Logging Out) ....................................................................................................................................... 14
MEAP Application Settings .................................................................................................................. 16
Installing MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................................... 19
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications) ................................................................................................................ 22
Uninstalling MEAP Applications ............................................................................................................................... 23
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications ....................................................................................................................... 25
Starting MEAP Applications .................................................................................................................................. 26
Stopping MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................................ 27
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications ............................................................................................................... 29
MEAP Application License Settings ........................................................................................................................... 31
Adding License Files ............................................................................................................................................ 32
Disabling License Files ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Downloading Disabled License Files ...................................................................................................................... 38
Deleting Disabled License Files ............................................................................................................................. 41
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications ....................................................................................... 44
System Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 49
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order ................................................................................................................. 50
Checking Login Services .......................................................................................................................................... 52
Setting Enhanced System Applications ..................................................................................................................... 54
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................... 55
Starting Enhanced System Applications ........................................................................................................... 56
Stopping Enhanced System Applications .......................................................................................................... 57
Installing Enhanced System Applications ............................................................................................................... 58
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications ........................................................................................................... 61
Checking Information ............................................................................................................................................. 62
Checking System Information .............................................................................................................................. 63
Checking Application Information ......................................................................................................................... 65
Checking License Files ......................................................................................................................................... 66
Changing the SMS Password .................................................................................................................................... 67
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information ................................................................................................. 69
Managing MEAP Application Log Data ...................................................................................................................... 71
Downloading Log Data ........................................................................................................................................ 72
I
Deleting Log Data ............................................................................................................................................... 74
List of Error Messages (MEAP) .......................................................................................................... 77
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page ........................................................................................................................... 79
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page ................................................................................... 81
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page .............................................................................................. 83
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page ............................................................................ 88
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page ................................................................................................... 89
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page .................................................................. 91
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages ........................................................................ 97
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page ..................................................... 99
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page ........................................................................... 100
Other Errors ......................................................................................................................................................... 101
Using This Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 103
Operating Environment of This Guide .................................................................................................................... 104
Screen Layout of This Guide ................................................................................................................................... 105
Top Page ......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Topic Page ....................................................................................................................................................... 107
Site Map .......................................................................................................................................................... 108
Search Method ................................................................................................................................................. 109
Viewing This Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 110
Disclaimer ........................................................................................................................................................ 112
Trademarks .................................................................................................................................................... 114
II
Available Functions
0XW7-000
SMS (Service Management Service) is software that accesses the printer over the network from an existing Web
browser, and can install and manage MEAP applications (called "applications" in this document). Since the
software (Web server) for using SMS is embedded in the printer, there is no need for any software other than a
Web browser.
If a printer on the network is connected to a computer, it can use SMS. You can perform the following
operations using SMS.
You can check application information from computers on the network
You can access the printer via the network and display the status and information of installed applications.
After SMS launches and you log in by entering your password in the [Log In] page, the following top page is
displayed.
Available Functions
2
(1) [MEAP Application Management]
It can display the status of applications that are installed in the printer.
" MEAP Application Settings(P. 16) "
(2) [Install MEAP Application]
Install the MEAP application.
" Installing MEAP Applications(P. 19) "
(3) [System Management]
MEAP system administrator settings are used for setting system application settings, displaying
information and changing passwords, etc.
" System Settings(P. 49) "
You can install and uninstall applications
You can install and uninstall applications that support this printer from the computer.
" Installing MEAP Applications(P. 19) "
" Uninstalling MEAP Applications(P. 23) "
You can update installed applications and license les
If the license for the installed applications has expired, you can reinstall and update it.
" Adding License Files(P. 32) "
Available Functions
3
Launching and Closing SMS
Launching and Closing SMS ......................................................................................................................... 5
Before Launching SMS (Preparation) ................................................................................................................... 7
Setting Up HTTP Communication ...................................................................................................................... 8
Launching SMS (Log in) ......................................................................................................................................... 9
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in)) ................................................................................................................. 13
Closing SMS (Logging Out) .................................................................................................................................. 14
Launching and Closing SMS
4
Launching and Closing SMS
0XW7-001
Log in is required to use SMS.
Before Launching SMS (Preparation)
(P. 7)
Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9)
Closing SMS (Logging Out)(P. 14)
NOTE
Web Browser Settings
The following settings are required.
●JavaScript must be enabled
●The use of session cookies must be enabled
●When a proxy server is used, using the proxy server settings of your Web browser, add the IP address
of the printer to the [Exceptions] (addresses that do not use a proxy) list.
Since settings differ depending on the network environment, consult with your network administrator.
Launching SMS
Multiple users cannot log in to SMS at the same time.
Automatic SMS Logout
While SMS is in use, if it is not accessed for approximately ve minutes or more it times out and the user
is automatically logged out. If that happens, log in again from the [Login] page.
Do not use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button
If you use the Web browser's [Back] navigation button, SMS may not operate properly.
SMS System Environment
SMS operation is guaranteed in the following system environments.
Web Browsers
●Internet Explorer 7 or later
●Safari 4.0.5 or later
Operating system
●Windows Vista SP2
●Windows 7 SP1
●Windows 8
Launching and Closing SMS
5
●Windows 10
●Mac OS X v 10.5 or later
Launching and Closing SMS
6
Before Launching SMS (Preparation)
0XW7-002
Set the following before launching SMS.
Step 1 Congure the network settings. " e-Manual "
Step 2 Check the printer's IP address by
Network Status Print. " e-Manual "
Step 3 Set it so that the printer can be
accessed from the Web browser. " Setting Up HTTP Communication(P. 8) "
Launching and Closing SMS
7
Setting Up HTTP Communication
0XW7-003
In order to use MEAP functions from the Web browser, HTTP communication must be enabled.
Follow the steps in the procedure below to congure the settings. (The default settings are <On>.)
1Press [Settings] key, select <Network> with / , and then press [OK] key.
After the message is displayed, press [OK] key.
2Select <TCP/IP Settings> with / , and then press [OK] key.
3Select <HTTP> with / , and then press [OK] key.
4Select <On> with / , and then press [OK] key.
<On> It uses HTTP.
<Off> It does not use HTTP.
5Perform a hard reset or restart the printer.
The settings are enabled after a hard reset or after the printer is restarted.
NOTE
Details about Hard Resets
See the " e-Manual ."
Launching and Closing SMS
8
Launching SMS (Log in)
0XW7-004
The following two methods are used for launching SMS.
Launching SMS directly from the Web browser(P. 9)
Launching SMS from a Remote UI(P. 10)
Before launching SMS, see " Attention (Launching SMS (Log in))(P. 13) ."
Launching SMS directly from the Web browser
1Start the Web browser.
2Enter "https://<Printer's IP address>:8443/sms/" in the address bar, and then press
[ENTER] from the Enter key on the keyboard.
●Entry Example: https://192.168.0.215:8443/sms/
If the printer's host name is registered in the DNS server, you can enter [host name.domain name] instead
of the IP address.
●Input Example: http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com:8443/sms/
If SMS does not launch
Check the following.
●HTTP communication is enabled.
" Setting Up HTTP Communication(P. 8) "
●The computer and printer are connected properly over the network.
●The printer is turned ON.
Launching and Closing SMS
9
●The IP address or [host name.domain name] are entered correctly.
NOTE
Device Serial Number
The printer's device serial number is displayed on the upper left of the screen. (The device serial number
is required to obtain the license le from the license management system.)
3Enter the password, and then click [Login].
The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive).
If you cannot log in
If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-
enter your password.
Enter the correct password, and then click [Login].
If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not
be able to log in even if you enter the correct password.
A switch license le is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize
Password] in the screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch
License File, and then click [Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
Launching SMS from a Remote UI
1Start the Remote UI and log on in system manager mode.
" e-Manual "
Launching and Closing SMS
10
2Click [Service Management Service] on the portal page.
3Enter the password, and then click [Login].
The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive).
If you cannot log in
If you cannot log in because the password is not correct, a message is displayed prompting you to re-
enter your password.
Enter the correct password, and then click [Login].
If you do not log in within approximately 5 minutes after the login page is displayed, you will not
be able to log in even if you enter the correct password.
Launching and Closing SMS
11
A switch license le is required to initialize passwords. After clicking on [Browse] in [Initialize
Password] in the screen that displays the message prompting password re-entry, select Switch
License File, and then click [Initialize]. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
Launching and Closing SMS
12
Attention (Launching SMS (Log in))
0XW7-005
IMPORTANT
SMS Password
●To prevent unauthorized access, We recommend that the administrator change the password before
SMS use is begun. See " Changing the SMS Password(P. 67) " when changing passwords.
●This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the
administrator.
●Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to
use SMS. If this happens, contact your local dealer.
Launching and Closing SMS
13
Closing SMS (Logging Out)
0XW7-006
Click [Log Out from SMS] to close SMS.
If you close the Web browser without clicking [Log Out from SMS], SMS becomes temporarily unusable.
Launching and Closing SMS
14
MEAP Application Settings
MEAP Application Settings ......................................................................................................................... 16
Installing MEAP Applications .............................................................................................................................. 19
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications) ......................................................................................................... 22
Uninstalling MEAP Applications ......................................................................................................................... 23
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications ................................................................................................................ 25
Starting MEAP Applications ............................................................................................................................ 26
Stopping MEAP Applications ........................................................................................................................... 27
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications ....................................................................................................... 29
MEAP Application License Settings .................................................................................................................... 31
Adding License Files ....................................................................................................................................... 32
Disabling License Files .................................................................................................................................... 35
Downloading Disabled License Files ............................................................................................................... 38
Deleting Disabled License Files ....................................................................................................................... 41
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP Applications ............................................................................ 44
MEAP Application Settings
15
MEAP Application Settings
0XW7-007
MEAP applications are set from the [MEAP Application Management] and the [Install MEAP Application] menus.
Items shown in the [MEAP Application Management] menu
[Application Name] The name of the application is displayed.
[Installed on] The date on which the application was installed is displayed.
[Status] The status of the application is displayed.
●[Installed]:
MEAP Application Settings
16
The application has been installed, but not started.
Or, the printer was turned OFF after the application stopped, and after the printer was
restarted the application was not yet started.
●[Started]:
The application is running.
●[Stopped]:
The application is stopped.
●[Starting]:
The application is starting up.
●[Stopping]:
The application is closing down.
[License]
The license status of the application is displayed.
●[Installed]:
A valid license le has been installed.
●[Not Installed]:
The license le has been disabled.
●[Over Limit]:
The license le that is installed has an expiration date, and multiple types of counters
have been set. One or more of the counter values has exceeded the upper limits of the
counter.
●[Invalid]:
The installed license le has passed its expiration date.
Or, the current counter value has exceeded the upper limit of the license le.
*When upper limits have been set for multiple types of counters, the license will
become invalid at the point in time when any counter exceeds its upper limit.
●[Unnecessary]:
The application does not require a license le for startup.
[Resource Information]
The resources being used by the applications are displayed.
●[Storage]:
The amount of storage being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB).
●[Memory]:
The amount of memory being used. It is shown in kilobyte units (KB).
●[Threads]:
The number of threads.
●[Sockets]:
The number of sockets.
●[File Descriptors]:
The number of le descriptors.
NOTE
Timing of [Resource Information] Updates
[Resource Information] is updated at the following times.
Item Timing of Updates
[Storage] When the application is installed
or uninstalled
[Memory]
[Threads]
[Sockets]
When the application starts or
stops
MEAP Application Settings
17
Item Timing of Updates
[File Descriptors]
[Install MEAP Application] Menu Settings
[Install MEAP Application/License]
Install the MEAP application.
●[Install]:
Specify the application le and license le to be installed, and then click [Install] to
start the installation.
●[Application File Path]:
Specify the application le to be installed.
●[License File Path]:
Specify the license le.
See the following section for settings that use the [MEAP Application Management] and [Install MEAP
Application] menus.
Installing MEAP Applications(P. 19)
Uninstalling MEAP Applications(P. 23)
Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 25)
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications(P. 29)
MEAP Application License
Settings(P. 31)
Setting Authentication Information
for MEAP Applications(P. 44)
MEAP Application Settings
18
Installing MEAP Applications
0XW7-008
Before starting the following operation, see " Attention (Installing MEAP Applications)(P. 22) ."
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Install MEAP Application].
3Set [Application File Path] and [License File Path].
Either select the le by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the le is stored.
MEAP Application Settings
19
[Application File Path] Specify a le with a "jar" extension.
[License File Path] Specify a le with a "lic" extension.
4Click [Install].
5Conrm the information on the install conrmation page, and then click [Yes].
When the [License Agreement] appears, conrm the information, and then click [I Accept].
→ The installation begins.
<Information Displayed on the Install Conrmation Page>
If you are installing a new application
[Application Information] Information about the application
[License Information] The expiration date of the application
If you are updating an application
[Application Information]
[Current Application Information] Information about the current application
[Application Information after Overwrite] Application information after overwrite
[License Information]
[Expires after] The expiration date of the targeted application
[Current Counter Usage Limit] Current counter information
[Counter Usage Limit after Overwrite] Counter information after overwrite
If the install is cancelled
MEAP Application Settings
20
If the shutdown process for the printer starts while an application is being installed, an error message
may be displayed on the [Install] page for SMS, and the installation cancelled. If this happens, install the
application again after restarting the printer by turning the main power switch OFF and then back ON
again.
6After the install is completed, click [To MEAP Application Management].
NOTE
When using the installed application
Start the application.
" Starting MEAP Applications(P. 26) "
MEAP Application Settings
21
Attention (Installing MEAP Applications)
0XW7-009
IMPORTANT
Installing Applications
●There may be other specic requirements for installation, depending on the application. For more
information, see the instruction manual provided with the application.
●You can install up to eight applications.
●You cannot install license les only. Specify both the application le and the license le.
To only add a license le for an application that is already installed, see " Adding License
Files(P. 32) ."
Obtaining License Files
●In order to install an application, a valid license le is required.
If you have a license access number in your application package, obtain a valid license le from
License Management System ( http://www.canon.com/lms/license/ ).
In order to obtain a license le,
a license access number and a
device serial number (the
number displayed on the upper
left of the SMS screen) are
required.
●If you do not have a license access number in your application package, it will be provided by the
dealer where you purchased the application. For more information, see the instruction manual
provided with the application.
Storage Area
"Storage" under resource information displayed on the [MEAP Application Management] page allows you
to conrm the maximum storage space that can be used by the application and the storage space
currently used by the application.
When you are updating an application
Stop the application before installing the new version.
" Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 27) "
MEAP Application Settings
22
Uninstalling MEAP Applications
0XW7-00A
IMPORTANT
If the license status is not "Not Installed"
Uninstall the application after disabling and deleting the license les.
" Disabling License Files(P. 35) "
" Deleting Disabled License Files(P. 41) "
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall.
Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted.
4Click [Yes].
→ The uninstall begins.
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
MEAP Application Settings
23
IMPORTANT
If <A package exported from this application cannot be used.> is displayed
and you uninstall the application that displayed this message, you may not be able to use other
applications.
MEAP Application Settings
24
Starting MEAP Applications
0XW7-00E
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click [Start] for the application to start.
If the application does not start
Check the following.
●The required license le has been installed
●There is sucient [Memory], [Threads], [Sockets] and [File Descriptors] under [Resource Information]
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
MEAP Application Settings
26
When the restart prompt message is displayed
Follow the on-screen instructions to restart the printer.
MEAP Application Settings
28
Checking the Details of MEAP Applications
0XW7-00H
Check the details of installed applications.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the application to check the details.
→ [Application/License Information] is displayed on the screen.
MEAP Application Settings
29
MEAP Application License Settings
0XW7-00J
You can add, disable and delete license les for installed applications.
Adding License Files(P. 32)
Disabling License Files(P. 35)
Downloading Disabled License
Files(P. 38)
Deleting Disabled License
Files(P. 41)
IMPORTANT
Disabling Licenses
●You cannot disable a license le if the application is still running.
" Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 27) "
●When a disabled license le is generated, the status of that license le becomes <Not Installed> and
the application becomes unusable.
Downloading and Deleting Licenses
●You can only download or delete disabled license les.
●Some license les need to be downloaded after they have been disabled.
●Once you have deleted the disabled license le, you cannot download it from the printer again. We
recommend downloading and backing it up before deleting it.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall disabled or downloaded license les in the same printer.
MEAP Application Settings
31
Adding License Files
0XW7-00K
You can install license les for applications that are already installed.
You can also increase counter values and extend terms of validity by adding license les.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application to which a license le will be added.
MEAP Application Settings
32
4Click [License Management].
5Specify the license le.
(1) Click [Browse], and then select the license le to be added.
MEAP Application Settings
33
(2) Click [Install].
6Conrm the information on the install conrmation page, and then click [Yes].
→ The license le is installed.
If you are adding a license le to an [Over Limit] or [Invalid] application
you may need to restart the application.
" Starting/Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 25) "
MEAP Application Settings
34
Disabling License Files
0XW7-00L
After you disable a license le, you can download and save it to a computer or delete it.
IMPORTANT
Disabling Licenses
●You cannot disable a license le if the application is still running.
" Stopping MEAP Applications(P. 27) "
●When a disabled license le is generated, the status of that license le becomes <Not Installed> and
the application becomes unusable.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall disabled license les in the same printer.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application for which to disable to license le.
MEAP Application Settings
35
4Click [License Management].
5Click [Disable].
MEAP Application Settings
36
6Click [Yes].
→ The license le is disabled.
MEAP Application Settings
37
Downloading Disabled License Files
0XW7-00R
Download and back up disabled license les to the computer.
IMPORTANT
Downloading Licenses
●You can only download disabled license les.
●Some license les need to be downloaded after they have been disabled.
Reinstalling License Files
You can reinstall downloaded and disabled license les in the same printer.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application for which to download to license le.
MEAP Application Settings
38
4Click [License Management].
5Click [Download].
MEAP Application Settings
39
6Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a le storage directory.
→ The license le is saved.
MEAP Application Settings
40
Deleting Disabled License Files
0XW7-00S
To uninstall an application, you must rst delete the license le.
IMPORTANT
Deleting Licenses
●You can only delete disabled license les.
●Once you have deleted the disabled license le, you cannot download it again. We recommend
downloading and backing it up before deleting it.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application to which to delete a license le.
MEAP Application Settings
41
4Click [License Management].
5Click [Delete].
MEAP Application Settings
42
6Click [Yes].
→ The license le is deleted.
MEAP Application Settings
43
Setting Authentication Information for MEAP
Applications
0XW7-00U
When processing jobs from applications that do not require operation from the printer, you must rst set the
authentication information.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Management].
3Click the name of the application for which to set authentication information.
MEAP Application Settings
44
4Click [Authentication Information Settings].
5Enter the authentication information.
MEAP Application Settings
45
If you use department ID management
Enter the department ID and password in the elds marked [Department ID] and [PIN].
If you do not use department ID management
Enter an arbitrary ID and password in the elds marked [Department ID] and [PIN].
6Click [Update].
→ Authentication information is set.
IMPORTANT
MEAP Application Settings
46
When cancelling authentication information
Click [Delete].
MEAP Application Settings
47
System Settings
System Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 49
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order ......................................................................................................... 50
Checking Login Services ...................................................................................................................................... 52
Setting Enhanced System Applications .............................................................................................................. 54
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications .......................................................................................... 55
Starting Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................... 56
Stopping Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................. 57
Installing Enhanced System Applications ........................................................................................................ 58
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications ................................................................................................... 61
Checking Information ......................................................................................................................................... 62
Checking System Information ........................................................................................................................ 63
Checking Application Information .................................................................................................................. 65
Checking License Files .................................................................................................................................... 66
Changing the SMS Password ............................................................................................................................... 67
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information ........................................................................................ 69
Managing MEAP Application Log Data ............................................................................................................... 71
Downloading Log Data ................................................................................................................................... 72
Deleting Log Data ........................................................................................................................................... 74
System Settings
48
System Settings
0XW7-00W
The [System Management] menu contains the following items.
[Panel Display Order Settings] It sets the order MEAP applets are displayed on the operation panel.
" Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order(P. 50) "
[Enhanced System Application
Management]
It displays enhanced system application status and performs settings. You can
also set log in service settings.
" Setting Enhanced System Applications(P. 54) "
[System Application Management] It displays system application status and performs start/stop operations.
[System Information] It displays versions and system application information, etc.
" Checking System Information(P. 63) "
[MEAP Application Information] It displays the details about MEAP applications.
" Checking Application Information(P. 65) "
[Check License] It checks the content of the license le before it is installed.
" Checking License Files(P. 66) "
[Change Password] It changes the SMS log in password.
" Changing the SMS Password(P. 67) "
[MEAP Application Setting
Information Management]
It deletes the details about MEAP applications.
" Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information(P. 69) "
[MEAP Application Log Management] It downloads and deletes log data obtained by MEAP applications.
" Managing MEAP Application Log Data(P. 71) "
System Settings
49
Changing the MEAP Applet Display Order
0XW7-00X
The applet display order changes when you press [Application] key on the control panel.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Panel Display Order Settings].
3Select the check boxes for the applets whose display order you wish to change.
System Settings
50
4The display order changes.
(1) Move the applets up and down by clicking [Up] and [Down].
(2) Click [Update].
System Settings
51
System Settings
53
Setting Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-010
They perform the operations of the enhanced system applications that enhance the system applications (the
basic applications that make up the MEAP system).
Starting/Stopping Enhanced System Applications(P. 55)
Starting Enhanced System Applications(P. 56)
Stopping Enhanced System Applications(P. 57)
Installing Enhanced System Applications(P. 58)
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications(P. 61)
System Settings
54
Starting Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-012
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3Click [Start] for Other System Applications, and then start the application.
When the [License Agreement] appears, conrm the information, and then click [I Accept].
System Settings
56
Installing Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-014
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3Set [Enhanced System Application File Path] and [License File Path].
Either select the le by clicking [Browse...], or enter the location where the le is stored.
System Settings
58
[Enhanced System Application File Path] Specify a le with a "jar" extension.
[License File Path] Specify a le with a "lic" extension.
IMPORTANT
When specifying a le
Specify both the application le and the license le.
4Click [Install].
System Settings
59
5Conrm the information on the install conrmation page, and then click [Yes].
When the [License Agreement] appears, conrm the information, and then click [I Accept].
→ The installation begins.
System Settings
60
Uninstalling Enhanced System Applications
0XW7-015
NOTE
Deleting License Files
There is no need to delete license les before uninstalling enhanced system applications.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Enhanced System Application Management].
3Click [Uninstall] for the application to uninstall.
Applications with [Uninstall] grayed out cannot be deleted.
4Click [Yes].
→ The uninstall begins.
System Settings
61
Checking System Information
0XW7-017
You can check the version information of platforms such as Java virtual machine and version information, date
of installation and status of system applications.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [System Information].
Click [Display Details] to check detailed information.
System Settings
63
System Settings
64
Checking Application Information
0XW7-018
You can check the information about installed or uninstalled applications (except for system applications).
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Information].
3Information about applications is displayed.
(1) Select [Installed] or [Uninstalled].
(2) Click [Switch].
[Installed] Information about installed applications (except for system applications) is displayed.
[Uninstalled] Information about uninstalled applications (except for system applications) is displayed.
System Settings
65
Checking License Files
0XW7-019
You can check the content of the license le before it is installed.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Check License].
3Either select the le by clicking [Browse], or enter the location where the le is stored.
4Click [Check].
→ The content of the license le is displayed.
System Settings
66
Changing the SMS Password
0XW7-01A
IMPORTANT
SMS Password
●To prevent unauthorized access, we recommend that the administrator change the password before
SMS use is begun.
●This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the printer. Do not let anyone know except the
administrator.
●Make sure that you do not forget your password. If you forget your password, you will not be able to
use SMS. If this happens, contact your local dealer.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [Change Password].
3Set the password.
(1) Set the password.
(2) Click [Change].
Enter between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9) for the password.
[Old Password] Enter the password that is currently used.
[New Password] Enter the new password.
System Settings
67
[Conrm] Enter the same password again in [New Password].
System Settings
68
Deleting the MEAP Application Setting Information
0XW7-01C
Deletes the application data.
1Start SMS (Service Management Service).
" Launching SMS (Log in)(P. 9) "
2Click [MEAP Application Setting Information Management].
3Select the check box for the application whose setting information you wish to delete,
and then click [Delete].
Click [Select All] to select all of the applications.
System Settings
69
4Click [Yes].
→ The setting information of the application is deleted.
System Settings
70
4Follow the on-screen instructions and specify a le storage directory.
→ The log le is saved.
System Settings
73
4Click [Yes].
→ The log data is deleted.
System Settings
75
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
List of Error Messages (MEAP) .................................................................................................................. 77
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page .................................................................................................................... 79
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management] Page ......................................................................... 81
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page ..................................................................................... 83
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information Settings] Page ................................................................ 88
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page .......................................................................................... 89
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application Management] Page ..................................................... 91
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change Password] Pages ............................................................. 97
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] Page ...................................... 99
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log Management] Page ................................................................ 100
Other Errors ....................................................................................................................................................... 101
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
76
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
0XW7-01J
This section describes how to handle error messages that are displayed when logging in to or operating SMS.
The error messages are divided into separate pages. Click the following links and perform the necessary
actions.
Errors Relating to the [Login]
Page(P. 79)
Errors Relating to the [MEAP
Application Management] Page(P. 81)
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP
Application] Page(P. 83)
Errors Relating to the
[Authentication Information Settings]
Page(P. 88)
Errors Relating to the [License
Management] Page(P. 89)
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced
System Application Management]
Page(P. 91)
Errors Relating to the [Check
License] and [Change Password]
Pages(P. 97)
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
77
Errors Relating to the [Login] Page
0XW7-01K
●< The specied le does not exist or the le path is
incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 79) >
●< The contents of the specied le are incorrect or
information is missing. Check the le.(P. 79) >
●< The specied switch license le cannot be used for
password initialization. Try to specify the le again.
(P. 79) >
●< Cannot initialize password because a used switch
license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
(P. 79) >
●< Cannot initialize the password because another
application is being installed, or the rmware being
updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.(P. 79)
>
●< You do not have permissions to use Service Management
Service. Log in with administrator rights.(P. 80) >
●< Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout
operations have not been successfully performed. Please
wait a moment and then try this operation again.(P. 80) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 80) >
The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the specied le are incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.
Problem The specied le is not a switch license le.
Action Check to make sure that the specied le is a switch license le for password initialization.
Problem Information is missing from the specied le.
Action The password cannot be initialized using the specied le. Check the content of the le.
The specied switch license le cannot be used for password initialization. Try to
specify the le again.
Problem The specied le is not a switch license le for initializing the password.
Action Specify a switch license le for initializing the password.
Cannot initialize password because a used switch license le is specied. Try to specify
the le again.
Problem The specied license le has already been installed. License les that have been installed once cannot be
installed again.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
Cannot initialize the password because another application is being installed, or the
rmware being updated.
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or it cannot initialize the password because the
rmware is being updated.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
79
Action Wait until the processing stops before initializing the password.
You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service. Log in with
administrator rights.
Problem Only users with administrator rights can log in to SMS with the user name and password that they use for
logging in to the printer. The user trying to log in cannot do so because they do not have administrator
rights.
Action Log in again with the user name and password of a user with administrator rights.
Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations have not been
successfully performed. Please wait a moment and then try this operation again.
Problem Cannot log in for a period of time because either another user is logged in or when the user was logged in
before, the logout procedure was not performed properly.
Action If another user is logged in, wait until the user logs out. If another user is not logged in, wait for the lock
to be cancelled.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
80
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Management]
Page
0XW7-01L
●< Cannot start this application because there is no
distributable software in the application. Get a distributable
software.(P. 81) >
●< Cannot start this application because the number of
bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application
after stopping other applications.(P. 81) >
●< A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it
again after installing a license.(P. 81) >
●< Cannot start this application because system resources
(memory, threads, sockets, le descriptors, disk space, or
screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>(P. 81) >
●< Cannot uninstall this application because the
license le has not been deleted. Uninstall the
application after deleting the license in the [License
Management] page.(P. 82) >
●< The name listed in the le for the application and
the applet name to register with Applet Viewer
Service are different. Check the le.(P. 82) >
●< Cannot start this application because application
setting information is being processed. Please wait a
moment and then try again.(P. 82) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 82) >
Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the
application. Get a distributable software.
Problem The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the
limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.
Problem The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the
number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (ve applets), so the
application cannot be launched.
Action First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the
system which includes an applet, and then restart the application.
A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it again after installing a
license.
Problem Cannot start the application because a license le is not installed.
Action Install the license le, and then restart the application.
Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, le
descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>
Problem The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be
available to be allocated.
Action Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
81
Cannot uninstall this application because the license le has not been deleted.
Uninstall the application after deleting the license in the [License Management] page.
Problem The application cannot be uninstalled because the license le for the application still exists inside the
printer.
Action Uninstall the application after deleting the license on the [License Management] page.
The name listed in the le for the application and the applet name to register with
Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the le.
Problem The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the
Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application le.
Action Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application le, contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because application setting information is being
processed. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem The application cannot be started because application data is being deleted.
Action After deletion of application data completes, launch the application again.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
82
Errors Relating to the [Install MEAP Application] Page
0XW7-01R
●< The le for the application to install does not exist or the
le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 83) >
●< The le for the license to install does not exist or the le
path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 83) >
●< The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the
le.(P. 84) >
●< The contents of the le for the application to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 84) >
●< The contents of the le for the license to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 84) >
●< The following information is missing in le for the
specied application. Check the le. <Missing
information>(P. 84) >
●< The following information in the specied application is
incorrect. Check the le. <Inaccurate information>(P. 84) >
●< Cannot install this application because a code signing has
not been conrmed to be valid. Get a valid code signing.
(P. 84) >
●< Cannot install this license because the specied
application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a
path for the license le again.(P. 85) >
●< The number of applications that can be installed has
exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after
uninstalling other applications.(P. 85) >
●< Cannot install this license because the number of license
le ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact
your service representative.(P. 85) >
●< Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try
to specify the le again.(P. 85) >
●< To install the specied application, a license le must be
installed at the same time. Specify a license le.(P. 85) >
●< The specied le is a system application. Install the
application from the [Enhanced System Application
Management] page.(P. 85) >
●< The specied application does not require a license.
(P. 85) >
●< The specied license does not match this device.
Specify an installable license.(P. 86) >
●< The specied application does not support this
device.(P. 86) >
●< Cannot install this application because an applet
included in the specied application has exceeded the
area that can be displayed in the device panel.(P. 86) >
●< The specied le is an update le. Stop the
application that you want update and then install the
le.(P. 86) >
●< Cannot install the application because the license
requirement is different. Uninstall the specied
application, and then try to install the application
again.(P. 86) >
●< Cannot install this application because storage space
has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and
then try to install it again.(P. 86) >
●< Could not cancel installation. Installation has been
successfully completed.(P. 86) >
●< This application does not support the MEAP version of
the device. Contact your service representative after
checking the application version.(P. 87) >
●< The specied application cannot be installed on this
device.(P. 87) >
●< The process is canceled because the system has been
shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the
process again.(P. 87) >
●< Cannot install the application or license because
another application is being installed, or the rmware
being updated. Please wait a moment and then try
again.(P. 87) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 87) >
The le for the application to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to
specify the path again.
Problem The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The le for the license to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify
the path again.
Problem The license le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
83
The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the le.
Problem A manifest does not exist for the le specied as the application le.
Action This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
The contents of the le for the application to install are incorrect or information is
missing. Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as application les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This application le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as license les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The following information is missing in le for the specied application. Check the le.
<Missing information>
Problem The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application le.
Action Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the application developer or the application
support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>.
The following information in the specied application is incorrect. Check the le.
<Inaccurate information>
Problem 1 <Inaccurate information> in the application le cannot be recognized as correct information.
Action Contact the application developer or the application support help desk.
Problem 2 If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specications, the application's MEAP specication values and
the printer's MEAP specication values do not match.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been conrmed to be
valid. Get a valid code signing.
Problem 1 Cannot conrm that there is a valid code signature inside the application le.
Action Perform the correct code signing operation for the application.
Problem 2 The le may have been altered.
Action Contact the application developer.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
84
Cannot install this license because the specied application and license do not
correspond. Try to specify a path for the license le again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the specied license le does not correspond to the specied
application.
Action Specify the license le that corresponds to the application.
The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install
this application after uninstalling other applications.
Problem The maximum number of applications that can be installed is eight. You are attempting to install an
application that will exceed that number.
Action You can install it if you rst uninstall another installed application (unless it is a system application).
Cannot install this license because the number of license le ID logs that can be saved
has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license le cannot be installed because the number of license le ID information logs contained in the
license le exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
Problem License les that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specied license le has already
been installed.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
To install the specied application, a license le must be installed at the same time.
Specify a license le.
Problem You cannot install the application unless you specify the license le that corresponds to the application at
the same time.
Action Specify the corresponding license le when specifying the application, and then install them.
The specied le is a system application. Install the application from the [Enhanced
System Application Management] page.
Problem The specied le is a system application. It cannot be installed from this [Install MEAP Application] page.
Action Install it from the [Enhanced System Application Management] page.
The specied application does not require a license.
Problem An application le and license le were specied, but the specied application le does not require a
license le.
Action Install the application without specifying a license le.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
85
The specied license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License les contain the serial number information of printers in which the license le can be installed.
The specied license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number
information.
Action Specify a license le that matches the printer's serial number.
The specied application does not support this device.
Problem Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model.
Action Specify an application that supports this printer.
Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specied application
has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application
exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer.
Action Install an application that contains applets that support this printer.
The specied le is an update le. Stop the application that you want update and then
install the le.
Problem The specied application le is a le for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary
to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.
Action Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.
Cannot install the application because the license requirement is different. Uninstall
the specied application, and then try to install the application again.
Problem You have tried to upgrade an application which is already installed using a version of the same application
with different license requirements.
Action Upgrade using the same license conditions.
Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall
other applications and then try to install it again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity.
Action Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license le, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
86
This application does not support the MEAP version of the device. Contact your service
representative after checking the application version.
Problem The specied application cannot be installed because it does not support the MEAP version on this printer.
Action Contact the application developer.
The specied application cannot be installed on this device.
Problem The specied application cannot be installed because there is not enough memory in the printer.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system,
and then perform the process again.
Problem The installation could not be completed because it conicted with a system shutdown.
Action Restart the printer and perform the install again.
Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed,
or the rmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because
the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the application.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
87
Errors Relating to the [Authentication Information
Settings] Page
0XW7-01S
●< Settings are incorrect.(P. 88) >
●< The [Department ID] is incorrect. Enter an integer for the
[Department ID].(P. 88) >
●< The [Department ID] is not entered.(P. 88) >
●< Could not set authentication information because
an error occurred.(P. 88) >
●< Could not delete authentication information
because an error occurred.(P. 88) >
Settings are incorrect.
●Check to see if the password is incorrect.
●Enter Dept. ID within 7 digits.
●Check to see if the Department. ID is registered with the device.
Problem Cannot set authentication information because either the Dept. ID entered does not exist, or the PIN was
entered incorrectly.
Action Enter a Dept. ID and PIN that are registered in the printer.
The [Department ID] is incorrect.
Enter an integer for the [Department ID].
Problem The Dept. ID that was entered is a positive integer, but the registered Dept. ID is not a positive integer.
Action Enter the correct Dept. ID that is registered in the device.
The [Department ID] is not entered.
Problem The Dept. ID is blank.
Action Specify a Dept. ID.
Could not set authentication information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be set.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Could not delete authentication information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so authentication information could not be deleted.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
88
Errors Relating to the [License Management] Page
0XW7-01U
●< The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try
to specify the path again.(P. 89) >
●< The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect
or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 89) >
●< Cannot install this license because the specied license does
not correspond to this application. Try to specify a path for the
license le again.(P. 89) >
●< Cannot install this license because the number of license le
ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the limit. Contact your
service representative.(P. 89) >
●< Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to
specify the le again.(P. 89) >
●< The specied license does not match this device.
Specify an installable license.(P. 90) >
●< Could not cancel installation. Installation has
been successfully completed.(P. 90) >
●< Cannot install the license because another
application is being installed, or the rmware
being updated. Please wait a moment and then try
again.(P. 90) >
●< Cannot disable the license le because this
application has been started. Disable the license
le after stopping the application.(P. 90) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 90) >
The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the le is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license le cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
Cannot install this license because the specied license does not correspond to this
application. Try to specify a path for the license le again.
Problem The specied license le does not correspond to the application, so they cannot be installed.
Action Specify the license le that corresponds to the application.
Check to make sure that the manifest le listed inside the license le is correct.
Cannot install this license because the number of license le ID logs that can be saved
has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license le cannot be installed because the number of license le ID information logs contained in the
license le exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
Problem According to the specications, a license le which is already installed cannot be installed again. The
specied license le has already been installed.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
89
The specied license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License les contain lists of printers in which they can be installed. The specied license le cannot be
installed in this printer.
Action Specify a license le that can be installed in this printer.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license le, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
Cannot install the license because another application is being installed, or the
rmware being updated.
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license le cannot be installed because
the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the license le.
Cannot disable the license le because this application has been started. Disable the
license le after stopping the application.
Problem You cannot disable a license if the corresponding application is still running.
Action Stop the application that corresponds to the license before disabling the license.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact the application developer.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
90
Errors Relating to the [Enhanced System Application
Management] Page
0XW7-01W
●< Cannot start this application because there is no
distributable software in the application. Get a
distributable software.(P. 92) >
●< Cannot start this application because the number of
bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this
application after stopping other applications.(P. 92) >
●< Cannot start this application because system resources
(memory, threads, sockets, le descriptors, disk space, or
screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>(P. 92) >
●< The name listed in the le for the application and the
applet name to register with Applet Viewer Service are
different. Check the le.(P. 92) >
●< The following login services cannot be uninstalled:
(P. 92)
- The currently set login service
- Login services that will be enabled after the device is
restarted
- Default Authentication login services
The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the
device is restarted.>
●< The le for the application to install does not exist or
the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.
(P. 92) >
●< The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the
le.(P. 93) >
●< The le for the license to install does not exist or the le
path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.(P. 93) >
●< The contents of the le for the application to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 93)
>
●< The contents of the le for the license to install are
incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.(P. 93)
>
●< Cannot install this application because a code signing
has not been conrmed to be valid. Get a valid code
signing.(P. 93) >
●< Cannot install this license because the specied
application and license do not correspond. Try to specify
a path for the license le again.(P. 93) >
●< The specied le is not system application. Check the
le.(P. 93) >
●< Cannot install this license because the number of
license le ID logs that can be saved has exceeded the
limit. Contact your service representative.(P. 94) >
●< Cannot install because a used license le is specied.
Try to specify the le again.(P. 94) >
●< To install the specied application, a license le must be
installed at the same time. Specify a license le.(P. 94) >
●< The following information in the specied application is
incorrect. Check the le. <Inaccurate information>(P. 94)
>
●< The following information is missing in le for the
specied application. Check the le. <Missing
information>(P. 94) >
●< The specied application does not support this device.
(P. 94) >
●< The specied license does not match this device. Specify
an installable license.(P. 94) >
●< Cannot install this application because an applet
included in the specied application has exceeded the
area that can be displayed in the device panel.(P. 95) >
●< The specied le is an update le. Stop the application
that you want update and then install the le.(P. 95) >
●< The specied le is an update le for a login service that
is currently set. Switch to another login service, restart
the device, and then install the le.(P. 95) >
●< Cannot install this application because storage space
has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then
try to install it again.(P. 95) >
●< Could not cancel installation. Installation has been
successfully completed.(P. 95) >
●< The process is canceled because the system has been
shut down. Restart the system, and then perform the
process again.(P. 95) >
●< Cannot install the application or license because
another application is being installed, or the rmware
being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
(P. 95) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 96) >
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
91
Cannot start this application because there is no distributable software in the
application. Get a distributable software.
Problem The application cannot be started because it does not contain any redistributable modules.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the
limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.
Problem The application that you are attempting to launch contains applets. If the application was launched, the
number of applets that would be booted on the system would exceed the limit (ve applets), so the
application cannot be launched.
Action First, reduce the number of applets running on the system by stopping an application running on the
system which includes an applet, and then restart the application.
Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, le
descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be
available. <Resources>
Problem The application cannot be started because the system resources for opening the application may not be
available to be allocated.
Action Restart this application after stopping other applications. It may be able to start this time.
The name listed in the le for the application and the applet name to register with
Applet Viewer Service are different. Check the le.
Problem The application cannot be started because the applet name the application is trying to register in the
Applet Viewer Service differs from the applet name included in the application le.
Action Since it is necessary to make corrections to the application le, contact the application developer.
The following login services cannot be uninstalled:
- The currently set login service
- Login services that will be enabled after the device is restarted
- Default Authentication login services
The currently set login service can be uninstalled after the device is restarted.
Problem The currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the machine, and the
Default Authentication login service cannot be uninstalled.
Action Do not uninstall the currently set login service, a login service that will be enabled after restarting the
machine, or the Default Authentication login service. To uninstall the currently set login service, uninstall it
after restarting the machine.
The le for the application to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to
specify the path again.
Problem The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
92
The manifest is not listed in the specied le. Check the le.
Problem A manifest does not exist for the le specied as the application le.
Action This application cannot be installed. Contact the application developer.
The le for the license to install does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify
the path again.
Problem The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the le for the application to install are incorrect or information is
missing. Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as application les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This application le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
The contents of the le for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.
Problem Either the content of the les specied as license les is not correct or information is missing.
Action This license le cannot be installed. Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the
application developer or the application support help desk.
Cannot install this application because a code signing has not been conrmed to be
valid. Get a valid code signing.
Problem 1 Cannot conrm that there is a valid code signature inside the application le.
Action Perform the correct code signing operation for the application.
Problem 2 The le may have been altered.
Action Contact the application developer.
Cannot install this license because the specied application and license do not
correspond. Try to specify a path for the license le again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the specied license le does not correspond to the specied
application.
Action Specify the license le that corresponds to the application.
The specied le is not system application. Check the le.
Problem The specied le is not system application. It cannot be installed from the [Enhanced System Application
Management] page.
Action Install it from the [Install MEAP Application] page.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
93
Cannot install this license because the number of license le ID logs that can be saved
has exceeded the limit. Contact your service representative.
Problem The license le cannot be installed because the number of license le ID information logs contained in the
license le exceeds the number that can be saved.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
Cannot install because a used license le is specied. Try to specify the le again.
Problem License les that have been installed once cannot be installed again. The specied license le has already
been installed.
Action Since the specied license le cannot be installed, specify another le.
To install the specied application, a license le must be installed at the same time.
Specify a license le.
Problem You cannot install the application unless you specify the license le that corresponds to the application at
the same time.
Action Specify the corresponding license le when specifying the application, and then install them.
The following information in the specied application is incorrect. Check the le.
<Inaccurate information>
Problem 1 <Inaccurate information> in the application le cannot be recognized as correct information.
Action Contact the application developer or the application support help desk.
Problem 2 If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specications, the application's MEAP specication values and
the printer's MEAP specication values do not match.
Action Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales representatives.
The following information is missing in le for the specied application. Check the le.
<Missing information>
Problem The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application.
Action Check the le. If there are no problems with the les, contact the application developer or the application
support help desk concerning the <Missing Information>.
The specied application does not support this device.
Problem Some applications can only be installed in certain printer models. It cannot be installed in this model.
Action Specify an application that supports this printer.
The specied license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.
Problem License les contain the serial number information of printers in which the license le can be installed.
The specied license cannot be installed because it does not contain the printer's serial number
information.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
94
Action Specify a license le that matches the serial number of this printer.
Cannot install this application because an applet included in the specied application
has exceeded the area that can be displayed in the device panel.
Problem The application cannot be installed because the display area of an applet included in the application
exceeds the area that can be displayed on the operation panel of the printer.
Action Install an application that contains applets that support this printer.
The specied le is an update le. Stop the application that you want update and then
install the le.
Problem The specied application le is a le for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary
to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.
Action Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.
The specied le is an update le for a login service that is currently set. Switch to
another login service, restart the device, and then install the le.
Problem Although the specied application le is an update le for the login service that is currently set, it cannot
update a login service that has already started.
Action To install the update le for the login service, start another login service, and then install the update le.
Cannot install this application because storage space has been exceeded. Uninstall
other applications and then try to install it again.
Problem The application cannot be installed because there is not enough free storage capacity.
Action Make storage capacity available by uninstalling an application that is not being used.
Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.
Problem The [Cancel] button was pressed when the installation operation could not be cancelled.
Action Disable the license le, download it from the [License Management] page, and then uninstall it.
The process is canceled because the system has been shut down. Restart the system,
and then perform the process again.
Problem The installation could not be completed because it conicted with a system shutdown.
Action Restart the printer and perform the install again.
Cannot install the application or license because another application is being installed,
or the rmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the application cannot be installed because
the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before installing the application.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
95
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
96
Errors Relating to the [Check License] and [Change
Password] Pages
0XW7-01X
●< The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to
specify the path again.(P. 97) >
●< The contents of the specied le are incorrect or information is missing.
Check the le.(P. 97) >
●< The specied switch license le cannot be used to delete the license le
ID log. Try to specify the path again.(P. 97) >
●< The specied license is already installed. Installed license le
information cannot be displayed.(P. 97) >
●< Cannot perform the operation because another application is being
installed, or the rmware being updated. Please wait a moment and then
try again.(P. 97) >
●< The old password is incorrect.(P. 98) >
●< The new password is incorrect. Enter the
password with 8 to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.(P. 98) >
●< The new password and password to
conrm do not match.(P. 98) >
●< Error: <Error Details>(P. 98) >
The specied le does not exist or the le path is incorrect. Try to specify the path
again.
Problem The le does not exist on the specied path or the le path is incorrect.
Action Specify the le path correctly.
The contents of the specied le are incorrect or information is missing. Check the le.
Problem 1 The content of the le is not correct. (A le other than a license le was specied.)
Action Check to make sure that the specied le is a license le.
Problem 2 Information is missing from the le.
Action Check the content of the le.
The specied switch license le cannot be used to delete the license le ID log. Try to
specify the path again.
Problem The specied le is not a switch license le for deleting license le ID logs.
Action Try specifying the le path for the switch license for deleting license le ID logs.
The specied license is already installed. Installed license le information cannot be
displayed.
Problem Information about license les that have already been installed in this printer cannot be displayed.
Action Specify another license le.
Cannot perform the operation because another application is being installed, or the
rmware being updated.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
97
Please wait a moment and then try again.
Problem Either it is installed in another application outside of SMS, or the license le information cannot be
displayed because the rmware has been updated.
Action Wait until the processing stops before displaying the license information.
The old password is incorrect.
Problem The text string entered as the current password is different from the current password.
Action Enter the correct password.
The new password is incorrect. Enter the password with 8 to 32 single-byte
alphanumeric characters.
Problem The new password has under 8 characters or more than 33 characters. Illegal characters that cannot be
used in passwords have been used.
Action Enter a new password of between 8 and 32 alphanumeric characters (a to z, A to Z, and 0 to 9).
The new password and password to conrm do not match.
Problem The password cannot be changed because the new password and the conrmation password do not
match.
Action Enter a new password and the same text string as the conrmation password.
Error: <Error Details>
Problem An error has occurred for some reason. See <Error Details> for details.
Action If the solutions given in <Error Details> are unclear, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or sales
representatives.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
98
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Setting
Information Management] Page
0XW7-01Y
●< Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications because it is in use by currently running
applications.Stop the following applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and then delete the
setting information. <Application Name>(P. 99) >
●< Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error occurred.(P. 99) >
Cannot delete the setting information for the selected applications because it is in use
by currently running applications.
Stop the following applications, or stop all applications except for login services, and
then delete the setting information.
<Application Name>
Problem The application is in one of the following states.
●Started
●Starting
●Stopping
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button, bring the applications corresponding to the error
message to other state than "Started," "Starting" or "Stopping," and then try deletion again.
Could not delete MEAP application setting information because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the setting information could not be deleted.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
99
Errors Relating to the [MEAP Application Log
Management] Page
0XW7-020
●< Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist.
(P. 100) >
●< Could not download application logs because an error occurred.(P. 100) >
●< Could not delete application logs
because an error occurred.(P. 100) >
Cannot download application logs because application logs do not exist.
Problem The application log does not exist.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Could not download application logs because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be downloaded.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
Could not delete application logs because an error occurred.
Problem An error has occurred for some reason, so the log could not be deleted.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
100
Other Errors
0XW7-021
●< Cannot nd the specied application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.(P. 101) >
Cannot nd the specied application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.
Problem The application for the attempted operation does not exist.
Action Return to the previous page using the [Back] button.
List of Error Messages (MEAP)
101
Using This Guide
Using This Guide ............................................................................................................................................. 103
Operating Environment of This Guide ............................................................................................................. 104
Screen Layout of This Guide ............................................................................................................................. 105
Top Page ...................................................................................................................................................... 106
Topic Page .................................................................................................................................................... 107
Site Map ....................................................................................................................................................... 108
Search Method ............................................................................................................................................. 109
Viewing This Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 110
Using This Guide
102
Using This Guide
0XW7-022
This chapter describes how to use this guide.
Operating Environment of This Guide(P. 104)
Screen Layout of This Guide(P. 105)
Top Page(P. 106)
Topic Page(P. 107)
Site Map(P. 108)
Search Method(P. 109)
Viewing This Guide(P. 110)
<To nd the desired content>
●Selecting between the category icons
From the top page, select a category icon you want.
" Top Page(P. 106) "
●Searching from the site map
On the site map, you can view the list of whole sections of this guide sorted by category. You can
directly display sections in a category.
" Site Map(P. 108) "
●Whole text search function
You can search by keyword in this guide. You can display the desired description from the search
results by entering a keyword you want to search. This function supports AND search.
" Search Method(P. 109) "
Using This Guide
103
Operating Environment of This Guide
0XW7-023
You need a Web browser to use this guide. Operation of the following Web browsers is guaranteed.
Windows
●Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
●Firefox 2.x or later
Mac OS
●Safari 3.x or later
●Firefox 3.x or later
NOTE
Enabling the script function
Enable the script function for a Web browser before using this guide.
Using This Guide
104
Screen Layout of This Guide
0XW7-024
This section describes the screen layout of this guide.
The page displayed right after this guide starts is called "Top Page" and the guide description is called "Topic
Page" in this section.
"Site map" is displayed from [Site map] which is located on the upper right of this guide.
The search panel is used to make search through this guide.
The screen layout is different for each page, so click the following links to see the instruction.
Top Page(P. 106)
Topic Page(P. 107)
Site Map(P. 108)
Search Method(P. 109)
Using This Guide
105
Top Page
0XW7-025
(1) Select from functions
The instructions of each function and operation method are described.
(2) [Search]
The search panel is displayed by entering keyword(s) and clicking [ ].
For details, see " Search Method(P. 109) ."
(3) [Top]
The top page of this guide is displayed.
(4) [Site map]
The entire contents of this guide are displayed.
(5) [Help]
How to use this guide is displayed.
(6) [Disclaimers]
The disclaimers are displayed.
(7) [Copyright]
The information of copyrights is displayed.
(8) [Trademarks]
The trademarks are displayed.
Using This Guide
106
Topic Page
0XW7-026
(1) Chapter contents
This is the list of the contents in the chapter. Clicking each item displays the description in the topic page.
Click [ ] to expand a menu, and click [ ] to collapse a menu.
Alternatively, click [ Expand all ] to expand all menus, and click [ Collapse all ] to collapse all
menus.
(2) Topic page
The descriptions of each item are displayed.
The current location of the displayed topic is displayed at the upper left of the topic page. Click a link to
move to a higher level.
(3) [Chapter] menu
You can select a different chapter from the pull-down menu.
(4) [Contents] tab
Click to display the chapter contents panel.
(5) [Search] tab
Click to display the search panel.
For details, see " Search Method(P. 109) ."
(6) [ ]
Click to display or hide the chapter contents panel/search panel.
(7) [Previous]/[Next]
Click to move to the previous or next topic.
(8) [Print this topic]
Prints only the topic page currently displayed.
(9) [Print all]
Prints all the contents in a chapter.
Using This Guide
107
Site Map
0XW7-027
(1) Whole contents
Shows the all chapters and sections of this guide. Click an item to view the contents.
Using This Guide
108
Search Method
0XW7-028
(1) Search
Entering a character string in [Search] on the top page or in the [Keyword] text box on the search panel
and then clicking [ ] displays the search results.
The AND search is available in this guide so you can rene the search results by entering two or more
keywords. When entering keywords, enter a space between the keywords.
●Example: Adding License (if you want to display pages which include words, "Adding" and "License")
(2) Search result
The search results for a keyword are displayed.
If there are more than 10 search results, you can see the other results by clicking [ ], [ ], or the
number which is located below the result.
(3) [Search options]
Click to display the search options.
The search options can be used to specify the chapter to search, case sensitivity, and whether to
differentiate between one- and two-byte characters.
Click [Search with these conditions] to search with the specied conditions.
Using This Guide
109
Viewing This Guide
0XW7-029
Symbols Used in This Guide
The following symbols are used in this Guide to mark descriptions of handling restrictions, precautions, and
instructions that should be observed for your safety.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading
these notes is highly recommended.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Guide
The following are examples of how control panel keys and on-screen buttons are depicted in this guide.
Type Depiction in This Guide Example
Control panel keys [Key name] keys [Network] key
Settings displayed on the control panel <Setting name shown in the display> <On>
Buttons on computer operation screen and so on [Button name and so on] [OK]
Screenshots Used in This Guide
The contents of the screenshots used in this guide are the default settings.
Depending on the system conguration, the contents of the screenshots may partly differ.
Using This Guide
110
Disclaimer
0XW7-02A
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS
MATERIAL.
Disclaimer
112
Trademarks
0XW7-02E
●"MEAP" is a trademark of CANON Inc., referring to an "application platform" for Canon multifunction and
single function printers.
●Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Mac, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
●Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
●This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype
Imaging, Inc. UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and
Trademark Oce and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
●UFST: Copyright© 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
●Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its
aliates.
●Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Copyright© 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
●Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763;
6,639,593; 6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
●All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe
Systems Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for
Adobe Systems' implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
●Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or
similar item refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript
technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to
be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
●Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
●Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Trademarks
114
●All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
●All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their
respective owners.
Trademarks
115
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
116
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
117